Rapid Eye™ Hybrid Hd - Honeywell Video Systems

Transcript

Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorders System Administrator Guide Document 800-02953V9 – Rev A – 01/2013 System Administrator Guide Revisions Issue Date Revisions A 01/09 New preliminary document based on 800-02325 RevA. V6 Rev A 08/2011 Document updated for the latest Rapid Eye V10.0 software release. This V10 software release adds IP camera support for the Honeywell equIP® Series H.264 IP cameras for Rapid Eye Hybrid HD units. V7 Rev A 09/2011 Document updated for the latest Rapid Eye V10.0 software release (build 40). This V10 software release adds IP camera support for the Rapid Eye Hybrid LT 4- and 8-channel units. This Rapid Eye Hybrid System Administrator Guide now covers both the Rapid Eye Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT units. V8 Rev A 03/2012 Document updated for the latest Rapid Eye V10.1 software release. This V10.1 software release adds new Honeywell IP camera support (equIP® 1080p, equIP® Wide Dynamic Range IP, Performance IP) and support for a few ONVIF IP cameras. Some other features, such as automatic IP camera discovery, have also been added with this release. V9 Rev A 01/2013 Minor changes made to IP camera sections to make it clear only some ONVIF IP cameras have been tested and are supported. 4 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Contents About This Document . . . . . . Overview of Contents. . . . Warranty and Service. . . . Related Documents . . . . Typographical Conventions 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 21 22 22 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . 26 . 26 . 26 . 27 . 27 . 28 . 28 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 35 Adding a Site to the Rapid Eye Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Adding a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Icons and Alternate Command Access . . . . . . . . . . Another Site Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Removal of a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Site-Related Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Sites in a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Folder with Rapid Eye Admin Application Assigning a Site to a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . The Administration of a Rapid Eye System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Start Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Using a PC to Operate Rapid Eye Units. . . . . . . . . About Using LocalView Onsite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Rapid Eye Active Alert Units and LocalView . . . . . . Using a PC to Install Rapid Eye Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Software Only (View Operators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Admin and View Software (System Administrator) . . . . . . . Installing Rapid Eye Software on Windows 7 . . . . . . . . . Installing Honeywell Video Analytics Software on Windows 7 . Running Admin Software on First Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using View Software for Site Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . For Questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 . 38 . 38 . 39 . 39 . 39 . 40 . 40 . 41 . 41 . 41 . 41 . 41 . 41 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Working with Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using LocalView to Modify the IP Address of a Rapid Eye Unit Testing a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Without DNS . . . . . . DHCP Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using an Internet Router for Network Address Translation . . . . . . . Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 . 44 . 45 . 45 . 45 . 46 . 47 . 48 . 49 5 Contents Direct Connection to a Standalone PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dial-Up Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Irregular Use of Area Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forcing a Long-Distance Dial-Up Call Using a Local Area Code Forcing a Local Dial-Up Call Across Area Codes . . . . . . . . Dial-Up Technical Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offering Many Dial-Up Connections to the Same Unit . . . . . . Multiple Connections to a Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAS Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning to Connect to One Unit at a Time . . . . . . . . . . . Setting a Connection to a RAS Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a RAS Server Before Connecting to Units . . . . . . . . . Connection Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Primary Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing Alarms to an Alarm Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequencing Site Alarm Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quickly Assigning a Site to Many Alarm Stations . . . . . . . . Setting a Site to Not Report Alarms to a Specific Station . . . . Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station . . . . Cancelling the Customization of a Telephone Number . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 . 52 . 53 . 53 . 54 . 54 . 54 . 55 . 56 . 56 . 57 . 58 . 59 . 60 . 60 . 60 . 61 . 61 . 62 . 62 . 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 . 65 . 66 . 67 . 69 . 69 . 70 . 71 . 72 . 72 . 72 . 73 . 73 . 74 . 74 . 75 . 76 . 76 . 76 . 76 . 77 . 78 Video Feed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 General Camera Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting a Video Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-Enabling a Camera Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-Enabling All Newly Connected and Powered Cameras Disabling a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolution of Live Video in View Software . . . . . . . . . Other Video Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording Video with Continuous Recording Settings . . . . . . . Enabling the Recording of a Video Feed . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Settings for Recorded Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolution Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit Configuration Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Maintenance Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting a Maintenance Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Support for Older Unit Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making a Site Operational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit Time Zone and Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Time Zone of a Rapid Eye Unit. . . . . . . . . Conflicting Time Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Clock Automatically with SNTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the System Clock Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the Clock on a PC Running Rapid Eye Software Using a PC Clock to Set a Unit Clock Manually . . . . . . Adjusting the Time on an Operational Unit. . . . . . . . . Correcting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Securing a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rebooting a Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote View Software Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ending Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Apply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedback Box Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 . 82 . 82 . 83 . 83 . 83 . 84 . 84 . 85 . 85 . 86 . 87 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Frame Rate Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quality Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Recording and Event Recording . . . . . . . . . . . Estimating Storage Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimizing Recorded Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Maximization of Performance . . . . . . . . . Making Optimized Resolution and Frame Rate Settings. The Enhanced Preview of Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolution Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comparing the Resolutions of Recorded Video . . . . . Security and Presence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Camera Tips for Visual Identification . . . . . . . . . . . Resolution Gauge for Retrieval Session . . . . . . . . . Recorded Video Resolution Reference. . . . . . . . . . Monitor Settings to Customize Windows for a PC . . . . . . . . . PC Monitor Refresh Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microsoft Dual View Using Two Monitors . . . . . . . . Larger Monitors and Microsoft Windows . . . . . . . . . Environmental Interference for Video Feeds . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Compromise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 . 88 . 89 . 89 . 90 . 90 . 91 . 92 . 92 . 93 . 94 . 94 . 95 . 96 . 97 . 98 . 99 . 99 . 99 100 100 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Serial Device Settings for PTZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning and Configuring a New PTZ Device. . . . . Video Tab Settings for PTZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling a PTZ Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a PTZ Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the PTZ Dartboard Control . . . . . . . . . Using the Dartboard Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toggling Between Zonal Mode and Pull Mode . . . . Pulling the Rubber-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Zonal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programming a PTZ Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a Preset on a PTZ Camera . . . . . . . . Testing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behavior of PTZ After a Session Closes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Support for RapidDome PTZ Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RapidDome PTZ Tours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RapidDome Mimic Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing a Mimic Tour on a RapidDome Camera . . . . RapidDome Preset Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Tour of Presets on a RapidDome Camera Testing a Preset Tour on a RapidDome Camera. . . . Privacy Zones for RapidDome . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting a Privacy Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using ACUIX Analog Domes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Intellibus Device for a Rapid Eye Unit. Configuring an ACUIX Dome for PTZ Use . . . . . . . Discovering ACUIX Domes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backing Up an ACUIX Configuration File to a PC . . . Downloading a Configuration File to an ACUIX Dome . Identifying the Model of the ACUIX Dome . . . . . . . Upgrading the Firmware of an ACUIX Dome. . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 102 103 103 105 105 105 106 106 107 107 108 109 110 111 112 112 113 113 113 115 115 115 116 116 117 117 117 118 119 119 Enhancing Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Event Recording Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Using Higher Settings for Video Recorded During an Event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Setting Lower Values for Continuous Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 7 Contents Using the Boost Button for Event Recording. . . . . . . . Automatically Recording Events of Interest . . . . . . . . Scheduling Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Schedule to a Camera or Group of Cameras . Using a 15-Minute Increment in a Schedule . . . . . . . . Renaming a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarms and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on Holidays and Exceptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Holidays and Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling a Response to an Event of Interest . . . . . . . . . . . Triggers and Events of Interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the Response Panel Used for Making Rules . . Checklist for Setting a Rule in the Response Schedule . . Renaming a Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rule Status Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing the Response to a Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Schedule to a Response Rule. . . . . . . . . Disabling a Response Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motion Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Motion Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Motion Detection with Masking. . . . . . . . Masking an Area of the Video Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . Masking Part of a Video Feed from Motion Detection . . . False Positives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Detection Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . Motion Detection Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smart Video Motion Detection (VMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motion Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tamper Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Tamper Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating of Tamper Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scene Changed Tamper Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating the Length of the Video Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rapid Eye Storage Estimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of Cameras and Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame Rate for Continuous Recording . . . . . . . . . . . Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Higher Values When Recording Video . . . . . . . Obtaining Unit Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rapid Eye Unit Storage Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 123 123 125 125 125 126 126 127 127 127 128 128 129 130 130 131 132 132 133 133 133 133 134 135 135 135 136 136 136 137 138 139 140 141 141 142 143 145 146 146 147 147 148 149 Configuring Other Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Working with Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearing Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preventing Users from Clearing Storage . . . . . Tracing the Clearing of Storage . . . . . . . . . Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit . . . . . . . . . . System Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Files and Associated Rapid Eye Settings Downloading a File from a Rapid Eye Unit . . . . Uploading a File to a Rapid Eye Unit . . . . . . . System Tab in a Maintenance Session . . . . . . . . . . Logging System Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . System Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 151 152 153 153 154 155 155 156 157 157 158 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Making the Fault Relay Operational . . . . . . . . . . . . Camera Signal Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling or Disabling Local Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . Setting a Bandwidth Throughput Option . . . . . . . . . . LAN/WAN Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Network Settings on a Unit . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Maximum Network Data Rate . . . . . . . . TCP Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default System Values for a Rapid Eye Unit . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Modem Serial Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Changing Modem Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PPP IP Settings Reserved for Modem Connection. . . . . Setting an External Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PTZ Serial Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning and Setting a PTZ Device . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Monitor Output 1 as a Public Display Monitor . . . . . . . . External Hardware Control of a Public Display Monitor . . Using LocalView as an Additional Public Display Monitor . Customer Data and Customer Device Events . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Customer Device that Sends Data to a Unit . . . Adding an Event Rule for a Data Recording Device . . . . Reference for Searching Rules and Regular Expressions . NetPIT and PIT Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rapid Eye Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Rapid Eye Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Audio with LocalView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Audio for Onsite Use by LocalView . . . . . . . Eagle Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Operators Connecting to One Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Live Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One Operator Connecting to Multiple Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 159 159 159 159 160 160 161 161 162 162 163 164 164 164 165 165 166 167 167 168 169 170 171 172 172 173 173 174 174 174 175 175 175 176 176 Managing User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Key Facts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before Creating User Accounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default User. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting a Unit to Central User Management . . . . . . . Using Admin and View to Create a User Account . . . . . . . . . Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basing Account Rights on Another User . . . . . . . . . Updating an Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Account in LocalView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating an Account in LocalView . . . . . . . . . . . . Granting More or Less Rights to an Account . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Rights in an Account . . . . . . . . . . Right to Use ActivEye, by Honeywell Video Analytics . . User Rights and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Denying Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a User Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting an Account Used to Access LocalView Onsite . Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 177 178 179 179 180 180 181 182 183 183 183 184 184 185 185 186 187 187 188 188 9 Contents 10 Security for a Rapid Eye System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Security Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Securing the Rapid Eye System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Security Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limiting the Use of Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limiting Access to Admin Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . Password Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rapid Eye Database Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SQL-Server Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SQL-Server Logon Reserved for Rapid Eye Operators . . . . . System Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Road Map to Setting the System Password . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the System Password Using Admin. . . . . . . . . . Changing the System Password on Each Rapid Eye Unit . . . . Updating Users on System Password Changes . . . . . . . . . Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a System Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Password from All Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Password from One of Many Units . . . . . . . . . . . System Password Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a Unit when a System Password Is Enabled . . . . . Last Valid Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If a Used Unit Comes from Another Rapid Eye System . . . . . Re-Entering a Site Definition for a Unit with a System Password Checking if the Correct System Password Was Entered . . . . User Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Administrator Account’s Password. . . . . . . . . . Rights of User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Rights Granted and Accessible Sites . . . . . . . . . Right to Use Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Granting Access to Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right to Use Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right to Use View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right to Access a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Sites that Can Be Accessed . . . . . . . . . . . . Limiting the Time that a Unit Can Be Used . . . . . . . . . . . . Limiting the Use of Cameras and Other Devices by Partitioning High-Security Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Events Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting an Event to Trigger an Alarm or To Be Logged . . . . . Setting an Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting an Event to Report an Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tracing Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using an Event Session to Search the Event Log . . . . . . . . Working with Search Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A Rapid Eye Alarm Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Response Priority for Alarm Notification . . . . . . . . . PPP Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Denying Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Denying Access to a User of Your Rapid Eye System . . . . . . Stopping a Session on a Networked Rapid Eye Unit . . . . . . Removing Rapid Eye Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 189 190 190 191 191 191 192 193 193 194 194 195 196 196 197 197 198 198 200 201 201 202 203 204 204 204 205 205 206 207 208 208 208 209 210 210 211 211 212 215 216 216 217 217 218 219 220 221 221 222 222 222 223 224 225 226 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide 11 Rapid Eye Alarm Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checklist to Configure a Rapid Eye Alarm Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Station Operator Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Administrator Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying and Defining a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) Fields in an Alarm Station’s Definition Network Connection to an Alarm Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Network Connection to an Alarm Station . . . . . . . Network Address Translation for Alarm Stations . . . . . . . . . . . Using Admin to Prepare a Rapid Eye Unit for NAT . . . . . . . . . Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station . . . . . . . . Entering Area Codes in Site and Alarm Station Definitions . . . . . Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station . . . . . . . Using a Local Call Across Area Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Toll-Free Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Long Distance Call in One Area Code. . . . . . . . . . . . Delaying the Speed of Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delaying the Extension Suffix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . International Dial-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Long-Distance Prefixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAS Connection to an Alarm Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Connection to a RAS Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making an Alarm Station Operational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using More Than One Alarm Station Definition . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Extra Alarm Station Definitions for the Same PC . . . . . . Disconnecting When Alarms Are in Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up an Alarm Station for Alarm Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Automatic Clip Creation and Rearm Features . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up Automatic Clip Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up the Automatic Rearm Alarms Feature . . . . . . . . . . Removing an Alarm Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabling/Enabling the Dial-Up Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarms from a De-Listed or Unregistered Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tracing a Unit Sending an Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping a Site from Reporting to a Specific Alarm Station . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 227 228 228 228 229 230 231 231 232 233 234 234 235 236 237 238 238 239 239 239 240 240 240 241 242 243 244 244 244 244 245 245 246 247 247 247 247 248 Archival Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Configuring an Archival Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Archival Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing Archived Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing Back Archived Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up an Archival Server . . . . . . . . . . . Discovering Sites on the Archival Server . . . . . . Playing Back Archived Video and Data . . . . . . Using Archival Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up Archival Logs to be Recorded . . . . . Viewing Archival Logs with the Admin Application . Viewing Archival Logs with the View Application. . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 254 256 257 257 258 259 260 260 261 263 Touring Many Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 Preliminary Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Site Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Default Time that a Unit Displays During a Site Tour . Customizing a Tour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 266 266 267 11 Contents Changing the Order of Sites in a Tour . . . . . . . . . Changing the Time Spent at a Site During a Tour . . . Selecting Another Connection to a Site During a Tour Removing a Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 268 268 269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 272 272 272 272 273 273 274 274 Rapid Eye Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Starting Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining a Rapid Eye Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Default Rapid Eye Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contrasting Database Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting to Another Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Another Rapid Eye Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Database with View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Rapid Eye Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naming Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Empty MS-Access Compatible Rapid Eye Database . . . . . . . . SQL Server Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Microsoft SQL Server with an Empty Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Admin to Create a SQL-Compatible Rapid Eye Database . . . . . . . . Database Based On Another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making a Copy of a Rapid Eye Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming a Rapid Eye Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rapid Eye Database for MinAdmin Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading a Rapid Eye Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading a Local Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading a Local Database Without Connecting to the Rapid Eye Database . Producing a Local Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making a Local Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Database with View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting a Rapid Eye Database for View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refreshing a Local Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refreshing a Local Database while Running View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Open a Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 276 276 277 278 278 279 279 280 280 281 281 282 283 284 284 285 285 285 286 286 286 287 287 288 288 289 289 290 IP Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Supported IP Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatically Discovering IP Cameras. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up Fixed IP Cameras. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Video Channels for IP Video . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring IP Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Recording Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using ACUIX IP PTZ Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring ACUIX IP PTZ Settings on the Camera Web Page Configuring ACUIX IP PTZ Settings in Rapid Eye . . . . . . . Tamper Detection with Honeywell IP Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motion Detection with Supported Honeywell IP Cameras . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . Alarm Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Viewing the Alarm Log . . . . . . Opening the Alarm Log . Sorting the Log . . . . . Selecting Log Items. . . Printing the Log. . . . . . . . . . Filtering the Log . . . . . . . . . Archiving the Log . . . . . . . . . Removing Log Items . . . . . . . Alarm Log Data Reference . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 293 294 294 295 297 298 298 299 300 301 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Alarm Input/Output with IP Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Supported ONVIF IP Cameras with Rapid Eye Hybrid . . . . . . . Setting Up Supported Fixed ONVIF IP Cameras . . . . . . . . . Configuring Supported ONVIF IP Cameras with Web Services . Tamper Detection with Supported ONVIF IP Cameras . . . . . Motion Detection with Supported ONVIF IP Cameras . . . . . . Supported ONVIF IP Camera Limitations with Rapid Eye Hybrid Viewing Video and Alarms from IP Cameras. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Live and Recorded Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm/Event Monitoring and Alarm Callback . . . . . . . . . . . IP Camera Limitations with Rapid Eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 305 305 306 306 306 307 308 308 308 308 End User License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 13 Contents 14 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figures Figure 1-1 Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT Requirements to Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Figure 1-2 Setuppad.exe Application Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Figure 1-3 Program Compatibility Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Figure 1-4 End-User License Agreement for Microsoft Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Figure 1-5 Microsoft ActiveX Control Pad Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Figure 1-6 ActiveX Control Pad Setup Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Figure 1-7 Restart Your Computer to Apply Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Figure 1-8 Select Troubleshooting Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Figure 1-9 Program Compatibility Test Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Figure 1-10 Program Compatibility Problems Noticed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Figure 1-11 Program Compatibility Version of Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Figure 2-1 Right-Clicking in the Right Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Figure 2-2 Naming a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Figure 2-3 LocalView Site Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Figure 2-4 Report of a Dynamic IP Assigned by DHCP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Figure 3-1 Adding a Dial-Up Connection to a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Figure 3-2 Setting-Up a Common Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Figure 3-3 LocalView Network Settings: DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Figure 3-4 Inputting the Site Name from LocalView into a DHCP Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Figure 3-5 Report of a Dynamic IP Assigned by DHCP to a Rapid Eye Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Figure 3-6 DNS Setup in Microsoft Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Figure 3-7 Connection Settings for NAT Use of an Internet Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Figure 3-8 Unit IP for Network Connection Using NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Figure 3-9 Using a Direct Connection to Operate a Rapid Eye Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Figure 3-10 Adding a Dial-Up Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Figure 3-11 Dial-Up Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Figure 3-12 Irregular Use of Area Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Figure 3-13 List of Connections to a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Figure 3-14 Transparently Connecting to a Rapid Eye Through a RAS Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Figure 3-15 RAS Server Telephone Number and PPP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Figure 3-16 Connecting to a RAS Server Before Running View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Figure 3-17 Site Tab Primary Connections Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Figure 3-18 Customizing an Alarm Station Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Figure 4-1 Rapid Eye Unit Serial Number and Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Figure 4-2 Unit Time Using SNTP as a Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Figure 4-3 Different Rules May Apply for DST in One Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 15 Figures 16 Figure 4-4 Manually Setting a Rapid Eye Unit Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Figure 4-5 Rapid Eye Upgrade with View Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Figure 5-1 Video Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Figure 5-2 Recording Tab with Six Analog Cameras Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Figure 5-3 Menu for Duplicating or for Restoring Recording Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Figure 5-4 Estimating a Unit’s Video Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Figure 5-5 Load on Rapid Eye Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Figure 5-6 Automatic Performance Maximization Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Figure 5-7 Configure Automatic Optomizations Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Figure 5-8 Enhanced Preview Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Figure 5-9 Identifying a Subject Using High or Moderate Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Figure 5-10 Using Low Resolution (160 x 120, NTSC) to Show Presence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Figure 5-11 Camera Placement Can Be more Important than High Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Figure 5-12 Resolution Gauge for Recordings Made With NTSC Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Figure 5-13 Resolution Gauge for Recordings Made With PAL Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Figure 5-14 Microsoft Windows Screen Area Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Figure 6-1 Assigning a PTZ Driver to a Port on the Rapid Eye Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Figure 6-2 A PTZ Camera Configuration Settings on the Video Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Figure 6-3 Dartboard Control for PTZ Showing Command Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Figure 6-4 Changing the PTZ Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Figure 6-5 Dragging the Mouse Pointer in a PTZ Camera Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Figure 6-6 Using PTZ Zonal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Figure 6-7 PTZ Dome with or without Auto-focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Figure 6-8 Programming a PTZ Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Figure 6-9 Testing Presets on a PTZ Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Figure 6-10 PTZ Camera: Behavior After Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Figure 6-11 Detail of PTZ Setup for the RapidDome Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Figure 6-12 Right-Click Tour Programming Table Reveals Insert Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Figure 6-13 Location of the Program Vector Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Figure 6-14 Setting Up a Privacy Zone on a RapidDome PTZ Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Figure 6-15 Communication Settings for Intellibus on the Serial Devices Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Figure 6-16 Manage Files Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Figure 7-1 Continuous and Event Recording Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Figure 7-2 Example of a Schedule Assigned to a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Figure 7-3 Customizing a Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Figure 7-4 Breakdown of an Hour into Fifteen-Minute Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Figure 7-5 Specifying Holidays and Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Figure 7-6 Rule with a Trigger, Response, and Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Figure 7-7 Customizing the Response for a Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Figure 7-8 Status Icons for a Response Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Figure 7-9 Motion Detection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Figure 7-10 Motion Detection Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Figure 7-11 Motion Detection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Figure 7-12 Tamper Detection Panel on the Video Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Figure 7-13 Calibration of Blind Tamper Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Figure 7-14 Storage Estimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Figure 7-15 Statistics Tab Showing Storage Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 8-1 Clear Storage Button on Statistics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Figure 8-2 Securing a Unit after Changing Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Figure 8-3 File Transfers to or from a Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Figure 8-4 Downloading the System.log File from a Rapid Eye Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Figure 8-5 System Tab and Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Figure 8-6 Enabling the Fault Relay Changes the Output 6 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Figure 8-7 Serial Devices Tab Showing Internal Port-Modem Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Figure 8-8 Monitor Out Tab, for a Unit’s Monitor Output 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Figure 8-9 Some Devices Can Be Searched for Data Such as No Sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Figure 8-10 Cash Registers Connected to a Honeywell PIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Figure 8-11 A NetPIT Device on PORT 3 Showing Serial Interface Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Figure 8-12 Expanded NetPIT Device on PORT 3, Showing Four POS Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Figure 8-13 Audio Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Figure 9-1 Changing User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Figure 9-2 Adding a Night Operator Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Figure 9-3 Default User Account Rights and Site Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Figure 10-1 SQL-Server Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Figure 10-2 Securing a Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Figure 10-3 System Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Figure 10-4 After Removing a System Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Figure 10-5 Use the LVP Utility when a Unit Replaces Another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Figure 10-6 Example of Using LVP Utility to Reset System Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Figure 10-7 Summary of a User’s Rights on the Users Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Figure 10-8 Setting an Account’s Session Time Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Figure 10-9 Limiting an Account’s Access to Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Figure 10-10 Identifying Camera Recording Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Figure 10-11 Four Sources of Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Figure 10-12 Alarms Are Entered into the Database after being Acknowledged . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Figure 10-13 Search for Events Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Figure 10-14 Denying Access and Updating Security for Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Figure 11-1 Adding an Alarm Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Figure 11-2 Alarms Sent to an Alarm Station’s IP Address Over a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Figure 11-3 Receiving Alarms from a Unit Over a WAN or the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Figure 11-4 Connecting Through a WAN to an Alarm Station on a LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Figure 11-5 Rapid Eye Unit Calls an Alarm Station to Report an Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Figure 11-6 Area Code Needed to Connect to a Rapid Eye Alarm Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Figure 11-7 Connection for an Alarm Station Shown in Site Definition Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Figure 11-8 Customizing the Dial-Up to an Alarm Station in the Site’s Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Figure 11-9 International Prefixes for Dial-Up in Rapid Eye Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Figure 11-10 Sending Alarms Through a RAS Server to an Alarm Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Figure 11-11 RAS Configuration for an Alarm Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Figure 11-12 Alarm Handling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Figure 12-1 Archival Tab of the Admin Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Figure 12-2 Add Archival Policy Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Figure 12-3 Browse for Archival Server Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Figure 12-4 Scheduled Archive Policy Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Figure 12-5 Adding Sites to an Archival Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 17 Figures 18 Figure 12-6 List of Sites Associated with a Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Figure 12-7 Updating a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Figure 12-8 Filled In Archival Policy Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Figure 12-9 List of Archival Policies and Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Figure 12-10 Archival Policy Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Figure 12-11 Archiving Progress Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Figure 12-12 Archival Server Tab of the Admin Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Figure 12-13 Add Archival Server Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Figure 12-14 Discovering Sites on an Archival Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Figure 12-15 Archival Playback Select Date and Time Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Figure 12-16 Select Streams for Archival Playback Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Figure 12-17 Archival Playback Options and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Figure 12-18 Options for the Admin Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Figure 12-19 Archiving Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Figure 12-20 Archival Log Filtering Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Figure 12-21 Archival Logs in the View Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Figure 13-1 Adding a Tour Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Figure 13-2 Default Amount of Time for a Tour of Each Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Figure 13-3 Customizing the Duration of a Rapid Eye Unit in a Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Figure 14-1 Viewing the Alarm Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Figure 14-2 Filtering the Alarm Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Figure 15-1 Data Flow from Admin to View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Figure 15-2 Specifying the Rapid Eye Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Figure 15-3 Admin Logon and Creating a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Figure 15-4 Copying Rapid Eye Database Data to Another Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Figure 15-5 Options for Generating a MinAdmin Rapid Eye Database Template . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Figure 15-6 The View Logon Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Figure A-1 Auto Discovery of IP Cameras Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Figure A-2 Video Tab for an IP Camera with Maintenance Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Figure A-3 Maintenance Message for Rebooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Figure A-4 IP Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Figure A-5 Recording Tab with IP Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Figure A-6 ACUIX IP Web Page with PTZ Protocol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Figure A-7 ACUIX IP PTZ Settings in Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Figure A-8 Tamper Detection Settings on Honeywell Camera Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Figure A-9 Tamper Detection Options for IP Cameras in View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Figure A-10 Motion Detection on Supported IP Camera Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Figure A-11 Motion Detection Options for IP Cameras in View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Figure A-12 Setting IP Camera’s Input/Output in View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Figure A-13 Input/Output Options on Supported IP Camera Web Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Tables Table 1-1 Customer Information Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Table 3-1 Router Mappings for NAT Operation of Rapid Eye Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Table 3-2 IP Defaults Used by Rapid Eye Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Table 3-3 Multiple Dial-Up Connections Decision Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Table 3-4 Automatic Connection Names For a Rapid Eye Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Table 4-1 Effect of Time Zone Setting on Display and Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Table 4-2 Maintenance Reference Topics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Table 4-3 Regular Maintenance Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Table 4-4 Maintenance Session Messages from a Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Table 5-1 Frame Rate Values (Approximate IPS) for Rapid Eye Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Table 5-2 Event Recording Duty Cycle Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Table 5-3 Recording Resolutions for Rapid Eye Hybrid HD (NTSC/PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Table 5-4 Recording Resolutions for Rapid Eye Hybrid LT Units (NTSC/PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Table 5-5 Display Properties for Optimal Video at Higher Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Table 6-1 PTZ Drivers for Controllers and Domes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Table 6-2 Position After PTZ Sessions Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Table 6-3 Intellibus Settings for ACUIX Analog Domes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Table 7-1 Status Icons for a Response Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Table 7-2 Motion Detection Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Table 7-3 Contrasting Motion Detection and Motion Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Table 7-4 Effect of the Number of Cameras on the Video Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Table 7-5 Effect of Camera Scheduling on the Video Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Table 7-6 Effect of Frame Rates on the Video Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Table 7-7 Effect of Quality Settings on the Video Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Table 7-8 Recording Resolution: Effect on Video Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Table 7-9 Comparing the Available Storage for One Camera to Nine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Table 7-10 Storage Statistics for a Rapid Eye Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Table 8-1 Rapid Eye Downloadable System Files and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Table 8-2 Default Network Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Table 8-3 System Tab Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Table 8-4 Default Modem and Dial-Up Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Table 8-5 Names of Temporary TCP/IP Addresses, for PPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Table 8-6 Inputs for External Control of Monitor Output 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Table 8-7 Special Characters Available for a Search Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Table 8-8 Maximum Simultaneous Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Table 8-9 Stream Availability from One Unit (16-Channel Hybrid HD Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 19 Tables 20 Table 8-10 Camera Groups on 16-Channel Hybrid HD Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Table 9-1 ActivEye Tasks and Rights of a User Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Table 10-1 Security Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Table 10-2 System Password: Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Table 10-3 Maintenance Tasks and Rights of a User Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Table 10-4 Security Situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Table 10-5 Event Reference, by Source and Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Table 10-6 Event: Default Settings for Log and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Table 11-1 Defining a Connection to an Alarm Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Table 11-2 Connection Information for a Rapid Eye Site to an Alarm Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Table 11-3 Router Mappings: Example for Unit Callback to Alarm Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Table 11-4 Matching Area Codes for Sites and Alarm Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Table 14-1 Logged Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Table 15-1 First Log On to Admin (Default Data for MS Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Table A-1 Supported IP Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide About This Document This document introduces the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorders (DVRs). It covers how to setup and operate the Rapid Eye family of DVRs for use (these include the 16-channel 120/100 IPS Rapid Eye Hybrid HD units, 16-channel 480/400 IPS Rapid Eye Hybrid HD units, 16-channel 480/400 IPS Active Alert units, and the 4- and 8-channel Rapid Eye Hybrid LT units). This document is intended for installers and system administrators. Overview of Contents This document contains the following chapters and appendixes: • • • • • • • • • • • • • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Chapter 1, The Administration of a Rapid Eye System, covers using a PC to operate Rapid Eye units, using LocalView onsite, and installing Rapid Eye software. Chapter 2, Adding a Site to the Rapid Eye Database, provides procedures for remotely connecting to a Rapid Eye unit. Chapter 3, Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit, describes working with connections to a Rapid Eye unit. Chapter 4, Unit Configuration Basics, covers maintenance sessions to keep your Rapid Eye system in top condition. Chapter 5, Video Feed Setup, provides procedures for receiving video from cameras (analog and IP), customizing your video settings, and configuring event recording. Chapter 6, Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup, describes programming connected PTZ cameras. Chapter 7, Enhancing Video, provides procedures for configuring scheduling, event recording, motion detection, and tamper detection. It also covers how to use the Rapid Eye storage estimator. Chapter 8, Configuring Other Hardware, covers setting up and using peripheral hardware. Chapter 9, Managing User Accounts, provides procedures for creating user accounts, customizing user rights and security, and removing user accounts. Chapter 10, Security for a Rapid Eye System, describes how to secure a Rapid Eye Hybrid system. Chapter 11, Rapid Eye Alarm Stations, covers the various ways of connecting to an alarm system and making an alarm station operational. Chapter 12, Archival Policies, describes using the Archival policy feature to archive data immediately or on a scheduled basis. Archival logs are also covered. Chapter 13, Touring Many Sites, provides procedures for adding, customizing, and removing site tours. 21 • • • • Chapter 14, Alarm Log, describes the alarm log. Chapter 15, Rapid Eye Database, covers obtaining a Rapid Eye database as well as creating and using Rapid Eye databases. Appendix A, IP Cameras, outlines all of the configuration procedures needed to use Honeywell IP cameras and ONVIF IP cameras with your Rapid Eye system. Appendix B, End User License Agreement, contains the License Agreement for how Users may use the software. Warranty and Service Subject to the terms and conditions listed on the Product warranty, during the warranty period Honeywell will repair or replace, at its sole option, free of charge, any defective products returned prepaid. In the event you have a problem with any Honeywell product, please call Customer Service at 1.800.796.CCTV for assistance or to request a Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) number. Be sure to have the model number, serial number, and the nature of the problem available for the technical service representative. Prior authorization must be obtained for all returns, exchanges, or credits. Items shipped to Honeywell without a clearly identified Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) number may be refused. Related Documents This document is a necessary prerequisite for understanding the Honeywell Rapid EyeTM Hybrid DVR system. For more information, please refer to the documents listed in the table below (included on the Documentation CD that came with your Rapid Eye unit). Find the latest versions of these documents on the Honeywell Video website (see www.honeywellvideo.com/products/recorders/). Document title Description Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Digital Video Recorder Written for installers and new users to the Honeywell Rapid Eye Installation Guide Hybrid HD DVR system, this guide describes how to install a Rapid Eye Hybrid HD DVR system to optimize the performance. Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Written for installers and new users to the Honeywell Rapid Eye Installation Guide Hybrid LT DVR system, this guide describes how to install a Rapid Eye Hybrid LT DVR system to optimize the performance. Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital This guide is written for remote operators of Rapid Eye Hybrid HD Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide and Hybrid LT DVRs. This guide covers using View software to view live and recorded video, search for recorded motion, event, and alarm video, make video clips, and set up site tours. Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Common Operator Guide 22 A short guide written for the security operator who uses the software for common daily surveillance tasks, such as live monitoring of events, and after-the-fact forensics searches. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Document title (cont’d) Description Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Unit Quick Start Guide This guide is a quick reference for installing and setting up a new Honeywell Rapid Eye Hybrid HD DVR system. Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Unit Quick Start Guide This guide is a quick reference for installing and setting up a new Honeywell Rapid Eye Hybrid LT DVR system. Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Unit LocalView Quick Instructions This document covers basic configurations and operations using the Rapid Eye LocalView application. Typographical Conventions This document uses the following typographical conventions: Font What it represents Example Helvetica Keys on the keyboard Press Ctrl+C Lucida Values of editable fields that are mentioned in the body text The Time from field can be set to of the document for reference purposes, but do not need Hours:Minutes:Seconds. to be entered as part of a procedure Text strings displayed on the screen The message Unauthorized displays. Syntax (object) entered Swiss721 Words or characters that you must type. The word “enter” Enter the password. BT Bold is used if you must type text and then press the Enter or Return key. Italic Menu titles and other items you select Double-click Open from the File menu. Buttons you click to perform actions Click Exit to close the program. Placeholders: words that vary depending on the situation user name Cross-reference to external source Refer to the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. Cross-reference within document See The Administration of a Rapid Eye System. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 23 24 1 The Administration of a Rapid Eye System Start Here Means of Configuring a Rapid Eye Unit You have the option of configuring a Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT unit for CCTV use: • Without using a personal computer (PC). By using LocalView, an interface that runs on the Rapid Eye unit, you can configure and operate a unit as needed. See About Rapid Eye Active Alert Units and LocalView on page 26 for information on LocalView limitations when using an Active Alert unit. By using a PC running Honeywell Rapid Eye Admin and View software to operate Rapid Eye units and manage system administration. Using both options. • • Note Rapid Eye Hybrid DVRs support Honeywell equIP® V2, equIP® H.264, equIP® 1080p, equIP® Wide Dynamic Range IP, Performance IP, and/or HD3/4 IP cameras on Hybrid V10.1 units. Some ONVIF IP cameras are also supported (see http://www.security.honeywell.com/hota for a complete list of supported IP cameras). Rapid Eye Hybrid HD units support 16 channels of IP video. Rapid Eye Hybrid LT units support 4/8 channels of IP video on Hybrid LT 4/8-channel DVRs. See Supported IP Cameras on page 292 for a list of Honeywell IP cameras supported by Rapid Eye Hybrid V10.1 and V10.0 DVRs. Designated Personnel: a System Administrator from Your Organization To carry out the setup and supervision of Honeywell Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD/LT units, your organization should designate a System Administrator for your Rapid Eye CCTV system. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 25 The Administration of a Rapid Eye System About Using a PC to Operate Rapid Eye Units Using One Rapid Eye Unit, or Many at Once Admin software is used to manage a central database of Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT units. Older Rapid Eye units are also supported. View software is used to further configure each of the Rapid Eye units for video, audio, POS devices, and so on. View software can connect to many Rapid Eye units at once for configuration, video (live and recorded), alarm sessions, and so on. The information in this guide deals almost exclusively with the use of a PC to set up Rapid Eye units. See the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Unit Quick Start Guide, Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Unit Quick Start Guide, Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Unit LocalView Quick Instructions and the LocalView online help for more information on LocalView configuration. About Using LocalView Onsite Interface for Operating One Rapid Eye Unit Configuration made using LocalView applies only to the unit on which LocalView is running. For help using LocalView, the interface offers a context-sensitive Help system. Network Connection If a unit is inserted in a common network, LocalView may be needed to enter the unit’s IP address. To do so, a Quick Install wizard is available when using LocalView. For more information, refer to the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Unit Quick Start Guide, Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Unit Quick Start Guide, and the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Unit LocalView Quick Instructions. For Added Security You have the option of preventing the unauthorized use of LocalView by using LocalView passwords to lock the interface. About Rapid Eye Active Alert Units and LocalView Availability of LocalView on V9/V10 DVRs Offering Video Analytics LocalView is now fully supported by Rapid Eye’s latest V9/V10 software. Earlier V9 software on units with Video Analytics cannot access full LocalView features. Only network configuration is available with LocalView on these units (see the Using LocalView to Modify the IP Address of a Rapid Eye Unit on page 45 for more information on setting up your network settings with LocalView). Use the Admin and View applications to monitor video and make all other configuration changes needed for these units (see Unit Configuration Basics on page 65, Video Feed Setup on page 81, Configuring Other Hardware on page 26 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide 151, and other sections of this guide for more configuration information; see the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide for more information about monitoring and playing back video). Visit http://www.honeywellsystems.com/support/download-center/index.html to download the latest Rapid Eye software. Follow the instructions on the Download Center website to logon to the Download Center and find the latest Rapid Eye software. Using a PC to Install Rapid Eye Software Rapid Eye Admin and View software has been tested for and works on the following Microsoft® Windows® Operating Systems: • • • • • Windows 7 Home Premium and Ultimate 32-bit Windows 7 Home Premium and Professional 64-bit Windows XP Windows 2003 Server® Windows Vista® Business and Enterprise If you install Admin and View software on a PC with a Windows 7 operating system, you may receive a message asking you to download and install Microsoft ActiveX® Control Pad. To resolve this message, you can: Download and install Microsoft ActiveX Control Pad. See the Installing Rapid EyeTM Software on a Microsoft® Windows® Operating System Application Note, found on the Rapid Eye product page at http://www.honeywellvideo.com/products/index.html. • Go to http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms968493.aspx (this link will be shown on the Admin View Installation message). - or • Install Microsoft Office Note The Windows library file, FM20.dll, is required to run Admin and View software on your PC. This file is not re-distributable and therefore must be obtained by installing Microsoft ActiveX Control Pad or Microsoft Office. For details on the distribution and usage of FM20.dll, go to: http://support.microsoft.com/kb/224305. View Software Only (View Operators) Personnel who operate Rapid Eye™ units to monitor video, respond to alarms, and make video clips only need View software on their PCs. Use the View CD-ROM to install the View application without the Admin application. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 27 The Administration of a Rapid Eye System Admin and View Software (System Administrator) The System Administrator of your Rapid Eye system needs access to Admin software and View software. Use the Admin CD-ROM that came with your unit to install both applications. If security is important to your organization, Honeywell recommends that the Admin CD-ROM be used only on your System Administrator’s PC. Installing Rapid Eye Software on Windows 7 ActiveX Control Pad If Rapid Eye Admin and View software is installed on a PC running Windows 7 that does not have the FM20.dll file in folders C:\Windows\System32 or C:\windows\SysWOW64 requires ActiveX Control Pad to be installed on the PC. ActiveX Control Pad will need to be installed before the Rapid Eye Installer will continue installing the Admin and View software (see Figure 1-1). Note The Windows library file, FM20.dll, is required to run Admin and View software on your PC. This file is not re-distributable and therefore must be obtained by installing Microsoft ActiveX Control Pad or Microsoft Office. For details on the distribution and usage of FM20.dll, go to http://support.microsoft.com/kb/224305. Figure 1-1 28 Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT Requirements to Setup Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Installing ActiveX Control Pad To install ActiveX Control Pad on a PC running Windows 7, follow the instructions below: 1. Click Links (see Figure 1-1). 2. Click the Http link given in the internet explorer to download the Setuppad.exe file to install ActiveX Control Pad. 3. Once the download is complete, run Setuppad.exe. Setuppad.exe is a win32 cabinet self-extractor file. 4. If a Yes/No dialog box appears, click Yes to continue the ActiveX Control Pad installation. Caution The ActiveX Control Pad installation may fail here (see Figure 1-2). To solve the failure, see Application Error Workaround #1 on page 29, Application Error Workaround #2 on page 32, or Application Error Workaround #3 on page 34. Figure 1-2 Setuppad.exe Application Error Application Error Workaround #1 If you encounter this failure, Windows 7 may give you the following options (see Figure 1-3): • • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Reinstall using recommended settings, This program installed correctly. 29 The Administration of a Rapid Eye System Figure 1-3 1. Click Option 1: Reinstalling using recommended settings. The installation will continue with the following steps. 2. If a Yes/No dialog box appears, click Yes to continue the ActiveX Control Pad installation. 3. Click Yes to continue the installation (see Figure 1-4). Figure 1-4 4. 30 Program Compatibility Assistant End-User License Agreement for Microsoft Software Click Continue (see Figure 1-5). Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 1-5 5. Microsoft ActiveX Control Pad Setup If needed, change the installation directory by clicking Change Folder. Then click on the icon next to Complete to complete the installation of the ActiveX Control Pad (see Figure 1-6). Figure 1-6 ActiveX Control Pad Setup Complete Click the icon to complete the installation. 6. Once the installation is complete, you will be prompted with a restart message (see Figure 1-7). Figure 1-7 7. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Restart Your Computer to Apply Changes It is recommended that you restart your PC. Click Restart Now. 31 The Administration of a Rapid Eye System Application Error Workaround #2 Right-click on the downloaded Setuppad.exe file. Select Troubleshoot Compatibility from the list of options that appears. The Select troubleshooting option dialog box appears (see Figure 1-8). Figure 1-8 Note Select Troubleshooting Option Use Option A: Using Recommended Settings on page 32 or Option B: Using Troubleshoot Program on page 33 when selecting a troubleshooting option. Option A: Using Recommended Settings 32 1. Click Try recommended settings (see Figure 1-8). 2. The Windows compatibility mode (see Figure 1-9) may show Windows XP (Service Pack 2). Click Start the program to start the installation of ActiveX Control Pad. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 1-9 3. Program Compatibility Test Settings Follow step 3 to step 7 of Application Error Workaround #1 on page 29. Option B: Using Troubleshoot Program 1. Click Troubleshoot program (see Figure 1-8). 2. Select the first option, The program worked in earlier versions of Windows but won’t install or run now, and click Next (see Figure 1-10). Figure 1-10 3. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Program Compatibility Problems Noticed Select either Windows XP (Service Pack 2) or Windows XP (Service Pack 3). Click Next (see Figure 1-11). 33 The Administration of a Rapid Eye System Figure 1-11 Program Compatibility Version of Windows 4. The Windows compatibility mode (see Figure 1-9) may show Windows XP (Service Pack 2). Click Start the program to start the installation of ActiveX Control Pad. 5. Follow step 3 to step 7 of Application Error Workaround #1 on page 29. Application Error Workaround #3 1. Right-click on the downloaded Setuppad.exe file. Select Properties from the list of options that appears. 2. Select the Compatibility tab. 3. Select the first option, to choose Window XP (Service Pack 2) or Windows XP (Service Pack 3). Click OK. 4. Now run the downloaded Setuppad.exe file. 5. Follow step 3 to step 7 of Application Error Workaround #1 on page 29. Installing Honeywell Video Analytics Software on Windows 7 Note 34 During Honeywell Video Analytics installation on a Windows 7 operating system, the user may see an error message indicating that the installer failed to find DTC, RPC, and NT LM security services. The user can ignore this error and as a result, the installer will skip installation of the Reports Scheduler and of the Alarm Watch components. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Running Admin Software on First Use The purpose of Admin software is to manage information in a Rapid Eye database. On first use, to start Admin software: 1. Double-click the Admin icon ( appears. ). The Rapid Eye Admin - Logon window 2. If Administrator is not in the User ID box, type it in. 3. Click OK. Rapid Eye Central Database A Rapid Eye central database contains information about: • • • • Each Rapid Eye site. Network and dial-up communication settings for each Rapid Eye unit. See Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit on page 43. Operator accounts. Account information for users of View software and Admin software, including passwords. See Managing User Accounts on page 177. Rapid Eye alarm stations. PCs that receive alarms from Rapid Eye units. See Rapid Eye Alarm Stations on page 227. Site tours. Lists of sites in the tours and the time spent at each one. Site tours only work if your organization has two units or more. See Touring Many Sites on page 265. Using View Software for Site Maintenance After units are installed and a Rapid Eye database is created, the View application is used to run a Maintenance Session. During a Maintenance Session, the following settings can be changed: • • • Unit Time Zone and Clock. To identify recorded video, it is important to set a unit’s time zone and clock. See Unit Time Zone and Clock on page 69. Video. To set up and configure video feeds from connected IP or analog cameras. See Video Feed Setup on page 81. Site hardware. To set up the rest of the hardware in your Rapid Eye system. See Configuring Other Hardware on page 151. For Questions In-Depth Reference Use the table of contents and index of this guide to locate the information that you need. This guide is also available in a PDF version while running Admin software that can be viewed using Adobe Reader. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 35 The Administration of a Rapid Eye System Configuration Malfunctions For problems with camera positioning, wiring, and connecting to other site hardware, see the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide or Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide included on the documentation CD, or contact the installer of your Rapid Eye system. Caution The names of places, people, the internet protocol (IP) addresses, and other data are provided as examples and should only be used as guidelines when setting up a Rapid Eye system. Calling Honeywell Call Rapid Eye technical support for help with training or general problems. Please have the information listed in Table 1-1 ready when you call. See the back cover of this publication for the Honeywell technical support number. Table 1-1 36 Customer Information Checklist Information About Your Rapid Eye System See … Microsoft Windows The version of Windows used on the PC running Admin (for example, Windows XP). The System Properties dialog box on the PC. Connection type For a LAN connection, the Rapid Eye unit’s IP Connecting to a Rapid address, and so on. If you are using a dial-up Eye Unit on page 43. connection to the unit, include a list of communication tools used on the PC running Rapid Eye software (fax, AOL, CompuServe, the type of modem, the telephone number used, and so on). Database Indicate whether SQL or Access is used for your Rapid Eye database. Obtaining a Rapid Eye Database on page 276. Documentation If you could not find information about the problem in the user guides. Documents included on the documentation CD. System password If in use. System Password on page 194. 2 Adding a Site to the Rapid Eye Database Use the Admin application to add, update or delete a site from the Rapid Eye database. A Rapid Eye site refers to one Rapid Eye unit. See Running Admin Software on First Use on page 35 to launch the Admin application. Adding a Site Figure 2-1 Right-Clicking in the Right Pane Right-click on the right pane to bring up the menu. 1. Right-click the right-pane on the Sites tab of the Admin application. Click Add on the menu that appears. The Add Site window appears (Figure 2-2). Or you can click in the toolbar to add a site. Figure 2-2 Naming a Site Lists cameras connected to this site after running the first Maintenance Session. LVP is only used for replacement units or sites mistakenly deleted while a system password is in use. 2. Enter a name in the Site Name box. This name is used to identify the unit. 3. You have the option of adding a connection now or later. See Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit on page 43 for more information. 4. Click Save and Close. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 37 Adding a Site to the Rapid Eye Database Icons and Alternate Command Access Right-click an item to display a context-sensitive command menu. Click to add an item. The item added changes with the tab selected (when the site tab selected, a site is added). Click to update a selected item. Click to delete a selected item. For a list of keyboard shortcuts, use the Actions menu. Another Site Name LocalView In LocalView, the Site Name field shows the unit’s computer name (also known as the network name). In Admin software, the Site Name is not the same. It identifies a unit when using the View application. Note See the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Unit Quick Start Guide, Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Unit Quick Start Guide or Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Unit LocalView Quick Instructions, included on the documentation CD, for more information on setting up your system with LocalView. Figure 2-3 LocalView Site Name In LocalView, the site name field shows the unit’s computer name. In Admin, the site name is not the same. System Tab of a Maintenance Session When using a connection on a DHCP-enabled network, the Site Name on the System tab of a Maintenance Session can differ from the Site Name in a site definition. The LocalView Site Name is used in this situation (see Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, page 46). 38 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 2-4 Report of a Dynamic IP Assigned by DHCP The site name on the System tab can differ from the site name in a site definition. Updating a Site Double-click a site name. The Update Site dialog appears. Renaming a Site 1. Enter a new name in the Site Name box, as needed. 2. Click Save and Close. This updates the name of the Rapid Eye unit on the Sites tab in the View application. Note For connections using DHCP, a different site name is shown on the System tab of a Maintenance Session. Do not change that site name; it serves a different purpose. See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, page 46. Deleting a Site Deleting a site in the central database has no effect on the Rapid Eye unit. The unit continues to record video, send alarms, and so on. 1. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 If a system password is not in use, skip to step 2. If a system password is being used, remove it before deleting the site (see Removing a System Password on page 197). 39 Adding a Site to the Rapid Eye Database 2. Right-click a site name. A menu appears. 3. Click Delete. 4. Confirm the deletion. Note An operator who deletes a site by mistake needs to re-enter that site’s information (see Adding a Site on page 37). If a system password has been applied to a Rapid Eye unit and that site is deleted by mistake, you need to use LVP to recover the site (see Last Valid Password on page 202). Physical Removal of a Site To physically disconnect a Rapid Eye unit from its means of communications, refer to the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide or Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide included on the documentation CD. Other Site-Related Functions The Cameras button (see Figure 2-2) displays an empty list when you are adding a site. After running a Maintenance Session with the View application, Cameras lists the names of the cameras connected to the unit. The LVP button (see Figure 2-2). The last valid password utility is used only for replacement units, or for sites that are mistakenly deleted while a system password is in use. Caution Do not click LVP. Uninformed use of the LVP utility can make a unit unusable. See Last Valid Password on page 202 for more information. Change toggles user management. See User Management on page 179. To set up a connection, see Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit on page 43. To designate alarm stations, see Addressing Alarms to an Alarm Station on page 60. 40 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Grouping Sites in a Folder Grouping sites is optional. Use folders to group sites in an Admin database. Creating a New Folder with Rapid Eye Admin Application 1. Using Admin, select the site tree on the Sites tab. The 2. Click 3. Enter a name for the new folder. 4. Save the name by pressing Enter. button replaces . . Assigning a Site to a Folder Using the mouse, drag a site icon and drop it on a folder. When the mouse button is released, the folder into which the site was dropped is opened. A site can be moved to another folder, but cannot be copied. To assign many sites at once, press Ctrl while selecting sites, and then drag the group of sites to a folder. Renaming a Folder 1. Right-click a folder. A context-sensitive menu appears. 2. Click Update. 3. Enter a name, as needed. 4. Press Enter. Deleting a Folder 1. Right-click a folder. A menu appears. 2. Click Delete, and then Yes to confirm. Grouping Folders In a Rapid Eye database, folders can be dragged into other folders or back to the root of the database. A folder that holds other folders, displays + or – to its left. Double-click a folder to expand or hide its contents. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 41 Adding a Site to the Rapid Eye Database 42 3 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Working with Connections Coordinating with the Installer If a connection was set up by the installer and you are accessing the Rapid Eye database created by the installer, the connection will be listed under Connections to the Site (see Figure 3-1). One connection, or many, can be setup. For example, two connections may be setup, one to operate a unit through a network, and another for local dial-up. Using the Admin Application Admin is used to set up, or modify, a connection to a Rapid Eye unit. Figure 3-1 shows how to add a connection. Add a connection while Updating a Site, page 39, or while Adding a Site, page 37. A connection is made using the View application. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 43 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Figure 3-1 Adding a Dial-Up Connection to a Site Setting Up a Connection • For a network connection, see Common Network on page 45. For connections through routers, some TCP ports need to remain open in your organization’s firewall for connections to Rapid Eye units. Refer to the Firewall Reference in the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide or Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. • For a Dial-Up Connection, see page 52. Access to Commands Right-clicking an item displays a context-sensitive command menu. To update an item, select it and click . For example, to make changes to a connection (while Adding a Site, page 37, or Updating a Site, page 39) double-click the connection name. The Update Connection window appears. Click to add a new connection. To delete an item, select it and click 44 . Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Using LocalView to Modify the IP Address of a Rapid Eye Unit Before setting up a network connection for remote PCs, the simplest way to change a unit’s IP address or to enable DHCP is to use LocalView to access the unit’s network settings. Do so by using LocalView to either: • Access the network settings of the DVR. See the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide or Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide to access the network settings. Use the Quick Setup Wizard. Refer to the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Unit Quick Start Guide or Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Unit Quick Start Guide. • Note For dial-up connections, LocalView is not needed. Note Rapid Eye units offering Video Analytics that run V8.1 or older V9 software can ONLY use LocalView to configure network settings. Rapid Eye’s latest V9/V10 software now fully supports Rapid Eye configuration on LocalView. Visit http://www.honeywellsystems.com/support/download-center/index.html to download the latest Rapid Eye software. Follow the instructions on the Download Center website to logon to the Download Center and find the latest Rapid Eye software. Testing a Connection Use the View application to run a Maintenance Session on the Rapid Eye unit using that connection. See also Connection Report on page 59 for more information. Common Network Use a common network connection on a network without DHCP. For a DHCP network connection, see Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol on page 46. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 45 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Figure 3-2 Setting-Up a Common Network Connection Select to use the existing network connection and enter the static IP address provided by your network administrator While Working with Connections (page 43): 1. In the Add Connection window, select the Use Existing Network Connection option (see Figure 3-2). 2. In the IP Address field, enter the static IP address that was assigned to the unit by your network administrator or installer. 3. You have the option of entering a Connection Name, to rename the connection. 4. Click Save and Close. For a report, see Connection Report on page 59. Note To set Network Settings using LocalView, ensure that no one is running a remote Maintenance Session on the unit. Rapid Eye units offering Video Analytics that run V8.1 or older V9 software can ONLY use LocalView to configure network settings. Rapid Eye’s latest V9/V10 software now fully supports Rapid Eye configuration on LocalView. Visit http://www.honeywellsystems.com/support/download-center/index.html to download the latest Rapid Eye software. Follow the instructions on the Download Center website to logon to the Download Center and find the Rapid Eye software. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Use of DHCP with DNS is assumed. For DHCP without DNS, see page 47. 1. Use LocalView to enable DHCP on the Rapid Eye unit (see Figure 3-3). By default, the Site Name in LocalView shows REM[hyphen][unit serial number] and includes the leading zeroes. The unit serial number of the Rapid Eye unit is also printed on a sticker affixed to the unit. You have the option of changing the Site Name. If you do so, make a note of the new site name, for use in step 4 of this procedure. 46 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 3-3 Note LocalView Network Settings: DHCP In LocalView, the Site Name field shows what can also be called a unit’s computer name or network name in the Admin software. The Site Name assigned in Admin is a label to identify a unit when using the View application. 2. Click Refresh. Using the Admin software, start Working with Connections, page 43. 3. In the Add Connection window, select Use Existing Network Connection (see Figure 3-4). 4. In the IP Address field, enter the site name used in LocalView, as indicated in step 1 of this procedure. 5. You have the option of changing the connection name ([site name] -> Network), to indicate the use of a dynamic IP Address, by entering a new Connection Name. For example, Figure 3-4 shows that DHCP was added to the connection name. 6. Click Save and Close. For a report, see Connection Report on page 59. Figure 3-4 Inputting the Site Name from LocalView into a DHCP Connection Enter the site name used in LocalView in the IP Address field for a DHCP network connection Entered by the operator Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Without DNS While Working with Connections, page 43: 1. Use LocalView to enable DHCP on the Rapid Eye unit (see Figure 3-3). The Site Name is not used in this type of connection. 2. Click Refresh. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 47 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit 3. Make a note of the IP Address assigned by DHCP to the unit. The IP Address is needed for use in step 4 and step 5 of this procedure. 4. Using Admin, add a connection as you would for a Common Network (page 45). In the IP Address field, enter the IP Address used in LocalView (obtained in step 3). 5. Contact the administrator of your network to reserve the IP address obtained in step 3. DHCP can change an address if it is not reserved, compromising future attempts to connect to the unit. DHCP Reference Timeout on Network without DHCP If DHCP is unavailable on your network, a unit’s request for DHCP services times-out after two minutes. DNS Registration The DNS registration of DHCP leases is made with the DNS specified by the DHCP server, and network card properties. Contact your organization’s Network administrator to obtain the proper primary DNS entry for your local client, if the name is not resolved. Leased IP Address To see the IP address that DHCP leased to the unit, use View to run a Maintenance Session, and then click the System tab (see Figure 3-5). Figure 3-5 Report of a Dynamic IP Assigned by DHCP to a Rapid Eye Unit IP address assigned to the unit by DHCP 48 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Note Changing a unit’s Use DHCP selection or Site Name while operating a unit locks out remote operators using the network connection to the unit until a new working connection definition is made. Configuring DNS in DHCP, Using Microsoft Server 2000 (or 2003) 1. Using Microsoft Windows, use the DHCP MMC. 2. Open the local DHCP Server Properties window (see Figure 3-6). 3. On the DNS (Dynamic Network Service) tab, select Always update DNS. 4. Select Enable updates for DNS clients that do not support dynamic update. Restart the DHCP service. Figure 3-6 DNS Setup in Microsoft Windows Using an Internet Router for Network Address Translation Step 1: Use a Router’s Mappings in a Rapid Eye Connection While Working with Connections, page 43: 1. Obtain the outside IP address of the internet router from the network administrator or from the installer (this IP address is needed for step 2). In the [Add/Update] Connection window, select Use Existing Network Connection. 2. In the IP Address field, enter the internet router’s outside IP address (see Figure 3-7). 3. Enable Use Network Address Translation (see Figure 3-4). 4. Match the Session value, under Source Port, to the source port values in the router’s NAT map (or match the source port values in the router’s NAT map to the Session value under Source Port). A value greater than 65,533 cannot be used for the Session source port. The Maintenance and FTP source ports are populated automatically. For an example of a NAT map, see Table 3-1. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 49 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit 5. You have the option of indicating that the connection is to a router, rather than a unit, by entering the Connection Name. 6. Click Save and Close. For a report, see Connection Report on page 59. Figure 3-7 Connection Settings for NAT Use of an Internet Router 164.178.32.136 (DHCP) PC running Admin and View Network switch 192.168.101.xxx (Static) WAN Router Router IP Address changes periodically until DDNS is supported R EA DY A LARM HDD Use the router’s inside IP for the Gateway of each unit. Assign the router’s outside IP to the IP Address of the connection. Rapid Eye unit #1 192.168.101.11 (Static) Values for the routing map, in the router, for unit #2. R EA DY A LARM HDD Rapid Eye unit #2 192.168.101.12 (Static) Table 3-1 Router: Outside IPa Router Mappings for NAT Operation of Rapid Eye Units Router: Source Portsa Destination Ports (constant)b for Rapid Eye unit #1 on Rapid Eye unit #1 -> Use the constant value for Rapid Eye: 10,000 192.168.101.11c Set to Maintenanced value, 49,101 -> 10,001 192.168.101.11 Set to FTPd value, 49,102 -> 21 192.168.101.11 Use the router IP in the Set to Session value, in connection’s IP Address the connection, 49,100a for Rapid Eye unit #2 on Rapid Eye unit #2 -> Map to Rapid Eye constant value: 10,000 192.168.101.12 Set to Maintenanced value, 49,201 -> 10,001 192.168.101.12c Set to FTPd value, 49,202 -> 21 192.168.101.12 Use the router IP in the Set to Session value, in connection’s IP Address the connection, 49,200a a Rapid Eye Unit IPa The values for IP addresses and ports depend on system administrator of the remote LAN. All Rapid Eye units have the same port values, and these cannot be changed. c Each unit needs a unique IP Address. d The Rapid Eye Hybrid Admin may need to indicate to the system administrator of the remote LAN that the Maintenance and FTP values are increments of the Session value, in a connection (see Figure 3-7). b 50 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Step 2: Match a Unit Gateway to the Internet Router Inside IP Change the IP Address of a unit onsite, using LocalView. Set the IP gateway on the Rapid Eye unit to the inside IP of an internet router. Use the View software to see a Rapid Eye unit’s IP remotely by running a Maintenance Session and clicking the System tab. Figure 3-8 Unit IP for Network Connection Using NAT REA DY ALARM HDD A unit’s IP address on a remote LAN The router’s inside IP is used for the Rapid Eye unit’s Gateway Note Do not change a unit IP address or IP gateway while operating a unit connected using NAT; this locks out remote operators using that network connection to the unit until the change is mapped in the internet router. Direct Connection to a Standalone PC A standalone PC—running Admin and View software—is connected to one unit, by using a network crossover cable. Figure 3-9 Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT unit Using a Direct Connection to Operate a Rapid Eye Unit Network crossover cable PC running Admin and View 1. Using Microsoft Windows, set the IP Address on the PC’s network card to an address on the same subnet as the Rapid Eye unit (as shown in Table 3-2). To change a PC’s IP address, see your Microsoft Windows documentation. 2. Using the Admin application, add a connection as for a Common Network (page 45). Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 51 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Table 3-2 IP Defaults Used by Rapid Eye Units Point Rapid Eye Unit (Default Address) Operator PC (Network Card) IP Address 172.25.2.1 172.25.1.1 Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0 Dial-Up Connection Note Do not use a dial-up network connection if you are using Honeywell and/or supported ONVIF IP cameras in your system. Dial-up network connections are not fast enough to support IP camera streaming. Figure 3-10 Adding a Dial-Up Connection 1. Select Use Dial-up Networking. Leave the Country Code at (dialing same country). 2. Enter the unit Area Code (City Code) and Phone Number. 3. You have the option of changing [site name] -> Dialup by entering a new Connection Name (see Figure 3-10). 4. Click Save and Close. For a report, see Connection Report on page 59. Figure 3-11 Dial-Up Connection POTS or ISDN View operator’s station 52 RE ADY AL ARM HDD Modem Modem Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT unit Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Note If a prefix number is needed to access an outside line, set the prefix—the extra telephone keystroke such as a 9 or an 8—in Microsoft Window’s Telephony program. Irregular Use of Area Codes Figure 3-12 Irregular Use of Area Codes Dial-up from a longdistance area code: Can the Rapid Eye site be reached using a local call across area codes? Dial-up from a local area code: Is a long-distance call needed to reach the Rapid Eye unit, within the area code? POTS or ISDN R EA DY A L A RM HDD Irregular use of area codes occurs when making: • • A long distance call within one area code A local call to another area code You can easily deal with these scenarios (see Figure 3-12) by using Admin to modify or add another dial-up connection. If a prefix number is needed to access an outside line, set the prefix—the extra keystroke such as a 9 or an 8—in Window’s Telephony program. Forcing a Long-Distance Dial-Up Call Using a Local Area Code 1. While Working with Connections, page 43, select Use Dial-up Networking. 2. In the Connection Name box, you have the option of appending a few words such as force long distance call. It makes sense to do so, to avoid confusing operators of View. 3. Enter the telephone number needed to reach the unit in the Phone Number field, including country and long distance codes. 4. Leave the Country Code and Area Code (City Code) boxes empty. This step tricks Windows Dial-up Networking into making a local call across different area codes. Click Save and Close. An Add Site/Update Site window appears. 5. Click Close. Look for the Primary Connection column on the Sites tab. The first letter of dial-up (d) appears in parentheses, followed by the telephone number used to connect to the Rapid Eye unit. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 53 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Forcing a Local Dial-Up Call Across Area Codes 1. While Working with Connections, page 43, select Use Dial-up Networking. 2. In the Connection Name box, append a meaningful name such as force local call. 3. Enter only the telephone number needed to reach the unit in the Phone Number box. 4. Leave the Country Code and Area Code (City Code) boxes empty. This step tricks Windows Dial-up Networking into making a local call across different area codes. 5. Click Save and Close. An Add Site/Update Site window appears. 6. Click Close. Look for the Primary Connection column on the Sites tab. The first letter of dial-up (d) appears in parentheses, followed by the telephone number used to connect to the Rapid Eye unit. Dial-Up Technical Note Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) During a dial-up connection, temporary TCP/IP network communications are established between the Rapid Eye unit and the PC. These default point-to-point protocol (PPP) Internet Protocol (IP) settings can be changed should they conflict with other network devices (printers, scanners and so on). See Setting Up a Modem Serial Device on page 162. Adding an Alarm Station Should you plan to add one or more alarm stations using dial-up connections, Honeywell recommends that area codes be included in all telephone numbers. Dial-up connections between a Rapid Eye unit and an alarm station running View are explained in Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 234. Offering Many Dial-Up Connections to the Same Unit More than one dial-up connection to the same Rapid Eye unit may be needed. Table 3-3 lists configurations, and the number of connections for best results. For example, Windows Dial-Up Networking can give unwanted results when some View operators are inside the Rapid Eye unit’s local calling area and others are outside. Telephone companies can also force a System Administrator to setup an irregular local call (a local call across area codes). Table 3-3 Multiple Dial-Up Connections Decision Chart Operator PC (Location) Call to Unit (Type) Procedure (Name, Page) Number of Connections In unit calling area local Dial-Up Connection, page 52 1 irregular long distance: same area code Irregular Use of Area Codes, page 53 1 irregular long distance: local call Dial-Up Connection, page 52 and Irregular Use of Area Codes, page 53 2 54 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Table 3-3 Multiple Dial-Up Connections Decision Chart (cont’d) Operator PC (Location) Call to Unit (Type) Procedure (Name, Page) Number of Connections outside unit calling area long distance Dial-Up Connection, page 52 1 irregular local call: not requiring area code Irregular Use of Area Codes, page 53 1 some in, some out of unit permutations of all of the calling area above Dial-Up Connection, page 52 and Irregular Use of Area Codes, page 53 2~4 in another country international long distance Dial-Up Connection, page 52 1 some out of site country all permutations Dial-Up Connection, page 52 and Irregular Use of Area Codes, page 53 2~5 Multiple Connections to a Unit Depending on your organizational needs, there can be a mix of network and dial-up connections. One dial-up connection can be simultaneous with many network connections. TIP! Setting up multiple connections is optional. Primary Connection You can change the order of the listed connections by dragging an item to a different place in the list. The connection that you list first is the primary connection. The primary connection can be either a network or dial-up connection. Figure 3-13 List of Connections to a Site Change the connection order by dragging an item to a different place in the list. The connection listed first is the primary connection. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 55 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit RAS Server There are two ways of connecting to Rapid Eye units when using a Remote Access Service (RAS) server. You can connect to: • • Only one RAS-dependent unit at a time. A RAS server can be transparent to users of View by adding RAS server information to the site definition. This is ideal when there is only one Rapid Eye unit on the network using the RAS server (see Figure 3-14). Many units at once. Users dial-up the RAS server before using View. This is discussed in Using a RAS Server Before Connecting to Units on page 58. For both cases, a RAS is set up on a server that can access networked Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT units. Planning to Connect to One Unit at a Time You can use View to automatically connect to the site. A user has to end sessions with the unit before using another unit on that same network. From a security point of view, the View operator does not need to know the RAS username and password. A Connection that Behaves Like Dial-Up A session request behaves just as if you had reached the site’s Rapid Eye unit by connecting directly to it by dial-up. Such a connection behaves as if it were a simple dial-up connection. Two dial-up sites cannot be used at the same time with one modem. Sessions to a dial-up site have to be closed before using another dial-up site. What Your Network Administrator Needs Rapid Eye sessions (live, retrieval and alarm) are sent to port 10,000. This port should be left open in your organization’s firewall for the sockets used by Rapid Eye. Figure 3-14 Transparently Connecting to a Rapid Eye Through a RAS Server POTS or ISDN Operator’s station, running the View application Modem Note When overriding PPP in the definition Modem RAS server, on another LAN of a site, the other network’s RAS server is transparent to an operator. The site responds as it would with a dial-up connection. R EADY A LARM HDD 56 Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT unit Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Setting a Connection to a RAS Server 1. While Working with Connections, page 43, enter the Rapid Eye unit’s IP address in the IP Address field. 2. Select Use Dial-up Networking. The connection suffix changes to dial-up. 3. Change or leave the Country Code used to reach the RAS server by telephone, as needed. 4. Enter the RAS server’s Area Code (City Code) and Phone Number obtained from your network administrator (see also Adding a Site on page 37). Figure 3-15 TIP! RAS Server Telephone Number and PPP Information If your telephone exchange needs a prefix number (an extra telephone key stroke such as a 9 or an 8) to access an outside line, set this in the Windows Telephony program used by the PC. For local calls that span area codes or long distance calls within one area code, see Irregular Use of Area Codes on page 53. 5. Select the Override PPP Settings checkbox (see Figure 3-15). If a connection is being added, a PPP is appended to the Connection Name. You have the option of either: • Entering another name in the Connection Name box, such as adding RAS. - or - • Leaving the connection name in the Connection Name box as it was automatically set by Admin. 6. Enter the PPP User Name and Password; these are obtained from the network administrator responsible for the network RAS server. 7. Re-enter the PPP password in the Confirm PPP Password field. 8. Click Save and Close. The Add/Update Connection window appears. 9. Click Close. The new connection appears in the tab’s Primary Connection column. The first letter of PPP (p) appears in parentheses, followed by the telephone number to connect to a RAS server; then by (n) and the IP address used to connect to the Rapid Eye unit. See also Figure 3-17. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 57 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit TIP! A Rapid Eye unit’s own dial-up PPP username and password is used by default. Entering a PPP username and password in a site definition makes View use your entries for PPP instead of the Rapid Eye unit’s during a dial-up connection. Caution Technical warning for PPP: Changing the Rapid Eye phone book entry in a dial-up program is ineffective. The phonebook entry is overwritten by data in the Rapid Eye database every time an automatic connection to a RAS server is attempted. Using a RAS Server Before Connecting to Units Figure 3-16 Connecting to a RAS Server Before Running View POTS or ISDN Operator’s station, running the View application Modem Modem RAS server, on another LAN Note When connecting to a remote access server (RAS) before running View, remote sites respond as if on the operator’s LAN, more slowly due to the dial-up connection. R EADY A L ARM HDD R EADY A LARM HDD Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT sites on a LAN The two ways of using dial-up to connect to a Remote Access Service (RAS) server are: • • With many units at once. A View operator, using a dial-up program of his/her choice, dials-up the RAS server before using View. The definitions of Rapid Eye sites do not contain RAS or PPP information. The sites are meant to behave as if they were on a View operator’s LAN. See Figure 3-16. Using only one RAS-dependent unit at a time. See RAS Server on page 56. In both cases, a RAS server has been set up on a server that accesses Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT unit(s) on a network. Planning to Connect to Many Units For access to a RAS server in front of Rapid Eye sites on a network, the RAS server information is not recorded in the Rapid Eye sites’ definitions. The RAS information must be known by the user of the PC and recorded in a Microsoft dial-up application. The user must use the dial-up utility to connect to the RAS server before using View to start a session at the site. 58 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Preparation Use Admin to define the sites as network units (see Setting Up a Connection, page 44). You can then use a modem to connect to these sites using the Microsoft dial-up application to connect to the RAS server. Using an Outside Line Requires a Prefix Number A prefix is an extra telephone keystroke such as a 9 or an 8 that you should set in the Windows Telephony program running on the PC. What Your Network Administrator Needs Rapid Eye sessions (live, retrieval and alarm) are sent to port 10,000. This port should be left open in your organization’s firewall for the sockets used by Rapid Eye. Connection Report Figure 3-17 Site Tab Primary Connections Report Report of unit’s primary connection In the Admin application, the site tab reports the primary connection to a Rapid Eye site (see Figure 3-17). Connection Codes The codes used to identify the primary connection are listed in Table 3-4, below. Table 3-4 Automatic Connection Names For a Rapid Eye Site Site Tab Report Automatic Name Connection (n) IP address [site name] -> Network network (d) telephone number [site name] -> Dial-up dial-up (p) telephone number (n) IP address [site name] -> PPP Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 dial-up to RAS 59 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Changing the Primary Connection If many connections to a unit are set up, drag the most commonly used connection to the first position in the Connections to the Site list, while Adding a Site, page 37, or Updating a Site on page 39. Addressing Alarms to an Alarm Station Prioritizing alarm stations is optional and applies only if many Rapid Eye alarm stations were created by your organization’s System Administrator. Cascading Alarm Stations and Priority Your Rapid Eye system can have one or many alarm stations. With many alarm stations, cascading is automatic and customizable. You can specify which alarm stations your Rapid Eye units try to reach first. Cascade Sequence To insure against alarm station unavailability, you can: • • Assign more than one alarm station to a unit. Set the order in which alarm stations are called. Preparations Before you prioritize alarm stations: • • Create Alarm stations using the Alarm Station tab. See Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports on page 228. Set events to trigger alarms. An alarm station is ineffective until events are set to trigger alarms. See Events Defined on page 215. Sequencing Site Alarm Stations 60 1. While Adding a Site, page 37, the alarm station(s) that the site can call are listed in the Report Alarms to these Alarm Stations pane in the Add/Update Site window (see Figure 3-13). 2. To change the order of an alarm station, drag its name to the position that you want it to have in the list. 3. Click Save and Close to finish updating the site definition. The Admin window reappears, listing your system sites on the Site tab. 4. Use View to update security for the Rapid Eye unit. See Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit on page 153. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Quickly Assigning a Site to Many Alarm Stations Using the Update Site Windows The Update Site window can be used as a shortcut to add a site to many alarm stations. Alternatively, each Rapid Eye Alarm Station can be opened and a site added to each (as explained in Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports on page 228). 1. Using Admin, click the Sites tab. 2. While Adding a Site, page 37, click in the Report Alarms to these Alarm Stations pane. The Add/Delete Stations to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box appears, displaying a list of alarm stations created on the Alarm Station tab. Stations already assigned to the site that you are editing are listed in the Report Alarms to column. 3. Select one or many station names in the column of available Alarm Stations. 4. To move the station names to the Report Alarms to column, either: • Click the right-arrow (>) after selecting an alarm station. - or - • Double-click the stations that you want to move. 5. Click Save and Close. The Add/Update Site dialog box reappears, listing the names of the alarm stations in the Report Alarms to these Alarm Stations pane. The site is also added to the site list of each alarm station that you have assigned. 6. You have the option of ending the site edit. Click Save and Close. The Admin window reappears, listing your system’s sites on the Site tab. 7. You need to use the View application to update security for the Rapid Eye unit. See Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit on page 153. Setting a Site to Not Report Alarms to a Specific Station 1. Using Admin, click the Sites tab. 2. While Adding a Site, page 37, click in the Report Alarms to these Alarm Stations pane. The Add/Delete Stations to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box appears, displaying a list of alarm stations. Stations already assigned to the site are listed the Report Alarms to column. 3. To move alarm stations to the available Alarm Stations column, either: • Select one or many station names in the Report Alarms to column; then click the left-arrow (<). - or - • Double-click the alarm stations that you want to move. 4. Click Save and Close. The Add/Update Site dialog box reappears, listing the alarm stations in the Report Alarms to these Alarm Stations pane. 5. You have the option of ending the site edit. To do so, click Save and Close. The Admin window reappears, listing your system’s sites on the Site tab. 6. You need to use the View application to update security for the Rapid Eye unit. See Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit on page 153. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 61 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station The System Administrator may need to customize the telephone number used to reach a Rapid Eye Alarm Station. Preparation An alarm station’s telephone number in the site definition is a copy of the number in the alarm station definition. Before customizing a dial-up connection, consider if the alarm station definition is correct, as explained in Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 234, and Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 237. Customizing the Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station 1. While creating or updating a site, select an alarm station. 2. In the Report Alarms to these Alarm Stations pane, click . See Figure 3-18. The Update Station to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box appears. 3. Modify the telephone number so that it is as one would dial it. You have the option of: • • 62 Removing/adding long distance country and area codes, OR Entering a prefix and commas, as needed to dial out of a site’s exchange. 4. Click Save and Close. The modified telephone number appears in the Connection Method column in the Report Alarms to these Alarm Stations pane. An asterisk is added in parenthesis (*) to the entry’s display, to indicate customization. 5. Update security for the unit. See Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit on page 153. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 3-18 Customizing an Alarm Station Telephone Number Cancelling the Customization of a Telephone Number 1. While creating or updating a site, an alarm station with a customized telephone number shows an asterisk (*) in the entry’s display. 2. In the Report Alarms to these Alarm Stations pane, click . The Update Station to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box appears (see Figure 3-18). 3. Click Default in the Update Station to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box. The telephone number returns to the one entered in the Alarm Station definition. 4. Update security for the unit. See Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit on page 153. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 63 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit 64 4 Unit Configuration Basics Maintenance Session A Maintenance session is used to check the operation of a Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT unit and configure some of the unit’s options. The View application is used to run a Maintenance session on a unit, not Admin. The Maintenance session is discussed in this Guide because the session is designed to be used by the System Administrator designated by your organization, to maintain and supervise your Rapid Eye system. The Maintenance Session is used to configure: • • System hardware. Including cameras (IP and analog), audio, motion detection, scheduling, and other hardware connected to the unit. Security. Events that trigger alarms and other security settings. See also Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit on page 153. Scope of a Maintenance Session A Maintenance Session involves only the unit on which it runs. Use View to open a Maintenance Session on more than one unit at a time. Two operators cannot each run a Maintenance Session on the same unit. While a Maintenance Session runs, the unit’s LocalView interface continues to display video but is unavailable for unit operation. A Maintenance Session is also used to: • • Make a site operational. Running a Maintenance Session is required before operators can start using a site. See Making a Site Operational on page 67. Obtain a unit’s statistics. See Hardware Report, page 165 and Obtaining Unit Statistics on page 148. Starting a Maintenance Session 1. Log on to View, using a central database. See Starting View in the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide for more information. 2. Using View, select a site from the Sites list to perform maintenance on. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 65 Unit Configuration Basics 3. 4. To start a Maintenance Session, either: • Right-click the site name to select Maintain from the shortcut menu. • Select the site, then click the Maintain command on the Actions menu. • Select the site, then click on the toolbar. If the Connections dialog box appears, choose the network/dial-up connection that you want to use and click OK. The maintenance tabs appear. Site Feedback During maintenance, messages appear in the Feedback field at the bottom fo the Maintenance window. The messages System operational and Time zone updated… indicate that you can proceed with the Maintenance session. For a list of messages, see Feedback Box Reference on page 78. Reboot Button in Maintenance Window The Reboot button reboots the Rapid Eye unit. It does not reboot your PC. Technical Note for Network Administrators For connections over a network, Maintenance Sessions are sent to port 10,001. Leave this port open in your organization’s firewall for sockets used by Rapid Eye. For other ports, see the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide or the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. Support for Older Unit Models Setup and Maintenance Older-model Rapid Eye units are supported. If an older unit lacks a newer feature, the feature is not shown in a Maintenance Session. The interface appears as it did in the last available upgrade for older units. For example, a Recording tab does not appear when running a Maintenance Session on an older-model unit. Instead, the Video tab is used for the settings of recorded video. Availability of LocalView on V9/V10 DVRs Offering Video Analytics LocalView is now fully supported by Rapid Eye’s latest V9/V10 software. Earlier V9 software on units with Video Analytics cannot access full LocalView features. Only network configuration is available with LocalView on these units (see the Using LocalView to Modify the IP Address of a Rapid Eye Unit on page 45 for more information on setting up your network settings with LocalView). Use the Admin and View applications to monitor video and make all other configuration changes needed for these units (see Unit Configuration Basics on page 65, Video Feed Setup on page 81, Configuring Other Hardware on page 151, and other sections of this guide for more configuration information; see the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide for more information about monitoring and playing back video). 66 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Visit http://www.honeywellsystems.com/support/download-center/index.html to download the latest Rapid Eye software. Follow the instructions on the Download Center website to logon to the Download Center and find the latest Rapid Eye software. Using Older Documentation For the setup and operation of older-model units, Honeywell recommends referring to the user guides that came with those units, as needed. Adobe PDF files of these older guides are available from Honeywell technical support. See the back cover of this guide for contact information. Making a Site Operational A Rapid Eye unit is working within minutes of being turned on. There are a few crucial steps needed to make your Rapid Eye site an outstanding security tool. First Maintenance Session You run the first Maintenance Session at a site after: • • Adding that site to a Rapid Eye central database. See Adding a Site on page 37. Upgrading a Rapid Eye unit. Site Registration When the first Maintenance Session runs, the validity of the communication data to the site can be checked. If correct, the site is registered automatically, making it available to View operators who have the right to use it. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 67 Unit Configuration Basics Figure 4-1 Rapid Eye Unit Serial Number and Software Version The result of registering a site The Rapid Eye unit has a serial number and a software version. These numbers are displayed on the System tab (as illustrated in Figure 4-1) and on the Hardware tab. TIP! Someone has to run a Maintenance Session on a unit before he or any other View operator can run Live Sessions. One Maintenance Session is enough to register a site for all users of that site. Caution Honeywell recommends setting a unit to the correct time zone, time, and date before using the unit in your organization’s operations. Security Considerations A Rapid Eye unit is working within minutes of being turned on, however there are crucial steps to make your Rapid Eye unit a useful security tool: • • • • 68 Set the time zone , date and time. See Unit Time Zone and Clock on page 69. Incorrect time stamps can make the identification of video impossible. Check the camera configuration. See General Camera Settings on page 82. Cameras are detected automatically. You need to specify the drivers for PTZ (pan, tilt, zoom) cameras. You need to configure network settings for any connected Honeywell or supported ONVIF IP cameras. Test the alarms. For events set to trigger alarms, test if these events give you the anticipated results. See Events Defined on page 215. Honeywell recommends using a system password. Without a system password, your Rapid Eye sites can be accessed by Admin users in other organizations. To avoid this situation, see Securing a Site on page 74. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Scheduling Options By default, video is recorded all the time and alarms can be triggered at any time. You have the option of having cameras and alarms disabled on days and at times of your choice. To do so, see Scheduling Configuration on page 123. Unit Time Zone and Clock Crucial Settings Setting the Time Zone and System Clock on Rapid Eye units is crucial to the correct identification of video. These settings also govern the scheduled recording and scheduled alarm features. Be sure to set the proper time and time zone. Time Zone Your System Administrator needs to indicate in which time zone each Rapid Eye unit is installed. Make this setting whether a Rapid Eye unit’s clock is set manually or automatically. Caution The unit Time Zone is crucial for correctly reporting on the video of events. Setting the Time Zone of a Rapid Eye Unit 1. Using View, select a unit to set the time zone with. 2. Start a Maintenance Session (see page 65). 3. Click the Time tab (see Figure 4-2). Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 69 Unit Configuration Basics Figure 4-2 Unit Time Using SNTP as a Reference Select when using SNTP to automatically update the time Units need you to specify the time zone 4. If the zone indicated in the Time Zone field is incorrect, click the Time Zone drop-down arrow. A list of all time zones appears. 5. Scroll the list, as needed, to find the time zone in which the unit is installed. The time zone is set immediately; there is no need to reboot the unit. TIP! The time zone is set on a unit-by-unit basis. Repeat this procedure for every unit in your system. Table 4-1 Effect of Time Zone Setting on Display and Clips Operator PCa Unit Time Zoneb Time Shownc: Sessions and Clips Showing 4:00 PM Eastern Time Eastern Time UTC - 05:00 Show unit time and recorded video as 4 PM Showing 4:00 PM Eastern Time Pacific Time UTC - 08:00 Show unit time and recorded video as 1 PM a To set the time zone on an operator’s PC, use the Control Panel in Microsoft Windows. See also the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide, Selecting a Time Reference. b Set using View, while running a Maintenance Session. c Display can be changed for a session’s duration to LTZ (the local time zone set on your PC), RTZ (a camera’s remote time zone) or to UTC (universal time zone). See the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide. Conflicting Time Zones A Rapid Eye unit’s time zone can be changed without the knowledge of a View operator. It can be done at the unit, using LocalView, or through another database. The View operator’s next attempt to access the site is interrupted by a Time Zone message (shown in Figure 4-3). 70 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide The message also appears for areas within a time zone that have different rules for daylight savings time. For example: Indiana (East) in the Eastern time zone (GMT-5:00) differs from Eastern Time (US Canada), also GMT-5:00. To respond to a notification of conflicting time zones, select the time zone that indicates where the Rapid Eye unit is installed and then click OK. Figure 4-3 Different Rules May Apply for DST in One Time Zone Setting the Clock Automatically with SNTP See your IT Administrator to find out if a Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) server is in use. Rapid Eye units on a LAN can benefit from the automatic setting. It is accurate to within a fraction of a second. 1. Obtain the IP address of an SNTP server. You have the option of also obtaining the address of an alternate server. 2. Using View, select a unit whose clock needs to be set. 3. Start a Maintenance Session. 4. Click the Time tab. 5. If Automatic is not selected, click it. The Time tab appears as in Figure 4-2. 6. Select the Primary SNTP Server field and enter the IP address of the SNTP server obtained in step 1. You have the option of indicating an alternate SNTP server in the Alternate SNTP Server field. 7. Click Refresh. The Rapid Eye unit contacts the SNTP server and synchronizes the DVR clock to the SNTP time. 8. You have the option of either ending the maintenance session or continuing to configure the unit. See Ending Maintenance on page 76. Auto-Synch Statistics The statistics that appear are for Rapid Eye technical support, if they make a service call to your site. The Auto-synch statistics do not apply to a clock set to Manual. Last Synchronized at shows the last time that the SNTP server was used. Synchronization to SNTP occurs at least every 24 hours. Time Difference displays the accuracy of synchronization. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 71 Unit Configuration Basics Setting the System Clock Manually A System Administrator can synchronize the clock of a Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT unit using a PC’s clock as reference. This is more useful for units connected only by dial-up, but can also be used for units on a LAN. TIP! Check/set the clock on an operator’s PC before setting a unit clock manually. Adjusting the Clock on a PC Running Rapid Eye Software To adjust the PC time, date and time zone: 1. Click Start  Control Panel  Date and Time. The Date and Time Properties dialog opens. 2. Check the accuracy of the time and the time zone on the PC and adjust it as needed. Using a PC Clock to Set a Unit Clock Manually 1. Using the View application, select a Rapid Eye unit whose clock needs to be set. 2. Start a Maintenance Session (see page 65). 3. Click the Time tab. Select Manual it is not already selected. The Time tab appears as in Figure 4-4. 4. Click Set Rapid Eye Unit’s Clock. Figure 4-4 Manually Setting a Rapid Eye Unit Clock Click to synchronize the Rapid Eye unit’s time with your PC. Message indicating that the unit time and PC time are NOT synchronized. Message indicating that the unit time and PC time ARE synchronized. Synchronizing Time Over Dial-Up Due to the nature of dial-up connections, the Rapid Eye unit’s time may still be off by a few seconds after synchronizing it. 72 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Adjusting the Time on an Operational Unit Caution If a unit’s clock is set incorrectly (more than +/– a few seconds), Honeywell recommends setting a unit to the correct time (and date) as soon as possible. Human Error or Unauthorized Use Leaving the clock set to an incorrect time (more than +/– a few seconds) for a long length of time (an hour or more) on an operational unit, can create problems for operators who need to retrieve video when the clock is set correctly. During the span of incorrect time, video is not erased and continues to be recorded; however, two instances of video can be created at the same timestamps. Using the Seek or Jump controls shows the video of the first instance only. The second instance of video can only be played through or fast-forwarded. Correcting the Clock Whole Hours: Time Reference Check the Time Reference setting. If the clock of a unit in another time zone shows a time that is off by whole hours, the clock could be set to the correct time, but is using an optional display (GMT, operator’s time zone, unit’s time zone). Refer to the Selecting a Time Reference in Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide. Whole Hours: Time Zone Check the Time Zone setting. If the clock of a unit in another time zone shows a time that is off by whole hours, the clock could be set to the correct time, but is set to an incorrect time zone. See Unit Time Zone and Clock on page 69. Setting the Clock to the Correct Time A short span of incorrect time. If a unit’s clock shows the wrong time (more than +/- a few seconds) for a short time period (a few seconds, a few minutes, up to an hour), you need to reset the clock to correct it; either automatically or manually. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 73 Unit Configuration Basics A Follow-Up May Be Needed: Clearing Storage If the clock remains set to an incorrect time (more than +/– a few seconds) for a considerable length of time (many hours, days or weeks) it can become inconvenient and confusing for an operator who needs to play through that recorded video. For such an error: • • Set the clock correctly; either automatically or manually. Consider Clearing Storage, page 151. Securing a Site Securing the Rapid Eye System After Making a Site Operational, page 67, Honeywell recommends that you secure your Rapid Eye site by adding: • A system password. Use Admin to set a system password to protect your sites from unauthorized accounts. See System Password on page 194. - and - • A password for the Administrator account. Used to help prevent uncontrolled configuration of Rapid Eye units, accidental clearing of a unit’s storage, or unwanted removal of the system password. See Administrator Password on page 205. Be sure to update security after making these changes (see Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit on page 153). Rebooting a Unit 1. Start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Please wait until the System operational message appears. 2. Click Reboot. Reasons to Reboot a Rapid Eye Unit Use of the Reboot button does not damage the unit. However, it does interrupt the recording of video for a few moments and should not be used unless Rapid Eye technical support instructs an operator to perform a reboot. A reboot can be traced to the operator who performed it. See Tracing Events on page 219. Caution 74 The Reboot button is for rebooting a Rapid Eye unit. Do not mistakenly reboot your PC when prompted to click the Reboot button in the Maintenance window. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Automatic Reboot of a Rapid Eye Unit A Rapid Eye unit reboots by itself when: • Changes to a modem serial device are applied. Modem settings are explained in Setting Up a Modem Serial Device on page 162. System files are upgraded, as explained in System Files on page 154. Power to the unit is interrupted and restored. The system’s video signal is changed between NTSC and PAL. • • • Remote View Software Upgrade To upgrade the Remote View software on your PC, you will need to download the latest software release from the Honeywell Download Center at: http://www.honeywellsystems.com/support/download-center/index.html. Follow the instructions on the Download Center website to logon to the Download Center and find the latest Rapid Eye software. Follow this procedure to complete the upgrade: 1. Start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Wait until the System operational message appears. 2. Select the System tab in the Maintenance window. 3. Click Upgrade. You are warned that all users will be disconnected from the unit. Click Yes to continue. Figure 4-5 Rapid Eye Upgrade with View Application 4. Click Browse. 5. Find and open the software upgrade file you have downloaded. 6. Click Next. The message that opens describes the exact version that you are upgrading to. Click Next to start the upgrade. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 75 Unit Configuration Basics 7. The unit will reboot automatically once the upgrade has completed. Maintenance Reference Ending Maintenance To end a Maintenance Session, close the Maintenance window. Other actions can also close sessions: • • • Click , OR Click Disconnect on the Actions menu, OR Close View Using Apply The Apply button is used after changes have been made to the IP address and other network settings, including DHCP, motion mask, and response rules. If the Apply button is active and you select another tab, the button remains active. Maintenance Topics Table 4-2 Maintenance Reference Topics Topic (alphabetical) Important for … Action See … General Camera Settings video configuration page 82 Clearing Storage video archive action page 151 Customer Data and Customer Device Events log/alarms configuration page 167 Dial-Up Connection dial-up action page 52 Events Defined alarms action page 215 Feedback Box Reference system files report page 78 Hardware Report Honeywell report page 165 Motion Detection motion search configuration/action page 133 Rapid Eye Audio audio configuration page 172 Obtaining Unit Statistics Honeywel report page 148 76 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Table 4-2 Topic (alphabetical) Maintenance Reference Topics (cont’d) Important for … Action See … Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup video-PTZ configuration page 101 Setting Up a Modem Serial Device dial-up connection configuration page 162 System Tab in a Maintenance Session LAN/WAN configuration page 157 System Files upgrades action page 154 Unit Time Zone and Clock all units action page 69 Using Monitor Output 1 as a Public Display Monitor public display configuration page 165 configuration page 159 Setting a Bandwidth Throughput system performance / Option bandwidth Maintenance Tasks The tasks in Table 4-3 are carried out as you see fit. Suggestions are indicated in the When to Accomplish column. Table 4-3 Regular Maintenance Tasks Crucial … Tab and Task When to Accomplish See … To all units Time After creating sites or if time on a Rapid Eye unit is wrong. page 69 For video Video - Image After creating sites and when adding/removing camera(s) at a site. page 82 For motion Video - Motion At user discretion; to prepare video for motion search page 133 and alarms. To restrict access Security After changing the system password, modifying user page 74 profiles or adding alarm stations. LAN/WAN System After creating sites or when enabling FAULT RELAY at a site. For PTZ Serial Devices and Video - PTZ To select a driver for cameras that pan, tilt and zoom page 101 (PTZ) and to enable PTZ-type camera(s) at a site. Rapid Eye audio Audio At user discretion. Alarms Events At user discretion; to set up logs or alarms triggered page 215 by events. n/a Serial Devices - Data recording At user discretion; to set up logs or alarms triggered page 167 by events. Honeywell technicians Statistics At user discretion; for troubleshooting. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 page 157 page 172 page 148 77 Unit Configuration Basics Table 4-3 Regular Maintenance Tasks (cont’d) Crucial … Tab and Task When to Accomplish See … n/a Statistics - Clearing data When permanently closing a site. page 151 Upgrades System Files When upgrading a Rapid Eye unit. page 154 n/a Eagle Audio Enable Eagle hardware. page 174 Feedback Box Reference Table 4-4 Maintenance Session Messages from a Unit Message Following … See … Activate System Failure Apply or Rapid Eye unit reboot page 74 Activated System Apply or Rapid Eye unit reboot page 74 Activating remote unit… Rapid Eye unit reboot page 74 Activating System Rapid Eye unit reboot page 74 Clearing Storage Use of Statistics tab page 148 Clearing Storage, n% completed Use of Statistics tab page 148 Connecting to Remote Unit… Start of Maintenance Session page 65 Getting statistics from Remote Unit… Use of Statistics tab page 148 Promoted temporary files Use of System Files tab page 154 Reboot System Failure Apply or Rapid Eye unit reboot page 74 Recovering storage, n% completed Use of Statistics tab page 148 Recovering Storage Use of Statistics tab page 148 Requesting file transfer permission from the Remote Site Download of system file page 154 Apply or Rapid Eye unit reboot page 74 and page 76 Resetting remote unit… Rapid Eye unit reboot page 74 Resetting System Rapid Eye unit reboot page 74 Restarting System Rapid Eye unit reboot page 74 Runtime System Failure Apply or Rapid Eye unit reboot page 74 Starting remote unit… Start of Maintenance Session page 65 Starting System Rapid Eye unit reboot page 74 Statistics received Use of Statistics tab page 148 Apply or Rapid Eye unit reboot page 65 and page 74 Opening media storage with full repair check, please wait… Reset System System Operational 78 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Table 4-4 Maintenance Session Messages from a Unit (cont’d) Message Following … Time zone updated on unit and in central and local database User makes a change to the unit time zone page 69 data Time zone updated on unit Resolution of time zone conflict page 69 Time zone updated in central and local databases Resolution of time zone conflict page 69 Transfer sucessful Use of System Files tab page 154 Transferring file… Use of System Files tab page 154 Updating security Use of Security tab page 76 Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 See … 79 Unit Configuration Basics 80 5 Video Feed Setup This chapter describes setting up the video feed from analog cameras. Note Honeywell and supported ONVIF IP cameras connect and configure differently from analog cameras. This chapter focuses on setting up analog cameras, though some of the steps are the same for IP cameras. Refer to Setting Up Fixed IP Cameras on page 294 for setup information specific to Honeywell IP cameras, and Setting Up Supported Fixed ONVIF IP Cameras on page 305 for setup information specific to supported ONVIF IP cameras. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVRs support Honeywell equIP® V2, equIP® H.264, equIP® 1080p, equIP® Wide Dynamic Range IP, Performance IP, and/or HD3/4 IP cameras on Hybrid V10.1 units. Some ONVIF IP cameras are also supported (see http://www.security.honeywell.com/hota for a complete list of supported IP cameras). Rapid Eye Hybrid HD units support 16 channels of IP video. Rapid Eye Hybrid LT units support 4/8 channels of IP video on Hybrid LT 4/8-channel DVRs. See Supported IP Cameras on page 292 for a list of Honeywell IP cameras supported by Rapid Eye Hybrid V10.1 and V10.0 DVRs. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 81 Video Feed Setup General Camera Settings Figure 5-1 Video Tab Renaming a Camera 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session, page 65. 2. On the Video tab, select the name of a camera in the Name column. Default camera names are Camera1, Camera2, and so on. 3. Click the name of the camera once more; a box appears around the name. 4. Enter a new name for the camera, if needed (maximum 40 characters). Press Enter. Adjusting a Video Feed 82 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session, page 65. 2. On the Video tab, select the name of a camera in the Name column. 3. Adjust Brightness, Hue, Contrast and Saturation, as needed. You can monitor changes on the video feed displayed. Your changes are saved as they are made. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Note Caution Brightness, Hue, Contrast and Saturation adjustments are not available with Honeywell or supported ONVIF IP cameras. See the documentation that came with your IP camera for information on other camera adjustments that can be made with the IP camera web browser. Video feed adjustments cannot correct cameras that are badly-angled, out of focus, in the dark, and so on. If corrections are needed beyond these adjustments, see Environmental Interference for Video Feeds on page 100. Re-Enabling a Camera Feed In the Name column, select the box next to the camera icon and name. The camera is enabled when a checkmark appears in the box. If no video appears, consider that the camera may be turned off, disconnected from the unit, not powered, or damaged. See Environmental Interference for Video Feeds on page 100 for more information. Re-Enabling All Newly Connected and Powered Cameras You have the option of either: • Enabling the new cameras one-by-one, - or - • Cycle the unit’s power so that cameras are auto-detected. Disabling a Camera 1. On the Video tab, select a camera in the Name column. 2. Clear the checkbox next to the camera’s name. Caution Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Disabling a camera resets the recording settings and all other configurations to their default settings. The defaults are used when the camera is re-enabled. 83 Video Feed Setup Resolution of Live Video in View Software Automatic Optimization of Resolution for Live Video Sessions The View application optimizes the resolution of live video. The size of a camera window determines which resolution is used. As an operator makes a camera window larger (or smaller), the resolution of images is automatically adjusted for an optimal view of the video feed. See the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide, for more procedures and tips about live video. TIP! The resolution of recorded video is setup in a Maintenance Session and does not change when View software automatically optimizes the resolution of live video. Smoothing Video Video smoothing is an option of the View application, set by the View operator. It adds a load to the operator’s CPU and can slow busy systems. The result of video smoothing is not recorded; it can be toggled OFF/ON while monitoring recorded or live video. In a Maintenance Session, video smoothing can be seen in the Enhanced Preview window. See The Enhanced Preview of Resolution on page 92. See also the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide for more information. Note The resolution and quality of video displayed by the Remote View application can also be affected by the available bandwidth of the network the unit is installed in. See Setting a Bandwidth Throughput Option on page 159 to set up your system for high or low bandwidth. It is also possible to disable LocalView to improve system performance. If LocalView is not used in your system, see Enabling or Disabling Local Monitoring on page 159 to disable LocalView. Other Video Settings Color You have the option of specifying if a color video feed is viewed in color or in black and white (b&w). Removing the checkmark from the Color box on the Video tab shows the video feed in b&w (see Figure 5-1 on page 82). Color continues to be recorded and can be toggled on/off, as needed. Note 84 Color can not be enabled/disabled with Honeywell and supported ONVIF IP cameras. This option is for analog cameras only. See the documentation that came with your IP camera for information on other camera adjustments that can be made with the IP camera web browser. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Recording Settings Use the Recording tab to setup the Continuous video recording settings. The values are reported in Recording Settings on the Video tab. See Recording Video with Continuous Recording Settings on page 85. See Motion Detection on page 133. See Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup, page 101, and Using a PTZ Camera on page 105. Screen Area: Size of Camera Windows on a PC Monitor If the resolution settings for a Rapid Eye unit take up too much or too little of the PC monitor’s area, adjusting Microsoft Windows’ Display Properties for a PC monitor can have a positive effect. See Monitor Settings to Customize Windows for a PC, page 98. Recording Video with Continuous Recording Settings Making Use of a Maintenance Session To set up a video feed, continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site (see page 65). Figure 5-2 Recording Tab with Six Analog Cameras Recording Enabling the Recording of a Video Feed 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session (see page 65). 2. On the Recording tab (illustrated in Figure 5-2) note that in the Record column, recording is OFF by default for all cameras, when the unit is new. Cells that are unavailable indicate that that camera port is not connected to an analog camera, setup for an IP camera, or that the camera is disabled. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 85 Video Feed Setup 3. Select the cell in the camera’s Record column. A drop-down menu appears. Select ON. The settings for Continuous and Event Recording become available to change. Note Remember to enable recording on all cameras, especially those where alarms are expected. If recording is not enabled, no alarm video will be recorded when alarms are set off. Feedback on the Video tab On the Video tab, note that a red dot has appeared, between the camera’s icon and its name ( ). The red dot means that the unit is recording the video feed. Disabling Recording of a Video Feed Camera settings are retained when recording is disabled. Caution Disabling a camera resets the recording settings and other configurations to default settings. The defaults are used when the camera is re-enabled. Customizing Settings for Recorded Video Flexibility Use the Recording tab to customize the Resolution, Frame Rate and Quality for each camera’s Continuous recording and Event recording settings. The recording settings can be the same for all cameras or customized on a camera-by-camera basis. Note 86 Only the Frame Rate can be customized for the Event recording settings on Honeywell and supported ONVIF IP cameras. Resolution, Frame Rate and Quality are fully customizable for Continuous recording on IP cameras, but only Frame Rate is available for adjusting on Event recording. See Setting Up Fixed IP Cameras on page 294 for more information on Honeywell IP camera setup. See Setting Up Supported Fixed ONVIF IP Cameras on page 305 for more information on supported ONVIF IP camera setup. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Making Settings Values for Event recording cannot be set lower than the settings for Continuous recording. Forecasting Results For Calculating the Length of the Video Archive, see page 142. To compare resolution settings, see Comparing the Resolutions of Recorded Video on page 94. Resolution Setting 1. On the Recording tab, select a cell in the Resolution column for a camera. 2. Select a value (pixels × pixels) from the list. For more information, see Optimizing Recorded Video, page 90, and Recorded Video Resolution Reference on page 97. The default values for analog cameras are 320 × 240 (NTSC) and 384 × 288 (PAL). Honeywell and supported ONVIF IP cameras may use different resolution values than the analog cameras. This includes the default NTSC and PAL resolutions. TIP! Honeywell recommends optimizing the resolution of recorded video using the Automatic Performance Maximization. Caution Honeywell does not recommend gauging the resolution of recorded video based on live video. Live video is always shown at an optimal resolution that could differ from the recording resolution configured. Frame Rate Setting 1. On the Recording tab, click a cell in the Frame Rate column for a camera. 2. Select an images per second (ips) value from the drop-down list that appears. The default value is 1 ips. The list of Frame Rate values available for selection may be different between IP cameras (both Honeywell and supported ONVIF IP cameras) and analog cameras. Analog cameras will have more values available for selection. Note The following frame rate values have been calculated using CIF resolution. If the resolution is raised, frame rates may have to be lowered. Table 5-1 Frame Rate Values (Approximate IPS) for Rapid Eye Units NTSC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7.5 10 15 PAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 12.5 25 Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 30 87 Video Feed Setup Frame Rates for the Rapid Eye Family Rapid Eye 480/400 IPS units. Rapid Eye 480/400 ips units have a maximum frame rate setting of 480 ips at CIF resolution (480 ips for NTSC units, 400 ips for PAL units). This maximum frame rate can be divided among connected cameras, however needed. For example, each of 16 cameras can be set to 30 ips, or 8 cameras can be set to 60 ips, and so on. To automatically set the maximum frame rate and resolution of your system, see Making Optimized Resolution and Frame Rate Settings on page 92. Rapid Eye 120/100 IPS units. Rapid Eye 120/100 ips units have a maximum frame rate setting of 120 ips at CIF resolution (120 ips for NTSC units, 100 ips for PAL units). This maximum frame rate can be divided among connected cameras, however needed. For example, each of 16 cameras can be set to 7.5 ips, or 8 cameras can be set to 15 ips, and so on. To automatically set the maximum frame rate and resolution of your system, see Making Optimized Resolution and Frame Rate Settings on page 92. Rapid Eye Hybrid LT units. Rapid Eye Hybrid LT units have a maximum frame rate setting of 120 ips at CIF resolution (for NTSC units, 100 ips for PAL units). This maximum frame rate can be divided among connected cameras however needed. For example, each of 8 cameras can be set to 15 ips, or 4 cameras can be set to 30 ips, and so on. To automatically set the maximum frame rate and resolution of your system, see Making Optimized Resolution and Frame Rate Settings on page 92. Using Lower Frame Rates Frame rate and resolution Units can record up to 30 ips from each NTSC camera (up to 25 ips for PAL) at the default resolution. Setting a higher resolution may require lowering the frame rate. Slower fast-forward or rewind More images per second (ips) take more time to process. If recording rates of one or two ips are satisfactory, go ahead and use them. Security video and commercial video The movement of persons recorded at higher rates appear smoother than at lower frame rates. Consult your security personnel about what they require from video surveillance. Two or three frames per second may be wholly adequate for some security needs. Quality Setting 1. On the Recording tab, click a cell in the Quality column for a camera. 2. Select a value (a compression factor) from the drop-down list that appears. The values range from 6 (low quality) to 10 (high quality). The default value is 7. Quality and the Storage of Video Lower values take less storage space but can display block-like artifacts in the video. The highest Quality setting can double the use of storage space. 88 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Duplicating Settings Using One Camera as a Template For Others For convenience, recording settings can be copied to other cameras. Right-click in the row that you want to use as a template for the others. A menu appears for duplicating all settings, or only the settings for continuous recording, or event recording (see Figure 5-3). Restoring Defaults 1. Right-click on the Recording tab. 2. A menu appears. Click Reset All Cameras to Default Values (see Figure 5-3). Figure 5-3 Menu for Duplicating or for Restoring Recording Settings Duplicate recording settings Restore Default settings Continuous Recording and Event Recording To use event recording, set different values for the Resolution, Frame Rate and Quality from those for continuous recording. See Event Recording Configuration on page 121. Note Only the Frame Rate can be customized for the Event recording settings on Honeywell and supported ONVIF IP cameras. Resolution, Frame Rate and Quality are fully customizable for Continuous recording on IP cameras, but only Frame Rate is available to modify for Event recording. Authority The settings for recording video are made by your organization’s Rapid Eye System Administrator or by a user with the Modify Configuration rights in their account. A System Administrator can consult View operators, security personnel and IT managers to find out if: • • The recorded video is satisfactory for the needs of your organization. The settings do not shorten the video archive to the point of making it unusable. Report The values selected on the Recording tab are also shown on the Video tab. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 89 Video Feed Setup Estimating Storage Capacity As higher values for Frame Rate, Resolution and Quality are set, the amount of time that video, audio and data can be stored in a unit (the video archive) shortens. The Estimated Storage Capacity reports a useful forecast (in days) of the capacity of the video archive (see Figure 5-4). Unit Video Archive Length The Event Recording Duty Cycle value can add more precision to the estimate of the unit’s video archive. Base the duty cycle percentage on how often events and operators will be using the Event Recording settings (% of recording time). The example in Figure 5-4 shows Event Recording using 20% of the total recording time. The estimated length of the video archive is shown (in days) next to the Event Recording Duty Cycle. Figure 5-4 Estimating a Unit’s Video Archive Table 5-2 Event Recording Duty Cycle Range Duty Cycle (% of Recording Time) Estimate for … 0 Continuous recording only 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 Mostly continuous recording (10), to mostly event recording (90) 100 Event recording only Rapid Eye Storage Estimator To make storage estimates using more parameters (scheduling, audio, motion and so on), Honeywell’s Rapid Eye Storage Estimator is installed with Rapid Eye Admin and View software on your PC. See page 143 for more information. Optimizing Recorded Video To optimize the many setup options quickly, use the Automatic Maximization of Performance feature. Performance maximization can be performed using the View application or LocalView. The Quality settings are not affected by this option. The result of maximizing performance is shown on the Recording and Video tabs. 90 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Preparation: Contiguous Connections For optimizing the digital signal processing (DSP) of video and its storage, an installer needs to make camera connections contiguous, on the back of a unit. Connections are contiguous if they start at camera VIDEO INPUT 1 and continue sequentially. For example, connecting three cameras to inputs: #1, #2 and #3 is contiguous; connecting the cameras to inputs: #1, #3 and #4 is not; nor would using inputs: #2, #3 and #4. Automatic Maximization of Performance Gauging the Processing Load The load on the DSP is reported on the Bandwidth Utilization gauges and are updated as you use the Recording tab to customize the settings for recorded video (see Figure 5-5). Figure 5-5 Load on Rapid Eye Resources Automatic Display of Maximization Tool If settings are set too high, the Automatic Performance Maximization window is displayed (see Figure 5-6). Figure 5-6 Automatic Performance Maximization Window Automatic options for Performance Maximization. Double-click an option to implement those settings. The list of optimization options changes, depending on: • • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 The use of NTSC or PAL equipment. The number of cameras connected to the unit. Optimization cannot be used if the cameras are not connected contiguously. See Optimizing Recorded Video, page 90. 91 Video Feed Setup Making Optimized Resolution and Frame Rate Settings In the Automatic Performance Maximization window, double-click one of the automatic maximization options (see Figure 5-6). Manual Display of Maximization Window To display the Automatic Performance Maximization window, click Configure Automatic Optimizations, after right-clicking on the Recording tab (see Figure 5-7). Figure 5-7 Configure Automatic Optomizations Command The Enhanced Preview of Resolution 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 2. On the Video tab, select a camera name in the Name column. The Enhanced Preview button is available if the camera is recording. A camera that is recording is identified by a red dot between its icon and name. 3. Click Enhanced Preview. Figure 5-8 shows a feed recorded at a low resolution of 160 x 120, at the size that it would appear on a monitor. The outlines show the optimal size of a video feed on the PC’s monitor for that resolution. The many highlighted resolution labels can be used to display another resolution. 4. You have the option of experimenting with: • • • 92 Viewing the video feed at the optimal size for a resolution. Click the resolution labels within a resolution outline or use the Resolution setting on the Recording tab to change the view. Stretching the video image. To compare resolutions at other image sizes, drag the lower-right corner of the video image to re-size the image, as needed. The Image Size box reports the size of the stretched image. Displaying or hiding outlines and labels on the video preview. Select the Show outlines and Show resolution labels options, as needed. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 5-8 Enhanced Preview Window Optimal sizes for a video feed Use to display another recording resolution Resolution Tips The following tips allow you to archive more video by lowering the resolution of recorded video. Do You Need to Establish an Individual’s Presence or a Person’s Identity? • • • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Presence may be sufficient for some situations. For tasks that only involve establishing if someone has entered the building, or counting cars in a parking lot, and so on, low resolution may be good enough to establish presence, helping to guarantee a longer video archive. Need to know how many cars? Objects can be effectively counted at low resolution and make using higher resolutions unnecessary. To identify unknown vehicles, a person’s facial traits and so on, better camera positions and higher-resolution may be needed. Identification may not be as crucial when subjects are known, such as employees, uniformed personnel, and so on. You have the option of adjusting Microsoft Windows Display Properties for your PC monitor. See Monitor Settings to Customize Windows for a PC on page 98. 93 Video Feed Setup Comparing the Resolutions of Recorded Video Figure 5-9 Identifying a Subject Using High or Moderate Resolution Detail of recorded video, previewed at a resolution of 704 x 480, captured while optimally sized. Shown here as it would appear on a PC’s monitor. Preview window Detail of recorded video, previewed at a resolution of 320 x 240, captured while stretched larger than optimal to compare with higher resolution. Shown here at stretched size. Security and Presence Before critical events occur, it is worthwhile to compare video recorded with Continuous settings against video recorded using Event settings. This can help you establish if the resolution is high enough for your organization’s security needs. Consult your security personnel to decide whether you need to establish the presence of known individuals. Lower resolutions are usually adequate and take less storage. Samples of low-resolution and high-resolution video images are shown in Comparing the Resolutions of Recorded Video on page 94. Video images are bitmaps. When a camera window is dragged to a larger size, the pixels are also enlarged. The image’s sharpness is not preserved. More stretching can degrade the subject of an image beyond recognition. Compare Figure 5-9 and Figure 5-10. A high resolution image (704 × 480, NTSC) shows recognizable facial characteristics and very few artifacts, such as pixelation, color variance and so on. If storage time is an issue, recordings at a more modest resolution (320 × 240) shows almost as much detail. Applications to establish presence or absence of personnel can use even lower resolutions. At 160 x 120 (NTSC), many facial characteristics of a known person are still recognizable even when the imaged is stretched (as in Figure 5-10). 94 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 5-10 Using Low Resolution (160 x 120, NTSC) to Show Presence Detail of recorded video, previewed at a resolution of 160 x 120 and stretched beyond recognition. Preview window Same detail of recorded video, not stretched, printed life-size. Some facial characteristics are recognizable. Retouching Still Images Bitmap editing tools and imaging software can be used to enhance video stills or screen captures. Although retouching may void the video as admissible evidence in a court of law, it can be of use to highlight a detail or trait. Commercial software for retouching bitmaps includes: Paint-Shop Pro, Corel Photopaint, Adobe Photoshop, and others. For screen captures, use Microsoft Windows, TechSmith’s SnagIt, and so on. Screen Area: Size of Camera Windows on a PC Monitor Adjusting Microsoft Windows Display Properties for a PC monitor can have an effect on how resolution is perceived. See Monitor Settings to Customize Windows for a PC on page 98. Camera Tips for Visual Identification Figure 5-11 Camera Placement Can Be more Important than High Resolutions Detail of video recorded at 704 x 480. Printed at actual size. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 95 Video Feed Setup Camera placement can be a crucial factor when troubleshooting resolution issues. If higher Quality and Resolution values are insufficient for your video needs, consider consulting your camera installers about: • • • • Monitoring small or faraway objects. For license plates, facial traits, and so on, the closeness of a camera to its subject and its ability to zoom can matter as much as— or even more than—higher resolutions and higher quality. Using a gauntlet strategy. To identify vehicles by their license plate, try installing a camera at an entry or exit point, at ground level. Close camera shots coupled with high resolution give the best detail. Covering an area with a duo of cameras. For example, one camera at a payment counter can be zoomed to identify facial characteristics, while another can be installed a little farther away to survey more of the scene. Using higher Quality and lower Resolution. The results can be better, with less impact on the video archive capacity. Resolution Gauge for Retrieval Session The resolution gauge appears when running the View application. The resolution gauge for recorded video differs from the live video gauge. The gauge for live video is explained in the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide. Gauge Indicates at Which Resolution the Recording Was Made When an operator runs a retrieval session, a resolution gauge is displayed on each camera window, indicating the resolution at which the video was recorded. NTSC Gauge The NTSC gauge is shown in Figure 5-12. The image shows a dot that indicates the resolution of the recorded video. The dot changes position when recording settings switch between Continuous Recording and Event Recording settings. The dot placement depends on the Continuous and Event Recording settings. Figure 5-12 Resolution Gauge for Recordings Made With NTSC Cameras Continuous recording Event recording Continuous recording Here, 640 x 240 continuous, is shown for NTSC. While Event Recording occurs, the dot moves to the right. When the Event Recording stops, the gauge again shows the setting for continuous recording. PAL Gauge The PAL gauge is shown in Figure 5-13. The image shows a dot that indicates the resolution of the recorded video. The dot changes position when recording settings switch between Continuous Recording and Event Recording settings. The dot placement depends on the Continuous and Event Recording settings. 96 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 5-13 Resolution Gauge for Recordings Made With PAL Cameras Here, 384 x 288 continuous, is shown for PAL. While Event Recording occurs, the dot moves to the right. When the Event Recording stops, the gauge again shows the setting for continuous recording. Continuous recording Event recording Continuous recording Recorded Video Resolution Reference Table 5-3 Recording Resolutions for Rapid Eye Hybrid HD (NTSC/PAL) NTSC Legacya 640 x 240 640 x 480 704 x 480 Lowest NTSC 320 x 192; default Default when resolution for upgrades from new unit set NTSC; set at legacy for NTSC Also called half Also called full Highest NTSC setting Resolution 192 x 144 384 x 288 704 x 576 Comment Lowest PAL resolution Honeywell default for PAL, including upgrades Resolution 160 x 120 Comment 320 x 240 Gauge in a Retrieval Sessionb PAL 704 x 288 Highest PAL setting Gauge in a Retrieval Sessionb a Legacy: used by older Rapid Eye units, is included for compatibility. There is no gauge for the NTSC legacy setting. The Legacy resolution is not shown in the Enhanced Preview. b Gauges are explained in Resolution Gauge for Retrieval Session on page 96. Table 5-4 Recording Resolutions for Rapid Eye Hybrid LT Units (NTSC/PAL) NTSC Resolution 160 x 120 320 x 240 640 x 240 Comment Lowest NTSC resolution Default setting for NTSC on a new unit Highest NTSC setting Gauge in a Retrieval Sessiona Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 97 Video Feed Setup Table 5-4 Recording Resolutions for Rapid Eye Hybrid LT Units (NTSC/PAL) PAL Resolution 192 x 144 384 x 288 704 x 288 Comment Lowest PAL resolution Honeywell default for PAL, including upgrades Highest PAL setting Gauge in a Retrieval Sessiona a Gauges are explained in Resolution Gauge for Retrieval Session on page 96. Monitor Settings to Customize Windows for a PC Honeywell recommends that if you plan to use View’s higher resolution settings, you should set the monitor screen area to 1280 by 1024 pixels or higher to run View. Microsoft Windows is used to set this value, not the View application. Recommended values are listed in Table 5-5. You can also change the PC Monitor Refresh Rate. See Larger Monitors and Microsoft Windows on page 99. Honeywell also recommends that you consider using two PC monitors at the same time if you plan to display ten or more cameras on a PC screen at once. See Microsoft Dual View Using Two Monitors on page 99. Table 5-5 Screen Area (pixels) Display Properties for Optimal Video at Higher Resolutions For Rapid Eye Hybrid HD units For Rapid Eye Hybrid LT units and over dial-up connectionsa 1600 x 1200   1280 x 1024   1280 x 960   1152 x 864 b  1024 x 768   800 x 800  b a Dial-up connections using few cameras are faster, as is retrieval of video recorded at lower resolutions. Lower settings for the screen area may be sufficient for such use. b Video is visible and workable, even when using smaller screen area settings (see Figure 5-14). 98 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide PC Monitor Refresh Rate Higher refresh rates can alleviate eye fatigue when monitoring video over time. You can change the Refresh Frequency, and the refresh rate (Hertz), as needed. Not all monitors and video cards support the resolutions indicated in the preceding sections, nor do all offer various refresh rates. Consult the documentation supplied with Microsoft Windows, your monitor, and the video card. Microsoft Dual View Using Two Monitors Two monitors can be effectively used with Rapid Eye View to display more camera feeds at once. To set up a Dual View system, see your Microsoft documentation. Hardware note: a second video card is needed on the View operator’s PC for Microsoft’s Dual View setup. Larger Monitors and Microsoft Windows Figure 5-14 Recommended resolution settings: Microsoft Windows Screen Area Settings 1280 x 960 1600 x 1200 Green screen areas use recommended settings and fit better in the Viewing Window (see the scrolling bars below). Resolution settings that are not recommended: 1152 x 864 1024 x 768 Setting Microsoft Windows Larger computer monitors and better video cards are assets when setting Microsoft Windows for high screen area settings. Note how in Figure 5-14, the change in size of the camera windows, as the screen area changes. A camera window is highlighted for comparison. More cameras can be seen at once, and at higher resolutions (here five cameras at 320×240 resolution) when a recommended setting is used, as in A or B. Even Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 99 Video Feed Setup at settings that are not recommended, video can still be viewed, though: some camera windows can appear to extend beyond the monitor’s surface. At any setting, camera windows can be dragged as needed and the player window scrolled. Environmental Interference for Video Feeds Checking your installation for hard-to-predict situations includes spot-checking: • • • • Live video. Run a Live Session on a regular basis. Such spot checks offer confirmation that sites have not been vandalized, rendered ineffective by the environment or tampered with by an operator. See Physical Compromise, below. Recorded video. After a day or two, run a retrieval session to look for artifacts in recorded video, at every half-hour or so, over a 24-hour period. The darkness of night or bright sunlight may indicate the need for changes in camera position or lighting. For outdoor cameras, it can be worthwhile to run such spot checks seasonally. See Physical Compromise, below. After PTZ use. A camera with the ability to pan, tilt and zoom can be set to respond in a variety of ways after use and should be spot-checked. Run a video retrieval session to do so. See Behavior of PTZ After a Session Closes on page 110. Scheduling. The video archive can be spot-checked for recorded video when cameras are scheduled to record. See Scheduling Configuration on page 123. Physical Compromise Even when cameras are setup as recommended, changing environmental factors can compromise video at the source. Obvious factors include: • • • • • • • 100 Direct sunlight for short times during the day. Daybreak can interfere with recording for cameras aimed to the East, as can sundown for cameras pointing West. Dew, frost or kitchen grease. Check camera lenses or windows between the camera and the subject for transparency and cleanliness. Darkness. Without lighting or infrared cameras, indoor rooms and nighttime can make cameras ineffective. Cameras at an outside window, in a room that remains lit during evenings. Reflection from the window can hamper or block outside visibility. Opaque objects. Even small objects can obstruct a camera when they are near and hamper an operator’s view of a site. Large mobile objects, such as a truck, can also be used to compromise video of an event. See vandalism, below. Power outage. Even when plugged into a UPS, prolonged power outages can compromise the recording of video. Vandalism. Tampering with cameras, Rapid Eye units or other hardware, can be done by damaging hardware directly or indirectly interfering (by spraying paint, fog or moving objects into the way), or even through reconfiguration, using the View application. 6 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup Use of panning, tilting and zooming (PTZ) is optional, even with cameras that have the ability to pan, tilt and zoom. Not all cameras have PTZ features. Check with your installer if you are unsure. Note ACUIX IP PTZ cameras connect and configure differently from analog PTZ cameras. This chapter focuses on analog PTZ cameras. Major differences between ACUIX IP and analog PTZ cameras are noted. Refer to Appendix A, IP Cameras, section Using ACUIX IP PTZ Cameras on page 298 for setup information specific to ACUIX IP PTZ cameras. Preparations Determine what PTZ camera models will be used with the Rapid Eye unit. Analog PTZ cameras and the ACUIX IP PTZ camera require some different settings and setup steps (see Using ACUIX IP PTZ Cameras on page 298 for more information on ACUIX IP PTZs). To prepare a Rapid Eye unit to use PTZ cameras, a System Administrator needs to set up a Serial device for PTZ use. A System Administrator can consult the installer to find out which serial ports of the unit are connected to the serial communications line of PTZ domes/cameras. • • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 On Rapid Eye units with three or more serial ports, use any port for the PTZ. For units that have only two serial ports, Honeywell recommends that you connect PTZ domes to port 2; other serial devices might only be assignable to port 1. Many domes, daisy-chained, can be connected to the Rapid Eye unit if they use the same PTZ Communications settings. For the address set on each camera, consult the installer. Other dome communications settings can be found in the dome manufacturer’s documentation. 101 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup Serial Device Settings for PTZ Assigning and Configuring a New PTZ Device Note 1. ACUIX IP PTZs do not connect to serial ports on the Rapid Eye unit, but this configuration step is still required to use ACUIX IP PTZ cameras with your Rapid Eye Hybrid unit. Find out which serial port on the Rapid Eye unit is connected to the PTZ dome(s). The installers connected the Data In port of domes (an RS-485 connector) to either: • • One of the serial ports on a Rapid Eye unit. The port number for a dome can differ from that of another dome. A bus, connected to one of the serial ports on a Rapid Eye unit. The port number is the same for all of the domes on that bus. 2. Continue or start a Maintenance Session (see page 65). 3. Click the Serial Devices tab. 4. Expand the New Devices group (see Figure 6-1). Figure 6-1 Assigning a PTZ Driver to a Port on the Rapid Eye Unit Drag the [PTZ] New Device to the appropriate port, the port your PTZ is connected to on your unit. 102 5. Drag the PTZ icon to the Port that matches the unit’s serial port identified in step 1. If you drag the icon to a port that is already assigned to another device, the PTZ device replaces it, and the displaced device is sent to the Unassigned Devices group. 6. You have the option of renaming the device in the Device Name field (maximum 32 characters, including numbers and spaces). 7. Select the serial interface protocol: RS-232, RS-485, or RS-422. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide 8. You have the option of: • • Selecting the Enable Controller Switch option. A checkmark sets the Rapid Eye unit’s OUTPUT 1 to send a signal whenever a PTZ camera is selected during a Live session. Installers can connect OUTPUT 1 to the external controller so that the signal disables the controller while a Rapid Eye operator uses a PTZ camera. When a PTZ camera is not selected, the signal from OUTPUT 1 stops so that control of the PTZ serial bus is returned to the external controller. Assigning another PTZ device to another Port (or to the Unassigned Devices group). To do so, repeat steps 4 to 7. Video Tab Settings for PTZ Preparations Assign a PTZ serial device, as explained in Assigning and Configuring a New PTZ Device on page 102. The device can be assigned to either: • • TIP! One of the ports on the Rapid Eye unit, OR The Unassigned Devices group The signal format for all cameras (NTSC or PAL) is set on the System tab. See System Tab in a Maintenance Session on page 157. Using Many PTZ Domes/Cameras On One Serial Communications Line If more than one PTZ camera share the same serial communications line, make a note of: • • The address set on each camera. The driver needed for the make and model of the dome. If the domes require different drivers, they cannot share the same port/serial communications line. Enabling a PTZ Camera 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site (see page 65). 2. Click the Video tab. Select the PTZ camera from the list of connected cameras. 3. Click PTZ (see Figure 6-2). 4. Select the Enable checkbox. The PTZ boxes and the PTZ controller become available. The Enable box is not available if a PTZ serial device is not assigned. To assign a PTZ device, see Assigning and Configuring a New PTZ Device on page 102. 5. Select a Driver that matches the PTZ camera. Drivers are listed in Table 6-1. 6. If more than one PTZ camera is sharing the device, select a Camera Address that matches the address set on the dome hardware. 7. Select the Port Attributes of the dome: Data Bits, Stop Bits, Baud Rate and Parity. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 103 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup 8. Select the position that a PTZ camera takes after a View operator closes a Live Session. Consult your security officer before changing the When Live/Response Ends value. See Behavior of PTZ After a Session Closes and Table 6-2, on page 110. 9. Cameras that have a command menu can be set up using the Camera Menu button. Use the dartboard control or the rubber band control to choose a command. Use the Select button to change a value. The PTZ controls are explained in Using a PTZ Camera on page 105. Figure 6-2 A PTZ Camera Configuration Settings on the Video Tab Select PTZ to enable the PTZ settings for a camera Set up the PTZ options Table 6-1 Driver (name)a PTZ Drivers for Controllers and Domes Baud Rate Support for Domes/Controllers/PIT Devices Bossware 19200 PIT device, to which domes are connected Honeywell Fixed Camera 9600 Honeywell HCU484 Intellibus-PTZb 38400 Honeywell ACUIX dome camera Javelin 308 9600 Javelin 308 Controller Kalatel 9600 or 2400 Kalatel KTD 312 Cyberdome Pelco D 4800, 9600, 2400 Pelco D Pelco P 2400 Pelco P Rapid Dome/Orbiter 9600 Honeywell RapidDome or Orbiter SensorMatic RS422 4800 SensorMatic RS422: Delta and Speed Ultrak (using VCL) 2400 Honeywell Ultrak (configured as VCL) Ultrak KD6/Honeywell HD6 9600 Honeywelll KD6, HD6, HD6i a The drivers are not listed alphabetically in the software. A driver can be used with domes other than those listed. For other domes, controllers or PIT devices, consult their accompanying documentation. b The Intellibus driver may not work properly for ACUIX IP PTZs. If your ACUIX IP PTZ is not performing consistantly, try switching to a different driver. Intellibus is not currently supported with Rapid Eye Hybrid LT units. 104 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Using a PTZ Camera Three PTZ controls are available to make PTZ commands: • • • a dartboard-like control, a rubber-band control (also called pull mode control) and a zonal mode control. All PTZ controls are available while running a Live session or while using LocalView. The right to use a PTZ camera is granted in the operator’s Rapid Eye account (see Granting More or Less Rights to an Account on page 185). Displaying the PTZ Dartboard Control The PTZ dartboard control can be obtained in three situations: • During a Maintenance Session, when you select PTZ, the PTZ control displays on the video tab. See the first steps of Enabling a PTZ Camera on page 103. During a Live session, select or add a video stream from a PTZ camera. Click Enable PTZ Control ( ) to display the dartboard controls. In LocalView, a PTZ button is shown when a Live tab is selected. It is available to display the dartboard controls when a PTZ camera is selected. • • Using the Dartboard Control Figure 6-3 Dartboard Control for PTZ Showing Command Feedback Textual feedback of highlighted dartboard area 1. On the PTZ Control, click either Click or Hold. 2. Move the mouse pointer over the dartboard-like control to highlight areas of the dartboard. Each area on the dartboard offers textual feedback in the box below the control. See Figure 6-3. 3. Click when the command that you need is highlighted. If you are using the Hold option, press and hold the mouse button to make the command repeat, as needed. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 105 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup Toggling Between Zonal Mode and Pull Mode 1. Select Options  New Players in the Remote View application’s View menu. 2. Select the PTZ Control mode that you want to use. Figure 6-4 shows Pull Mode selected. 3. You can also select the Color and Style of the drag line that appears for Pull Mode. Figure 6-4 TIP! Changing the PTZ Control Mode The rubber band control cannot be used at the same time as the zonal mode control. Pulling the Rubber-Band Figure 6-5 Dragging the Mouse Pointer in a PTZ Camera Window On the live video image, click and drag the mouse. A line is overlaid on the video. Lengthening the line increases the PTZ camera’s panning or tilting speed (see Figure 6-5). • • • 106 Pan. To pan right and to tilt down, slightly, drag the pointer from the upper left to the lower right. In View, the line is colored blue as shown in Figure 6-5. Zoom. Use the scrolling wheel on the mouse. If the mouse does not have a wheel, see Using the Dartboard Control on page 105. Presets and other commands. In a Live session and in LocalView, right-click on a PTZ camera’s video to obtain a menu of PTZ commands and video resolution commands. In a Maintenance Session, use the commands on the dartboard. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Using Zonal Mode Figure 6-6 3 2 Using PTZ Zonal Mode 1 Move the mouse over the PTZ camera window until the pointer changes to a numbered arrow. Click the mouse to pan or tilt in that direction. Higher values make the camera pan or tilt more than lower values. • To pan or tilt, move the mouse through the PTZ camera’s window until the pointer changes to a numbered arrow and click the mouse button. Figure 6-6 shows the Zonal Mode for panning left. For continuous panning or tilting, click the arrow furthest from the center. To stop continuous panning or tilting, move the mouse through the PTZ camera’s window until the pointer changes to an octagon and click the mouse button. To zoom, use the scrolling wheel on the mouse. If the mouse does not have a wheel, see Using the Dartboard Control on page 105. • • Programming a PTZ Dome Figure 6-7 PTZ Dome with or without Auto-focus Without Auto-focus option With Auto-focus option. Click between the dots to toggle Auto-focus On/Off. PTZ Preset Presets are set during a Maintenance Session. A PTZ camera can be set to return to the first preset when a Live session ends and the camera is no longer in use. Auto-focus View supports an auto-focus control when two dots appear in the – Focus + arc of the PTZ controller. Click between the dots to toggle auto-focus on and off (see Figure 6-7). Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 107 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup Auto Iris View supports an auto-iris control when two dots appear in the – Iris + arc of the PTZ controller. Click between the dots to toggle auto-iris on and off. Ultrak KD6i Domes Before an aperture setting can be changed manually on an Ultrak KD6i dome, you need to turn OFF the auto-aperture option. Auto-aperture is also known as auto-iris on the PTZ controller. The Return to auto-focus command has no effect on Ultrak KD6i domes. Kalatel Domes On Kalatel domes, the iris controls in View toggles harsh brighter/darker settings, not a gradual open or close. Auto-iris has no effect. Configuring a Preset on a PTZ Camera 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session (see page 65). 2. Click the Video tab. Select the PTZ camera from the list of cameras. 3. Click PTZ. 4. In the Preset Programming area, click the drop-down arrow (see Figure 6-8). A list appears. By default, the list contains: Preset 1, Preset 2, Preset 3 and so on (up to 127, total) TIP! Preset 1 may have already been set by an installer, to be used after a session is closed. See Behavior of PTZ After a Session Closes on page 110. Consult your site’s installer or security officer before changing the first preset of a PTZ camera. 5. Select a preset in the Preset Programming list. 6. If desired, you may rename the preset. 7. Adjust the camera positioning with the pan, tilt and zoom controls, as explained in Using the Dartboard Control on page 105. You can also select continuous panning. 8. Click Save Preset. The camera’s pan position, tilt angle and zoom value are saved as the preset selected in step 5. 9. You have the option of immediately: • • • 108 Setting up another preset. Repeat steps 4 to 8, using another preset in step 5. Testing the preset. See Testing a Preset on page 109. Setting presets for another PTZ camera at that site. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 6-8 Programming a PTZ Preset Select a preset from the drop-down list. You can change the name by entering one in the box. Click Save Preset when you are finished programming the preset camera positioning. Testing a Preset Figure 6-9 Testing Presets on a PTZ Camera Use the dartboard controls to test presets (see the following procedure) Test presets by starting a live session, right-clicking on video from a PTZ camera and selecting a preset 1. You have the option of running either: • A Maintenance Session. Click the Video tab, select a PTZ camera to test presets with, and click PTZ. The PTZ dartboard controller displays. • A Live Session. Select or add a video stream from a PTZ camera. Click Enable PTZ Control ( ). The PTZ dartboard controller displays. 2. On the dartboard control, set the drop-down arrow to Preset (see Figure 6-9). 3. Click the numbered buttons above the Preset box. The PTZ camera moves to the selected preset’s position. Check your configuration settings if the camera does not move. Either: • • • A preset has not been set for that number. The preset duplicates the settings of the previously used preset. The camera is labeled as PTZ but is not. PTZ and Motion Detection When an alarm based on motion detection is enabled on a PTZ camera, use of PTZ functions will most likely trigger that alarm. You can limit the number of alarms triggered by using the Delay slider in the motion detection controls. The alarm schedule can also be changed to stop alarms at certain times, such as when PTZ use is anticipated. See Motion Detection on page 133 and Events Defined on page 215 for more information. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 109 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup Behavior of PTZ After a Session Closes Position of PTZ Camera When a Live Session ends, security requirements may need a PTZ camera to return to a set position and zoom value, while the camera is not being monitored by a View operator. Figure 6-10 PTZ Camera: Behavior After Use Set the actions the PTZ takes when a live session closes. The PTZ can: go to a Preset position, stay put, start a tour, or return to Auto Iris and Auto Focus settings. 1. Using View, continue or start a Maintenance Session at a site where pan, tilt and zoom camera(s) need their post-session behavior changed. 2. Click the Video tab. 3. Click PTZ. Check if the Enable box is selected. Post-session behavior cannot be set unless PTZ is enabled. 4. Click the When Live Closes drop-down arrow and select a post-session behavior for the PTZ camera (behaviors are listed in Table 6-2). Table 6-2 Position After PTZ Sessions Close At Session End Comment / Behavior Stay put The camera remains in the last position used by the operator. If it is panning, it keeps on panning; if it is not moving, it stays that way, and so on. Selecting Stay Put makes available the Return to Auto-iris and Return to Auto-focus options. Go to preset 1 The camera returns to preset postion 1 that you have configured. See Configuring a Preset on a PTZ Camera on page 108 to configure the first preset of a PTZ camera. Start tour 1a Some camera models can be programmed to move independently when not in use by an operator. For information on how to program a PTZ tour, see the documentation that came with the domes connected to your Rapid Eye unit. a A PTZ tour differs from site tours (see Touring Many Sites on page 265) and local camera tours using a monitor at a Rapid Eye site. PTZ and Motion Search Video recorded with a PTZ dome or camera can be searched for motion. When the camera is fixed, results are as expected (see Motion Search on page 138). However, motion search is ineffective on video recorded as a PTZ camera is panning, tilting or zooming. If you plan to use motion search on a PTZ camera, use the Stay put or preset option for the after close of session setting (see Table 6-2). Motion search can also be used to find out when a PTZ camera was moved, if that camera should not be moving. 110 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Constant Panning and Video Archive Recording a video feed from a camera that pans constantly requires much more storage space. If the duration of your video archive is a concern, see Quality on page 146. Ultrak KD6i Dome Restriction The return to auto-focus command has no effect on the Ultrak KD6i dome. Caution Do not use the Return To Auto-Iris command on Ultrak KD6i domes. Support for RapidDome PTZ Features A System Administrator can preset a RapidDome PTZ dome, using the View application, for: • • • Mimic tours. A mimic tour recalls the commands to pan, tilt and zoom, that were sent to a RapidDome camera. Mimic tours are also known as path tours. Preset tours. A preset tour recalls a list of PTZ presets. A few presets should be set up before programming a preset tour. Privacy zones. Use presets 100 to 127. The video feed is not displayed when a dome is positioned at these positions. Figure 6-11 shows details of a PTZ setup for the RapidDome Driver, on the Video tab, during a Maintenance Session. Details show controls for the mimic tour, preset tour and privacy zone. The selection of presets and tours is made using the list above the PTZ controller. In the list, Vector is used to select a preset tour. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 111 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup Figure 6-11 Detail of PTZ Setup for the RapidDome Driver Use the list to select presets or tours Select Presets to be set as Privacy Zones Use controls to program a Mimic Tour Use controls to program a Preset Tour RapidDome PTZ Tours 1. In the PTZ controller, click the drop-down arrow in the box under the row of numbered buttons to display a list, showing Preset, Tour, and Vector (see Figure 6-11). 2. Do one of the following: • • 3. For mimic tours, select Tour. For preset tours, select Vector. Click a button in the row of numbered buttons above the drop-down list. RapidDome Mimic Tour 112 1. While using View, select a site that has one or more RapidDome PTZ cameras. 2. Run a Maintenance Session and click the Video tab. 3. Select a RapidDome camera. 4. Click PTZ. Check if the Driver is set to RapidDome/Orbiter. If not, this procedure cannot be used. In the Tour Programming section, Mimic Tour is selected by default. (see Figure 6-11). You have the option of selecting which of the mimic tours you plan to setup. To do so, click the drop-down arrow above the End button. A list appears, showing Tour 1, Tour 2, Tour 3, and so on, by default. Select an item in the list. 5. Click Program. The message Tour Programming is in progress … appears below the buttons in the Tour Programming section (see Figure 6-11.) Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide 6. Use the PTZ controls to pan, tilt and zoom the camera, as needed. 7. Click End. 8. After the tour is programmed, you can: • • 9. Click Test to test the mimic tour. Rename the mimic tour. Click inside the box in the Tour Programming section and enter a name. Save the name by clicking the mouse outside of the box. You have the option of programming another mimic tour for the dome camera; repeat step 4 to step 7, as needed. Testing a Mimic Tour on a RapidDome Camera 1. While using View, select the site at which you have programmed a mimic tour on a RapidDome camera, as shown in RapidDome Mimic Tour, page 112. 2. Run a Maintenance Session. On the Video tab, select the RapidDome camera that is programmed with a mimic tour. 3. Click PTZ. Check if the selected Driver is RapidDome/Orbiter. If not, the wrong camera or site may have been selected and this procedure cannot be used. 4. In the Tour Programming section, select a mimic tour, using the drop-down arrow above the End button. By default, they are named Tour 1, Tour 2, Tour 3, and so on. 5. Click Test. The camera will start running the mimic tour. RapidDome Preset Tour Have some presets programmed before setting up a preset tour. See Configuring a Preset on a PTZ Camera on page 108. Figure 6-12 Right-Click Tour Programming Table Reveals Insert Option Setting Up a Tour of Presets on a RapidDome Camera 1. While using View, select a site that has one or more RapidDome PTZ cameras. 2. Run a Maintenance Session and click the Video tab. 3. Select a RapidDome camera. 4. Click PTZ. Check if the selected Driver is RapidDome/Orbiter. If not, the remaining steps in this procedure cannot be used. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 113 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup 5. In the Tour Programming section, click Preset Tour (Vector). While a preset tour is being programmed, the RapidDome camera does not move. You have the option of selecting which of the four preset tours you plan to set up. To do so, click the drop-down arrow above Dwell Time (see Figure 6-12). A list appears, showing Vector 1, Vector 2, Vector 3, and so on, by default. Select the Vector to be programmed. 6. To add a preset to the preset tour, right-click in the Tour Programming table. A menu appears, showing the Insert command (as in Figure 6-12). 7. Click Insert. A preset is added to the list. • • • Note 8. Presets 100 to 127 can be designated as privacy zones. Repeat step 7 to add more presets, as needed. While adding more presets, you also have the option of using the following commands: • • • • 9. Speed. You have the option of setting the time (in seconds) that the dome will take to reach the preset. Select the Speed column cell that is on the line of the preset. A drop-down arrow appears. Click the arrow and select a value (from 0 to 127). See Figure 6-12. Dwell. You have the option of setting the time (in seconds) during which the dome will stay in the preset position. Select the Dwell column cell that is on the line of the preset. A drop-down arrow appears. Click the arrow and select a value (from 0 to 255). Preset Name. You have the option of replacing the preset name with another. Select the Preset Name column cell that is on the line of the preset. A drop-down arrow appears. Click the arrow and select a value (from 1 to 127). Move Up/Down. You have the option of moving a preset up or down the list, and keeping its Speed and Dwell times. Right-click in the # column cell that is on the line of the preset. A menu appears. Click Move Up or Move Down, as needed. Delete. You have the option of deleting one preset or many from the list. Right-click in the # column cell that is on the line of the preset. Click Delete on the menu that appears. To select many presets, press and hold Ctrl while selecting different lines in the # column. Test. You have the option of testing the preset tour by clicking Test. Click End to stop testing a preset tour. Rename tour. You have the option of renaming the preset tour. Click inside the box next to Preset Tour (Vector). Enter a name. In Figure 6-13, Entrances has replaced the default name of Vector 1. Click Program Vector to send the tour of presets to the camera. To program another tour of presets for the dome camera, repeat step 6 to step 7, as needed. Figure 6-13 114 Location of the Program Vector Button Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Testing a Preset Tour on a RapidDome Camera 1. While using View, select the site at which you have programmed a Preset Tour on a RapidDome camera, as shown in procedure Setting Up a Tour of Presets on a RapidDome Camera. 2. Run a Maintenance Session and click the Video tab. Select the RapidDome camera that is programmed with a Preset Tour. 3. Click PTZ. Check if the selected Driver is RapidDome/Orbiter. If not, the wrong camera or site may have been selected in step 1 and the remaining steps in this procedure cannot be used. 4. In the Tour Programming section, select Preset Tour (Vector). 5. Select the preset tour that you plan to test. To do so, click the drop-down arrow above Dwell Time and select a tour from the list that appears (by default, the list shows Vector 1, Vector 2, Vector 3, and so on). Click Test. Privacy Zones for RapidDome Figure 6-14 Setting Up a Privacy Zone on a RapidDome PTZ Camera Display of the video feeds for PTZ presets 100 to 127 can be toggled on and off. When the dome is at the preset’s position and zoom value, and that preset is enabled, video will not be displayed for that Privacy Zone. Press Reset All to cancel the privacy applied to your presets. A confirmation dialog box appears. Click Yes. Setting a Privacy Zone Select the box next to the preset name so that it shows a checkmark (see Figure 6-14, above). Remove the checkmark to view Live and recoded video from that PTZ preset. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 115 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup Using ACUIX Analog Domes Note This section covers setup and configuration of analog ACUIX PTZ cameras. ACUIX IP and ACUIX analog cameras require different configuration steps. For information about setting up ACUIX IP PTZ cameras, see Using ACUIX IP PTZ Cameras on page 298. An ACUIX™ PTZ dome with Intellibus™ protocol can be configured using the Rapid Eye View application. In preparation, installers should: • • • • Set each ACUIX dome to Intellibus mode (IBus). Set DIP switches 5-8 to ON for each ACUIX dome. The Camera Address can then be set using rotary switches SW1 to SW4 on the PCB at the base of the dome. Connect the domes to a port on the Rapid Eye unit. Notify the System Administrator of the number of the port used on the Rapid Eye unit and the Camera Address used for each ACUIX dome. Configuring the Intellibus Device for a Rapid Eye Unit 1. Assign the Intellibus device to the port used by the installers, by dragging its icon from the Unassigned Devices to the Port used by the installers. Figure 6-15 shows the result when Port 4 is being used. For Ports 1 through 8, select RS-485 on the Serial Devices tab. 2. On the Serial Devices tab, select the values shown in Table 6-3. See also Figure 6-15. Figure 6-15 Communication Settings for Intellibus on the Serial Devices Tab Shortcut for selecting all of the items listed in the table 116 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Table 6-3 Intellibus Settings for ACUIX Analog Domes Communications Value Baud Rate 38400 Stop Bits 1 Data Bits 8 Parity Bits None Configuring an ACUIX Dome for PTZ Use 1. Run a Maintenance Session. 2. Click the Video tab. 3. Select an ACUIX dome. 4. Click PTZ. For information about enabling and configuring a PTZ dome, see Video Tab Settings for PTZ on page 103. 5. In Port Attributes, enter values for Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Data Bits and Parity (as shown in Table 6-3). 6. Do not use the same Camera Address for two ACUIX domes that share the same port. 7. Repeat step 3 to step 6 for each ACUIX dome in your system. Discovering ACUIX Domes You have the option of running the discovery routine if domes were added later or if the list of cameras seems incomplete. 1. Run a Maintenance Session. 2. On the Serial Devices tab, select the port to which an Intellibus device is assigned. 3. Click Discover to update the table of ACUIX domes. Backing Up an ACUIX Configuration File to a PC 1. Run a Maintenance Session. 2. On the Serial Devices tab, select the port to which the Intellibus device is assigned. 3. Click Discover to update the table of ACUIX domes. 4. Select one or more ACUIX domes. To select all of the items in the table, select the checkbox at the top of the Name column (see Figure 6-15). 5. Click Upload from Camera. The configuration file from each of the selected ACUIX domes is copied to the Rapid Eye unit. A configuration file for an ACUIX dome includes: PTZ tours, PTZ presets, privacy zones and all other camera settings. 6. Click Manage Files. The Manage Files dialog box appears (Figure 6-16), showing the ACUIX dome configuration files (*.bin). The configuration file naming convention is: Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 117 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup camera name_camera address_year_month_day_hour_minute_second.bin; for example: Lobby_4_2007_06_16_8_0_0.bin. Firmware files may also be listed and can be ignored for this procedure; their extension is (*.ngd). 7. Select a configuration file. 8. Click Save. A standard file saving window appears, showing the drives and folders available on the operator PC. Click OK after selecting a saving location and filename. 9. Click Close in the Manage Files dialog box. Commands in the Manage Files Dialog Box The Manage Files dialog box shows only the files which are related to ACUIX domes, from among the files on the Rapid Eye unit. If there are no *.bin or *.ndg files, the Manage Files dialog box displays an empty list. Figure 6-16 Manage Files Dialog Box Save. Copies a file from the Rapid Eye unit to the operator’s PC. See step 8 of Backing Up an ACUIX Configuration File to a PC, page 117, above. Delete. Click to delete a selected file. Click Yes on the confirmation dialog box to remove the file from the Rapid Eye unit. This does not remove the information from an ACUIX dome. Refresh. Click to update the report in the Manage Files dialog box. Close. Closes the Manage Files dialog box. Using LocalView A configuration file for an ACUIX dome can also be saved to a Rapid Eye unit by using LocalView. See the LocalView context-sensitive Help for more information. Downloading a Configuration File to an ACUIX Dome After Backing Up an ACUIX Configuration File to a PC, page 117, you can copy that configuration file to another ACUIX dome of the same make and model. 118 1. Run a Maintenance Session. 2. On the Serial tab, select the port to which the Intellibus device was assigned. 3. Click Discover to update the table of ACUIX domes. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide 4. Select one or more ACUIX domes. To select all of the cameras listed, click the checkbox at the top of the Name column (see Figure 6-15). 5. Click Download to Camera. A standard file opening window appears, showing the drives and folders available on the operator PC. 6. Select a configuration file (*.bin) for the ACUIX dome. 7. Click Open. The configuration file is downloaded to the ACUIX dome. Caution Do not upload an ACUIX configuration file from one model of ACUIX to another. For example, the configuration from an ACUIX dome with a FCB EX480C camera should not be uploaded to an ACUIX dome with a VK-S654 camera. For the procedure identify a camera, see Identifying the Model of the ACUIX Dome, next. Identifying the Model of the ACUIX Dome Honeywell recommends identifying the model of the camera in ACUIX domes, to avoid uploading an ACUIX configuration file from one model of ACUIX to another. 1. Run a Maintenance Session. 2. Click the Video tab. 3. Click PTZ. 4. Select an ACUIX dome. 5. Click Camera Menu. The model of the camera is displayed. Upgrading the Firmware of an ACUIX Dome 1. Run a Maintenance Session. 2. On the Serial Devices tab, click the port to which the Intellibus device is assigned. 3. Click Discover to update the table of ACUIX domes. 4. Do one of the following: • • Select all of the ACUIX domes, by clicking the checkbox at the top of the Name column (see Figure 6-15). Select some of the ACUIX domes. If you are not upgrading all of the ACUIX domes, the cameras are upgraded one by one. See step 9 of this procedure. 5. Click Firmware Upgrade. A standard file opening window appears, showing the drives and folders available on the operator PC. 6. Select a drive, folder and a firmware file for the ACUIX dome. These files should have an *.ngd file extension. 7. Click Open. 8. A Maintenance Message dialog box appears to confirm your selection. Click Yes to proceed. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 119 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup 9. If there are many ACUIX domes connected to the unit, and all were selected in step 4 of this procedure, a Sequence for Upgrading Cameras dialog box appears. Select a sequence, and then click Continue. The upgrade of the cameras can be: • • Caution 120 Simultaneous. This will take approximately 10 minutes. One by one. Being more time consuming, this procedure takes about 10 minutes for each camera. This upgrade stops if a camera is off or if the connection fails. A warning appears for that camera if the upgrade stops. If you select Simultaneous, and an ACUIX dome is off, or the connection fails, the upgrade appears to continue without warning the operator. Use this procedure again when all of the ACUIX domes are powered and the connection to them is operational. 7 Enhancing Video Event Recording Configuration Using Higher Settings for Video Recorded During an Event Each camera has its own Event Recording settings. The settings for live video are independent of Continuous and Event Recording settings. Figure 7-1 Continuous and Event Recording Settings On the Recording tab, set higher values for Event Recording settings than for Continuous Recording. The following settings can be changed: • • • Resolution (pixel × pixel) Frame Rate (number of images per second) Quality (more or less compression) Each camera can have its own Event Recording values set independently. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 121 Enhancing Video Note Only the Frame Rate can be customized for the Event recording settings of Honeywell and supported ONVIF IP cameras. Resolution, Frame Rate and Quality are fully customizable for Continuous recording on IP cameras, but only Frame Rate is available to modify for Event recording. See Setting Up Fixed IP Cameras on page 294 for more information on Honeywell IP camera setup. See Setting Up Supported Fixed ONVIF IP Cameras on page 305 for more information on supported ONVIF IP camera setup. Authorized Configuration Event Recording can be configured by your organization’s System Administrator, or by other operators who have the right to run a Maintenance Session. Caution Using high values for Continuous Recording can shorten a unit’s video archive to the point of making it unusable. See Using Higher Values When Recording Video on page 147. Automatic Performance Maximization A System Administrator can optimize Event Recording settings. See Automatic Maximization of Performance on page 91. Live Video The settings for Continuous Recording and Event Recording are independent of those for live video. Setting Lower Values for Continuous Recording The settings for Continuous Recording need to be lower (or equal) to the Event Recording settings. If higher values cannot be set for Event Recording, the values that are being used for Continuous Recording may be set too high. Using the Boost Button for Event Recording Once Event Recording is set up, View operators have the option of clicking Boost ( ) while monitoring Live video. Clicking Boost triggers Event Recording. See the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide, for more information on the Boost button. 122 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Event Recording on Demand during a Site Tour In the View application, the Event Recording button is unavailable while a tour is running. Pause the tour to enable the button. Automatically Recording Events of Interest A storage area may be of little interest until someone enters it. A Rapid Eye unit can be set up to use Continuous recording until motion at the door to the storage area is detected. The unit switches to the Event Recording settings automatically once motion is detected. Another example: a camera is monitoring the access point of a parking lot. Motion detection can be used so that when a vehicle idles, waiting for the gate to rise, Event Recording can be enabled, to make effective use of a Rapid Eye unit’s video storage capacity. Note In these examples, low quality Continuous recording settings record video until an event is triggered and the higher quality Event recording is enabled. An Outside World event, motion event or a Customer-device event can automatically trigger Event Recording. See Scheduling a Response to an Event of Interest on page 129 for more information. Continuous Recording may suffice while nothing of interest occurs. Scheduling Configuration Scheduling is optional, and can be shared by the Continuous Recording of video, the raising of Alarms and a Response Rule, or be used separately. Cameras and alarms can be scheduled before or after they are set up. Scheduling is performed unit-by-unit. You have the option of setting up a Rapid Eye unit to record a video feed only for the days and times that you specify. For example, your organization might need to record video of a parking lot only on weekends and holidays, using only some cameras. You can customize schedules for specific cameras, or groups of cameras. Schedules can also be used with alarms (for example, to prevent them from ringing during business hours). Each camera or the triggering of alarms can be scheduled to either: • • • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Be Always ON. No schedule is used. Cameras using this setting record at all times. Use Schedule (default). The simplest way to simultaneously schedule all cameras and alarms is to customize the Default schedule; see Customizing a Schedule, page 125, and Notes on Holidays and Exceptions, page 128. Use Schedule (defined schedule). Use this option to schedule a camera, group of cameras, or alarms separately. See Adding a Schedule on page 125. 123 Enhancing Video Figure 7-2 Example of a Schedule Assigned to a Camera Video Archive A benefit of using schedules for the recording of video feeds is that it spares storage on a Rapid Eye unit. This helps an organization to maintain a potentially longer video archive. See Calculating the Length of the Video Archive on page 142. Live Video Live video is not affected by scheduling. Alarms The reporting of alarms is scheduled in the same way as Continuous video recording, using the Default schedule or another, defined, schedule. See Alarms and Scheduling, page 127. Motion If Motion is enabled on a camera, the motion events are recorded only when a camera is scheduled to record. If motion is set up to trigger alarms, alarms will only be raised if the alarms are scheduled for that time and day. Audio Feeds Audio is recorded when it is enabled. Audio is not affected by the recording schedules. Data Streams The data from point-of-sales devices (POS) is always recorded and is not affected by the recording schedules. 124 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Using a Schedule You have the option of adding, customizing and deleting a schedule, using the Define Schedules option. A schedule can then be assigned to one or many cameras, to alarms or to a response. Adding a Schedule 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session. Click the Schedules tab. 2. Select Define Schedules. The tab displays the grid of the Default schedule. 3. Click in the Schedule box and enter a name for the new schedule. Click Add when the button becomes available. 4. Select or deselect cells in the Time/Day grid, as needed. Use the following options to set up the schedule: • • • Cell-by-cell. Click the cells of the Basic schedule grid, as needed. Clicking the cells toggles a time from ON (dark) to OFF (light), or OFF to ON (see Figure 7-4). By a block of cells. Drag the mouse pointer over cells. When you release the mouse button, a menu appears showing the Fill Block and Clear Block commands. Click a command, as needed. Globally. Right-click the mouse button to display a menu of commands for customizing more than one cell at once (Clear Row, Fill Row, and so on). See Figure 7-3. Figure 7-3 Customizing a Schedule Customizing a Schedule 1. On the Schedules tab, during a Maintenance Session, select Define Schedules. The tab displays the grid of the Default schedule (see Figure 7-4). 2. Use the Schedule drop-down arrow to select a schedule that you want to customize. 3. Select or deselect cells in the Time/Day grid, as needed. The customization is saved automatically. Use the following options to set up the schedule: • • • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Cell-by-cell. Click the cells of the Basic schedule grid, as needed. Clicking the cells toggles a time from ON (dark) to OFF (light), or OFF to ON (see Figure 7-4). By a block of cells. Drag the mouse pointer over cells. When you release the mouse button, a menu appears showing the Fill Block and Clear Block commands. Click a command, as needed. Globally. Right-click the mouse button to display a menu of commands for customizing more than one cell at once (Clear Row, Fill Row, and so on). 125 Enhancing Video Customizing the Default Schedule By default, all of a Rapid Eye unit’s cameras and alarms are assigned to the Default schedule. Customizing the Default schedule is the quickest way to coordinate a unit for all cameras and alarms. Assigning a Schedule to a Camera or Group of Cameras 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session. Click the Schedules tab. 2. Select Continuous. A list of cameras displays with a schedule grid (see Figure 7-2). 3. Select a camera from the list. If Always On is selected, select Use Schedule. 4. Click the Use Schedule drop-down arrow and select a schedule for the camera. 5. Repeat this procedure for other cameras that need a schedule assigned. Using a 15-Minute Increment in a Schedule 1. On the Schedules tab, during a Maintenance Session, select Define Schedules. 2. In the Time/Day grid, right-click an hour cell to display a menu. 3. Select 15’ Breakdown. A 15’ Breakdown window appears, showing four fifteen-minute cells for that hour, on that day (see Figure 7-4). 4. Click the cells, as needed, to schedule one or many of the fifteen-minute periods. 5. Click OK to save the setting. Figure 7-4 126 Breakdown of an Hour into Fifteen-Minute Sections Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Renaming a Schedule Note The Default schedule cannot be renamed. 1. On the Schedules tab, during a Maintenance Session, select Define Schedules. The tab displays the grid of the Default schedule (see Figure 7-4). 2. Use the Schedule drop-down arrow to select the schedule that you want to rename. 3. Enter a new name in the Schedule box. 4. Click Rename. Deleting a Schedule Note The Default schedule cannot be deleted. 1. On the Schedules tab, during a Maintenance Session, select Define Schedules. The tab displays the grid of the Default schedule (see Figure 7-4). 2. Use the Schedule drop-down arrow to select the customized schedule that you want to delete. 3. Click Delete. If the schedule is in use, it cannot be deleted. Assign another schedule to the cameras, alarms or rules that are using the schedule. Alarms and Scheduling Use of scheduling to disarm alarms is optional. If you assign a schedule to alarms, all alarms will use that schedule. Alarms cannot be scheduled independently. A schedule for the alarms can be independent from those used by cameras. For example, you can set events to trigger alarms only after business hours, while cameras keep recording. Assigning a Schedule to Alarms A schedule is assigned to alarms in the same way as for cameras. Alarms can be set to be: • • • TIP! Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Always ON. No schedule is used. Alarms using this setting are always active. Use Schedule (default). The simplest way to simultaneously schedule all cameras and alarms is to customize the Default schedule. See Customizing a Schedule, page 125, and Notes on Holidays and Exceptions, page 128. Use Schedule (defined schedule). Use this option to schedule alarms for specific days and times. See Adding a Schedule on page 125. Settings for Holidays and Exceptions have a higher priority than the settings for the other days of the week. See Notes on Holidays and Exceptions on page 128. 127 Enhancing Video Note Setting events to trigger alarms is explained in Setting an Event to Trigger an Alarm or To Be Logged on page 216. Notes on Holidays and Exceptions • • • The dates of holidays and exceptions can be input by your organization’s System Administrator, or by operators who have the right to run a Maintenance Session. The dates added to the Holiday/Exception list become part of every schedule. Settings for Holidays and Exceptions have higher priority than settings for the other days of the week. For example, if you set weekdays to not trigger alarms but Holidays are set to trigger alarms, the result would be that alarms are raised on holidays, even when that holiday falls on a weekday. Adding Holidays and Exceptions 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 2. Click the Schedules tab. 3. Select Holiday/Exception (see Figure 7-5). Enter a name for the holiday (or exception) in the Name field. 4. Choose whether to list the day as a holiday or an exception by selecting the option with the Type drop-down arrow. Figure 7-5 5. Ensure that the Date you enter is unused and in the future. To enter a date, either: • • 128 Specifying Holidays and Exceptions Enter a date. In the Date box, select the part of the date that you want to change. Use the arrow keys (on your keyboard to change the number, or enter any number that you want. Use the calendar utility. Click the Date drop-down arrow to display the calendar utility. Find and select the date that you need in the calendar. Click the arrow keys at the top of the calendar to select another month. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide 6. Click Add. The date is added to the list (see Figure 7-5). Note Make duplicate holiday records for each year that the system will be in use. Updating a Name or Type of a Holiday/Exception 1. Select the holiday/exception to be updated from the list (see Figure 7-5). 2. Change the Type or Name fields, as needed. Click Update. Correcting the Date of a Holiday/Exception 1. Select the holiday/exception with the faulty date from the list (see Figure 7-5). Change the Date field, as needed. 2. Click Add. This adds a new holiday/exception with the correct date and the same name. The old item with the faulty date remains on the list. 3. Select the holiday/exception with the faulty date and click Delete. Scheduling a Response to an Event of Interest The Response schedule is used to make simple cause and effect rules, to program how a Rapid Eye unit responds to events of interest. For example, Figure 7-6 shows: Trigger = If camera 1 senses motion... Response = ... then the unit responds with Event Recording on camera 1… Schedule = … however, event recording should not occur outside of business hours. Event Recording will only occur on weekdays, during business hours (between 7 am and 7 pm). Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 129 Enhancing Video Figure 7-6 Rule with a Trigger, Response, and Schedule Triggers and Events of Interest For example, an empty loading dock may be of interest when motion occurs. A Response Rule programs a unit to respond to Events of interest, such as: • • • • • Motion in video Lost video signals An activated input (such as an alarm) Data from a POS device A Honeywell Video Analytics event or alarm Displaying the Response Panel Used for Making Rules 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 2. Click the Schedules tab (see Figure 7-6). 3. Click Response. Figure 7-6 displays for making rules and customizing a response. Authority Setting and customizing rules can be performed by your organization’s System Administrator, or by other operators who have the right to run a Maintenance Session. 130 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Checklist for Setting a Rule in the Response Schedule Figure 7-7 Customizing the Response for a Rule Six steps to settings up a Rule in the Response schedule: 1. Create or select a rule. 2. Enable the rule for editing. 3. Set the trigger. 4. Set up the response. 5. Set the response to be logged or to raise an alarm. 6. Add a schedule. 2 3 4 1 5 6 Note See the next section for more information. 1. Create or select a rule. Click Add to create a new rule or select a rule from the list in the Response Rules box (see 1 in Figure 7-7). The Describe Rule command shows a description of the selected rule, listing all of the rule’s components: trigger, response and schedule. You may also rename a rule (see Renaming a Rule on page 132). 2. Enable the selected rule for editing. To edit and customize a rule, start by selecting the checkbox next to the rule name (see 2 in Figure 7-7). The icon next to the checkbox changes as you customize the rule. See Rule Status Icons on page 132. 3. Set the trigger. Customize the rule’s trigger(s), as needed, by selecting cells that are available in the Event rows of the Trigger table (see 3 in Figure 7-7), and in the POS pane if a POS device is in use. AE Alarms are obtained from an ActivEye client. 4. Set up the response. See 4 and 5 in Figure 7-7. Responses can include: • • • • Using Event Recording settings to record video. For this to have an effect, settings for Event Recording need to be higher than those for Continuous Recording. See Event Recording Configuration on page 121. Making a PTZ camera go to a PTZ preset or tour. Activating an Output on the Rapid Eye unit (to activate a buzzer, for example). Combinations of the above responses. If an Action cell is unavailable, the action has not been set up yet. 5. Set the response to be logged or to raise an alarm. You can customize the duration of a response and if the response is Logged or Raises an Alarm (see 5 in Figure 7-7). See Managing the Response to a Rule on page 133. 6. Add a schedule to the rule. You have the option of selecting a schedule for the rule (see 6 in Figure 7-7). The rule must be active during the days and times specified in the schedule to initiate a response to the rule. See Assigning a Schedule to a Response Rule on page 133. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 131 Enhancing Video Note After selecting a rule, you can perform steps 3 to 6 of the Checklist for Setting a Rule in the Response Schedule in any order. A rule lists the Events that Trigger a response and the Actions that are taken as a Response. Figure 7-7 shows where and how to make a rule. Renaming a Rule 1. Select a rule from the list in the Response Rule box. Click the rule name again. 2. Enter a name for the rule. Letters and numbers can be used, as can some punctuation marks. The same name cannot be used for two rules. 3. Click elsewhere in the View window to save the name. Rule Status Icons As a rule is customized, its status is visually displayed by one of five icons (see Figure 7-8). Figure 7-8 Status Icons for a Response Rule Table 7-1 Status Icons for a Response Rule Status icons for a response rule. See below for descriptions. Status Icon Meaning of the Icon The rule can be edited. The operator needs to set a trigger or a response. The operator has selected an empty schedule. The rule is operational. The rule is prevented from acting by a component that has been disabled (camera, PTZ, motion or other). The rule is disabled. There is no checkmark in the box. 132 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Managing the Response to a Rule You have the following options when deciding how a rule response should end: • • Stops After Events. The response to the event ends when the trigger input ends. Lasts for [15] Seconds. The time can be set from five seconds to 3,600 (one hour). The rule response will continue for the time set in the box. Is As Scheduled. The response continues as long as the schedule allows. • Alarm and Log: to Report a Response A response to a rule can be setup to be logged silently or to raise an alarm. See Setting an Event to Trigger an Alarm or To Be Logged on page 216. Assigning a Schedule to a Response Rule A schedule is assigned to a response rule in the same way as for cameras. A rule can be: • • Always on. No schedule is used. Cameras using this setting record at all times. Use Schedule (Default). The simplest way to simultaneously schedule all cameras and alarms is to customize the Default schedule. This is useful when all the cameras and alarms need to be active at the same time, such as during business hours. See Customizing a Schedule, page 125, and Notes on Holidays and Exceptions, page 128. Use Schedule (defined schedule). To schedule a camera, group of cameras, or alarms for specific days and times. See Adding a Schedule on page 125. • Disabling a Response Rule Rules can be disabled by removing the checkmark next to their name. The response of a disabled rule will not take place even if the response is scheduled to occur. Motion Detection Note Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Motion detection does not work the same way on Honeywell and supported ONVIF IP cameras. See Motion Detection with Supported Honeywell IP Cameras on page 301 for detailed procedures on setting up motion detection with Honeywell IP cameras (see Supported IP Cameras on page 292 to check which Honeywell IP cameras support the motion detection feature). See Motion Detection with Supported ONVIF IP Cameras on page 306 for more information on setting up motion detection with supported ONVIF IP cameras. 133 Enhancing Video Using motion detection to log or trigger alarms is optional. Live video and recorded video are not affected by motion detection settings. Figure 7-9 Motion Detection Configuration Select Smart VMD checkbox to activate Smart VMD module and its features. Note Smart VMD is an intelligent motion detection module that uses video analytics technology to provide more reliable motion detection, while significantly reducing false alarms that can arise from pixel-based video motion detection. Smart VMD is currently only supported for analog cameras. See IP Cameras on page 291 for more information on using IP camera features. See Smart Video Motion Detection (VMD) on page 137 for more information on using Smart VMD with your Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR. Detection Scenarios Motion detection can trigger an Alarm or add entries in a Log, based on motion in one or many areas of a video feed. Motion detection can warn or log the following situations in real-time: • • • • Unauthorized use of an area. A construction crane moving outside of a scoped area, a burglar in an unauthorized area after hours, and so on. Scheduled appointment. Checking the arrival and departure times of a truck at a loading dock, deliveries, even natural phenomena such as tides and so on. Catastrophes. Complements sensors for fire, flood, explosions, and so on. Pest control. Vermin in a storage area, and so on. Configuring Motion Detection 134 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 2. Click the Video tab. Record/Motion/Image is selected by default. 3. For commands, you have the option of using the buttons in the Motion area or the motion commands on the menu. To use the menu, right-click the mouse on the video (see Figure 7-11). Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Customizing Motion Detection with Masking By default, motion is detected everywhere in a video feed. Some of that movement may not be of any interest, such as a roadway in a window, or a door that many people walk by. Areas of no concern can be masked—that is, they are hidden from motion detection—so that they do not trigger an alarm. Masking an Area of the Video Feed Use the image in Figure 7-10 as an example for this procedure: 1. To perform surveillance on a door that many people walk by, start by setting a mask on the top section of the door. Figure 7-10 Motion Detection Mask First, try setting a mask at the top of the door, before using the Invert Mask command. After inverting the mask, the movement of personnel in front of the door is ignored and only door movements are detected. 2. After setting the mask, right-click the mouse on the image. A menu appears (see Figure 7-11). 3. Select the Invert Mask command; the detection is now focused on an area that moves only when the door opens. 4. Enable Log or Alarm. The log can be used to obtain video from the time(s) when the door is opened, saving a unit operator from having to search through video. Red Mask and Green Mask In motion detection, when the mask is red, movement behind a mask is ignored. The masking behaves opposite to that of motion search. In motion search, the parts that are masked in green act as motion triggers rather than as a mask. Masking Part of a Video Feed from Motion Detection 1. Check that Record/Motion/Image is selected (as in Figure 7-9). 2. Click 3. You have the option of clicking tab is overlaid with a grid. 4. Click areas of the video that you need to mask. To mask more than one cell at a time, press and hold Ctrl while you select cells. This will mask 3×3 cells at once. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 , the Edit motion mask command. to Show gridlines. The video image on the Video 135 Enhancing Video False Positives A false positive (also known as a false alarm) is a common situation that triggers motion detection without posing a security risk. Sources of false positives can include: the sun’s glare reflected on windows and cars, shadows, turning vehicle or building lights on and off, and direct sunlight as the day progresses. More than one technique can be used to reduce false positives: • • • • • Masking. You can mask areas of a feed where movement is not a concern. Scheduling. Alarms can be scheduled not to go off at certain times of the day. See Alarms and Scheduling on page 127. Camera placement. Software settings and scheduling can compensate for many false positives, but not for all. For example, direct sunlight may require moving a camera or shielding it from the sunlight. Camera position. A camera inside a building is an effective way to use motion detection, since lighting can often be controlled. However, a window or vista, which shows a roadway or pedestrians, can trigger unwanted motion detection. Motion search. There are cases when performing a timely search for motion is more effective than constantly testing for motion. See Motion Search on page 138. Video Settings and Motion Detection When an alarm based on motion detection is enabled, changing the picture settings (brightness and so on) can trigger that alarm. You can limit the triggering of alarms by using the Delay slider in the motion detection controls. See General Camera Settings on page 82 and Events Defined on page 215 for more information. Customizing Detection Scheduling Scheduling alarms. Motion is detected at all times. There may be times when movement may not be of any interest, such as during business hours. These times can be scheduled to not trigger any alarms. See Alarms and Scheduling on page 127. PTZ cameras. On a PTZ camera, panning, tilting or zooming can trigger motion events. You have the option of scheduling alarms for times when a PTZ camera is not moving. Motion Detection Reference Table 7-2 Command 136 Motion Detection Commands Description Edit motion mask Click Edit motion mask to enable the Show gridlines button. Show gridlines Click Show gridlines to toggle the grid that overlays the video image on the Video tab. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Table 7-2 Motion Detection Commands (cont’d) Command Description Motion preview Click Motion preview to see motion as it is detected by the unit. Colored pixels are produced as objects move: • Red or green pixels indicate the detected motion is high enough to trigger an alarm or log entry, if enabled. Adjust the sensitivity until motion that needs to be reported shows up as green or red. • Blue pixels indicate that motion is detected, but not reported. Hold Hold is the amount of time (in seconds) that motion events are ignored for after a motion event has triggered a report. The value is displayed when the slider is clicked. The Hold value ranges from 1 (short) to 60 (long). The default is 15 seconds. Log You can set motion in a video image to trigger a log entry by adding a checkmark to the Log box on the Video tab. Alarm You can set motion in a video image to trigger alarms by adding a checkmark to the Alarm box on the Video tab. Motion is an outside world event. For other events, see Table 10-5 on page 218. Extra Motion Detection Commands The motion detection menu offers extra commands to go with the above commands. To view it, place the mouse pointer on the tab’s video and right-click the mouse. Figure 7-11 Motion Detection Menu Invert Mask: unmasks masked areas and masks unmasked areas. Clear Mask: removes all masking from the picture area. Fill Mask: adds masking to the entire picture area. This is useful as a first step when most of the image area needs masking. Undo: cancels the last click that you made. Undo All: returns the mask to its initial state, before edits were performed. Smart Video Motion Detection (VMD) Smart VMD is an intelligent motion detection module that uses video analytics technology to provide more reliable detection of moving objects, while significantly reducing false alarms (due to elements such as: changes in lighting, video noise, rain, and so on) that can cause problems with pixel-based video motion detection. Smart VMD is also designed to have much lower processing power than full video analytics, and therefore does not require extra servers or hardware. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 137 Enhancing Video Note Smart VMD is currently only supported for analog cameras. See Motion Detection with Supported Honeywell IP Cameras on page 301 for more information on using motion detection with Honeywell IP cameras. See Motion Detection with Supported ONVIF IP Cameras on page 306 for more information on using motion detection with supported ONVIF IP cameras. To enable Smart VMD for an analog camera video channel, click the Video tab and display the Record/Motion/Image screen, then select the Smart VMD checkbox (see Figure 7-9). Smart VMD is a full replacement for the regular motion detection module. Smart VMD will use the same motion masks that regular motion detection uses (see Customizing Motion Detection with Masking on page 135 for more information on masking parts of a video feed to either detect or ignore motion). The rest of the motion detection features and options will work the same way with Smart VMD as they do with regular motion detection: • • • • • Detected motion will be logged or send alarms if those options are selected. The Hold time determines the amount of time (in seconds) that motion events are ignored for after a motion event has triggered a report. The Sensitivity slider controls the minimum size of objects that will trigger an alarm. Use the masking controls (see Masking an Area of the Video Feed on page 135) to setup areas of a video feed to either detect or ignore motion. A motion search will function the same way with a Smart VMD and regular VMD channel (see Motion Search on page 138 for more information). Motion Search Use a Motion search to search video for motion, independently of settings made for Motion detection. A motion search is performed using the View application. See the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide, for procedures and tips. Note Motion searching is not available with IP camera video. Searching for motion on an IP camera video stream will return no results. See Motion Detection with Supported Honeywell IP Cameras, page 301, for more information on using motion detection with Honeywell IP cameras that support the motion detection feature. See Motion Detection with Supported ONVIF IP Cameras on page 306 for more information on setting up motion detection with supported ONVIF IP cameras. Comparing Motion Detection and Motion Search Table 7-3 shows how a Motion search is different from Motion detection. 138 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Table 7-3 Contrasting Motion Detection and Motion Search Operator (Task) Motion (Tool) Comments Detection. Log motion or warn of motion during Live Sessions, in real-time. session, Video tab, Motion panel • • • Search. Search recorded video for motion. session • • • This method constantly checks for motion Motion events can be logged or can trigger alarms as they occur Video feed can be masked where motion is not a concern. This method searches for motion after the fact Events are all listed for retrieval of video The operator can select areas of video where they want to search for motion. Tamper Detection Note Tamper detection does not work the same way on Honeywell and supported ONVIF IP cameras. See Tamper Detection with Honeywell IP Cameras on page 300 for detailed procedures on setting up tamper detection with IP cameras. See Tamper Detection with Supported ONVIF IP Cameras on page 306 for more information on using tamper detection with supported ONVIF IP cameras. Use of tamper detection is optional. When it is in use, operators obtain an alarm or a log entry when a camera is blinded, blurred or if there is a scene change. The settings for tamper detection are made seperately on each camera. Video is not affected by tamper detection settings. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 139 Enhancing Video Figure 7-12 Tamper Detection Panel on the Video Tab Select Tamper Detection Configuring Tamper Detection TIP! 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 2. Click the Video tab. By default, Record/Motion/Image is selected. 3. Select Tamper Detection. A panel is displayed for configuring tamper detection (see Figure 7-12). 4. You have the option of enabling the automatic detection of three types of sabotage: Blind, Blur or Scene Changed, singly or in combination. 5. Lower or raise the threshold of detection for each type of sabotage, by dragging each Detection Threshold cursor, as needed (see Figure 7-13). The default value is at the midpoint (50), on a scale of 1 to 100. 6. Select Alarm or Log, as needed. See Setting an Event to Trigger an Alarm or To Be Logged on page 216. Each type of sabotage detection that is enabled will use the selection. If neither Alarm nor Log is selected, tamper detection will not be reported. The Blind type of tamper detection can be used for fixed and PTZ cameras. Caution 140 Blur and Scene Changed are tamper detection types designed for fixed cameras only, not for PTZ use. Using pan, tilt or zoom commands will trigger Blur and Scene Change tamper detection. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Calibrating of Tamper Detection Figure 7-13 Calibration of Blind Tamper Detection Meter shows the tamper detection activity Slider Threshold Detection Meter Above each slider for setting the detection threshold of Blind, Blur and Scene Changed, a meter shows the tamper detection activity. The meter is green when activity is below the threshold, and red when the activity is above the threshold. If there is no activity, the meter is empty (see Figure 7-13). Blind. A camera can be blinded by too much or too little light. To calibrate, cover the camera with an opaque cloth or box, or prop a strong light in front of the camera. Blinding a camera also triggers the Blur and Scene Change types of tamper detection. Note that turning lights on/off at the scene can indirectly blind a camera. Panning a PTZ camera from a light colored scene to a darker scene (or from the dark to a light scene) can also have that effect. Lowering the threshold can compensate if blinding is detected too often. Blur. It is not recommended to alter a camera’s focus after installation. To simulate a focus-blurring incident, use a lens-like sheet of glass or plastic, or a transparent container of water and prop it in front of the camera during calibration. Scene Changed. Activity in a scene that could be considered as sabotage drives the meter from green to red. If such activity lasts less than 48 seconds, it does not trigger an alarm or log entry. This is designed to calibrate tamper detection and to reduce the number of false positives. For example, a person walking by a camera and causes a momentary scene change is not considered sabotage unless that person remains in the scene for more than 48 seconds. For more information see Scene Changed Tamper Detection on page 141. To search the event log, use an Event search session. See Using an Event Session to Search the Event Log on page 220. Scene Changed Tamper Detection Good Image A Good Image is reported (see Figure 7-12, to the left of the Reset button) when a scene has enough features for the unit to detect if someone or something has moved the camera, and sabotage can be inferred. A Bad Image is reported when the image is indistinct, for example, if the camera is pointed at a wall of uniform color. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 141 Enhancing Video From Learning to Running When Scene Changed is selected, or its threshold changed, the Rapid Eye unit learns about the scene displayed by the camera. Learning is reported, to the left of Scene Changed, for 2 to 3 minutes, depending on the complexity of the scene. Do not blind or blur a camera while Learning is displayed. When the learning ends, Running is displayed to the left of Scene Changed. Reset is enabled when Scene Changed is enabled. Clicking Reset starts the Learning process again, and should be used whenever the camera is moved intentionally to view a different scene, or if the scene lighting or content changes dramatically. Reset has no effect on Blind and Blur tamper detection. Rows of Mobile Objects Scene Changed is sensitive to large scale changes in a scene. For example, using Scene Changed for a camera that shows many chairs in rows—such as in an airport or casino— may not be effective. Clicking Reset while people are sitting makes the unit learn that sitting persons are not to be considered as sabotage. When the chairs empty, the scene may have changed enough for the unit to trigger a log entry or alarm. And if the operator makes the unit learn when the chairs are empty, tamper detection may be triggered when people sit in the chairs. The same can be said for a row of vehicles that are frequently moved, such as a taxi stand or truck depot. Alarms After rearming an alarm produced by the Scene Changed type sabotage detection, move the camera back to the scene that you need to monitor, and click Reset. Calculating the Length of the Video Archive Note The Rapid Eye Storage Estimator (installed with your Rapid Eye software) will not properly calculate the storage needed for IP cameras. When calculating storage for systems that include IP cameras, be aware that the storage estimates for the IP cameras will not be accurate. All of the tables in the following sections calculate storage with analog cameras only. These tables (including Table 7-4, Table 7-5, Table 7-6, Table 7-7, Table 7-8, and Table 7-9) are not accurate for Honeywell IP camera or supported ONVIF IP camera storage calculation. Storing Video, Audio, Data Recordings of video, audio and data are not permanent. When a unit’s storage fills, the oldest recorded video, audio and data are replaced with more recent recordings. The amount of time that recordings are available is known as the length of video storage. 142 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide What to Watch Out For Adding cameras and using high recording rates (such as high resolution and quality settings for continuous recording) contribute to shorten the storage on a unit. Combining high settings and many cameras, can shorten a unit’s storage capacity from many weeks to a few days (see Table 7-9). If a Rapid Eye unit’s video storage capacity is too short for your needs, try lowering the resolution and frame rates for continuous recording (see Recording Video with Continuous Recording Settings on page 85 for more information). Scheduling Cameras can also increase the amount of available video storage capacity. Estimates To make storage length estimates, use Honeywell’s Rapid Eye Storage Estimator that is installed with the Rapid Eye software. To compare and understand the effect of different factors on storage, see the tables for Number of Cameras, Audio, Scheduling Cameras, Frame Rate for Continuous Recording, Quality, and Resolution, in the following sections. Estimate from a Unit’s Statistics If a Rapid Eye System Administrator only needs to know roughly how far back in time video can be obtained, that data is available when running a Maintenance Session: • Recording tab. Estimated Storage Capacity is displayed in days, see Estimating Storage Capacity on page 90. Daily Usage Rate. Is averaged over the last 7 days of activity. See Rapid Eye Unit Storage Statistics on page 149. • Rapid Eye Storage Estimator Note The Rapid Eye Storage Estimator will not properly calculate the storage needed for IP cameras. When calculating storage for systems that include IP cameras, be aware that the storage estimates for the IP cameras will not be accurate. The Storage Estimator is installed along with Rapid Eye Admin and View software. To launch the Estimator: 1. Select the Start menu  All Programs  Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT. 2. Click Storage Estimator. 3. Click OK on the About Storage Estimator window that appears. 4. Change the recording options in the Estimator, as needed, and click Apply Options to obtain an estimate of your system’s storage capacity (see Figure 7-14). Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 143 Enhancing Video Length that Recorded Video Can Be Stored Based on Video Settings An operator may need to determine how far back in time that video, audio and data can be obtained from video storage. Video storage capacity is determined by adjusting various video settings (see Customizing Settings for Recorded Video on page 86). Honeywell provides a Storage Estimator with the Rapid Eye Admin and View software to show the approximate length of a unit’s video storage, based on that unit’s video settings. Caution High settings in combination with many cameras can shorten a unit’s video storage from many weeks to a few days (see Table 7-9). If the storage capacity is too small for your needs, lower the resolution and frame rate of continuous recording. Storage Process: Video, Audio, Data Recordings of video, audio and data are not permanent. When a unit’s storage fills, the oldest recorded video, audio and data are replaced with more recent recordings. The amount of time that recordings are available is known as the length of the video storage. More cameras, high recording rates, high resolution and quality settings, all contribute to shorten the video storage capacity on a unit. Scheduling can also lengthen video storage. Figure 7-14 Storage Estimator Select the type of Rapid Eye unit and software version you are using to estimate storage with. TIP! 144 Use the Rapid Eye Storage Estimator to forecast the length of a unit’s video storage. Combinations of extremely high values should only be assigned to Event Recording. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Number of Cameras and Audio Doubling the number of cameras roughly halves the length of a video archive. Effect of the Number of Cameras on the Video Archivea Table 7-4 Cameras (Recording) Duration of Video Archive (Estimated in Days) Oldest Available Video (Rounded to Shortest Time) 1 1153 3 years, 1 month 4 288 9 months 8 144 4 months 12 95 3 months 16 72 2 months 16 + audio 57 1 month a Resolution = 320 x 240. Frame Rate = 1. Quality = 8. Storage = 500 GB. Audio At default recording values, adding audio has roughly the same effect as adding 4 cameras. If enabled, use Table 7-4 and find the number of cameras connected to your unit. Then go to the next line to find out what the estimated duration is for those cameras with audio enabled. At higher recording values, audio takes a smaller percentage of the archive. Scheduling Cameras Scheduling can lengthen a video archive. One example of effective scheduling is for the recording of transactions that do not occur 24/7, as shown in Table 7-5. See Scheduling Configuration on page 123. Table 7-5 Effect of Camera Scheduling on the Video Archive Recording Recording (Hours / Days) Suspended (%) Video Archive (in Days) Oldest Available Video (To Closest Date) 24/7a 0.0 1153 3 years, 1 month 12/5 + 24/2 35.7 1793 4 years, 11 months 12/7c 50.0 2306 6 years, 3 months 8/5d 76.2 4842 13 years, 3 months b a Default value: every day, all hours, for one camera. Resolution = 320 x 240. Frame rate = 1. Quality = 8. Storage = 500 GB. b Nights and weekends. c Nights only; all week long. d Business hours, five days a week. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 145 Enhancing Video Frame Rate for Continuous Recording Table 7-6 shows how higher frame rates can reduce the length of a video archive. For more cameras, divide the time of the archive by the number of cameras. Table 7-6 Effect of Frame Rates on the Video Archive Frame Rate Video Archive (Images Per Second) (Estimated in Days) Oldest Available Videoa (Rounded to Shortest Time) 1 (default value) 1153 3 years 1 month 2 576 1 year, 6 months 6 192 6 months 15 77 2 months 30 38 1 month a For one camera. Resolution = 320 x 240. Quality = 8. Storage = 500 GB. Quality Video Compression (Quality) A higher Quality setting means less video compression is used for recording, shortening the length of the video archive (see Table 7-7). For example, setting Quality to 10 uses up almost twice as much storage as a setting of 6. At sites where storage is at a premium, you can lower the recording quality to six compression units. Table 7-7 shows that this quality setting can give you about 25% more storage while leaving the other settings unchanged. Pan, Tilt, and Zoom Recording a video feed from a camera that is constantly panning requires much more storage space. If the duration of your video archive is a concern, Honeywell recommends that you reconsider if constant panning is necessary to your security needs (see Behavior of PTZ After a Session Closes on page 110). Table 7-7 Duration of Video Archive (Estimated in Days) Oldest Available Videoa (Rounded to Shortest Time) Weeks 6 1441 3 years, 11 months 200 8 (default value) 1153 3 years, 1 month 160 10 823 2 years, 3 months 110 a 146 Effect of Quality Settings on the Video Archive Recording Quality (Compression Unit) For one camera. Resolution = 320 x 240. Frame Rate = 1. Storage = 500 GB. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Resolution Recording video at higher resolutions than the default value uses up more storage on a Rapid Eye unit. Your organization can decide if it prefers high resolution video images that are stored for a shorter length of time, or low resolution images that can be stored longer. Table 7-8 Recording Resolution: Effect on Video Archive Video Standard Resolution (Pixels) Video Archive (Estimated in Days) Oldest Available Videoa (Rounded to Shortest Time) NTSC 160 x 120 4803 13 years, 1 month 1153 3 years, 1 month b NTSC 320 x 240 NTSC 640 x 240 670 1 year, 7 months NTSC 640 x 480 320 10 months NTSC 704 x 480 274 9 months PALc 192 x 144 3336 9 years, 1 month PALc 384 x 288 801 2 years, 2 months PALc 704 x 288 508 1 year, 4 months PALc 704 x 576 254 8 months a For one camera. Frame Rate = 1. Quality = 8. Storage = 500 GB. Default Honeywell settings. c PAL images are larger than NTSC and require more storage. This accounts for a shorter archive. b Note See Rapid Eye Storage Estimator on page 143 for more information on the Honeywell estimating tool. Using Higher Values When Recording Video For Continuous Recording, heightening Resolution, Quality and Frame Rate in combination, compounds the effect on storage. Examples are shown for one camera and for nine cameras, on a unit that has 500 GB of storage. Table 7-9 Resolution Comparing the Available Storage for One Camera to Nine Frame Quality Rate 1 Camera (Archive) 9 Cameras (Archive) Storage (Cam-Days) Lowest 160 x 120 1 6 Result: 15 years, 7 mo. 1 year, 8 mo. 5700 Default Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 147 Enhancing Video Table 7-9 Comparing the Available Storage for One Camera to Nine (cont’d) Resolution Frame Quality Rate 320 x 240 1 1 Camera (Archive) 9 Cameras (Archive) Storage (Cam-Days) 8 Result: 2 years, 11 mo. 0 years, 4 mo. 1100 High, plus Quality 704 x 480 (max) 1 10 (max) Result: 6 months 21 days 190 Result: 19 days 2 days 19 Result: 6 days 0 days 6 High, plus Frames 704 x 480 10 10 a 30 a A frame rate of 30 ips can be used on 1 to 4 cameras. A maximum of 10 ips can be used for 9 cameras. Caution Honeywell recommends that you use high video recording values only for event recording. Obtaining Unit Statistics 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Please wait until a System Operational message appears in the Feedback field. 2. Click the Statistics tab. There may be a delay, depending on the type of connection to the site, until the Feedback box displays Statistics received. 3. To update the statistics, click Refresh. Table 7-10 Label Storage Statistics for a Rapid Eye Unit Meaning Unit Storage Capacity Total disk space on unit. Gigabyte (GB) Daily Usage Rate The portion of storage used in the last twenty-four hours. For new units, or after clearing storage, the report of Daily Usage Rate can be accurate within minutes. In regular use, it is averaged over the latest 7 days of activity. Percentage of storage capacity 148 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Table 7-10 Storage Statistics for a Rapid Eye Unit (cont’d) Label Meaning Estimated Capacity The amount of storage, based upon past performance. The Day number may differ from the estimate obtained using the Rapid Eye Storage Estimator, due to fluctuations in the video signal. The estimated capacity diminishes if the Continuous recording settings (resolution, quality, ips) are set to higher values and as more cameras are added. Time Elapseda The time that has passed since the latest change to configuration or latest reboot of the Rapid Eye unit. Can also be used to estimate the oldest available imagea. Day, hour, minute, second Percent Full The portion of storage in use. At 100%, recycling occurs. Percentage of storage capacity Stream Device connected to a Rapid Eye unit (a camera, microphone, and so on). Text Start Time Time of earliest data. UTC (Universal coordinated time) End Time Time of latest data. Percentage of data Stream ID N/A; for Rapid Eye technical support. Integer a Unit Most helpful on a unit that records continuously. If a unit is off or stops recording for awhile, introducing gaps in the video archive, time elapsed still reports only the oldest available video. Rapid Eye Unit Storage Statistics Figure 7-15 Statistics Tab Showing Storage Statistics Other Statistics About the Video Archive The Recording tab shows an Estimated Storage Capacity in days. See Estimating Storage Capacity on page 90. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 149 Enhancing Video 150 8 Configuring Other Hardware Working with Storage Clearing Storage Clearing the storage of a Rapid Eye unit or of one of its streams is a drastic measure that is irreversible and time consuming. Recorded video, sound and data will be permanently erased. Clearing streams or storage should be handled with care. Clearing the storage may be needed in the rare cases where a unit is: • • Disposed of Moved or transferred to another organization. Figure 8-1 Clear Storage Button on Statistics Tab Be careful when clicking Clear Storage or Clear Stream. Data will be irretrievably lost. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 151 Configuring Other Hardware Caution The only safeguard to prevent unnecessary use of Clear Storage is setting a password to the Administrator account. When you click Clear Storage or Clear Stream, video and data are irretrievably lost. Clearing Unit Storage 1. Using View, run a Maintenance Session. On the Statistics tab, click Clear Storage (see Figure 8-1). 2. A password dialog box appears. If: • • 3. There is a password for the Administrator account, enter that password. There isn’t a password for the account, do nothing and go to the next step. Click Yes. All video, audio, alarms and other stored data is erased. The time needed to clear storage is about fifteen seconds for each gigabyte of storage. Caution Clearing storage cannot be stopped or reversed, even by turning the unit off. Turning the unit off will only suspend the process. Storage continues to clear the next time the unit is powered. This is an irreversible process. Clearing a Stream A stream is the information from one camera or data device. You may need to clear one or more streams, if there is ever: • • A move or transfer of a camera or unit to another location. Some testing of a new camera, or training operators to use PTZs, and so on. Changing the Name of a Stream Different names can be assigned to cameras on the Video tab (see General Camera Settings on page 82). The name of a device set up by the customer is assigned on the Serial Devices tab (see Customer Data and Customer Device Events on page 167). Preventing Users from Clearing Storage Add or Change the Password to the Administrator Account The Administrator password acts as a safeguard to prevent the error of accidentally clearing storage. To set this password, see Administrator Password on page 205. Right to View the Statistics Tab Your System Administrator can remove the right to use and view the Statistics tab from a View operator account (see Right to Use Maintenance on page 208). 152 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Caution System Administrators who do not add a password to the Administrator account also remove a safeguard to prevent inadvertently clearing the storage. Tracing the Clearing of Storage Trace the moment storage clearing happens by making this event an alarm. See Tracing Events on page 219, and Events Defined on page 215. Prevent future storage clearings by changing the Administrator account password (see Preventing Users from Clearing Storage on page 152). Caution Clearing of a unit’s entire storage or of one of its streams can have a major impact on that site’s security. All recorded video is lost. During the time that a unit is clearing storage, a Rapid Eye unit cannot record video, send alarms, and so on. Your System Administrator should warn View operators that use of the Clear Storage and Clear Stream buttons is not advisable without first communicating the reasoning to your organization’s security personnel. Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit Figure 8-2 Securing a Unit after Changing Passwords Click Update security to update the security information on a unit. 1. Use View to start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye unit (see Starting a Maintenance Session on page 65). 2. Click Update security on the Security tab of a Maintenance Session (see Figure 8-2). Information from the database is copied to the Rapid Eye unit. Please wait until the Updated security message appears. 3. You have the option of updating security on other units, and/or ending the Maintenance Session (as explained in Ending Maintenance on page 76). Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 153 Configuring Other Hardware Purpose A unit’s security settings need to be updated if a System Administrator adds, changes or removes: • • • • Alarm stations. See Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports, page 228, and Making an Alarm Station Operational on page 243. The system password. See System Password, page 194, and Security Priorities on page 190. Authorized remote operators of a site. See Denying Access to a User of Your Rapid Eye System on page 224. Authorized onsite operators. See Central User Management on page 180. Removing a Site After Updating Security After updating the security of a Rapid Eye unit, care should be taken to make a record of the system password. The system password is needed if you need to make a new site definition for the Rapid Eye unit (see Deleting a Site on page 39). System Files Your Rapid Eye System Administrator or your organization’s security officer may find it useful to download a copy of a unit’s System Log or other system file, as needed. Downloads of files from a Rapid Eye unit are safer than uploading files. Uploads should be performed by trained personnel. Figure 8-3 File Transfers to or from a Unit Uploading and promoting. Sending a file to a Rapid Eye unit. Downloading. Receiving a file from a Rapid Eye unit. TIP! 154 Check if the System Operational message appears in the Feedback box before performing the procedure Downloading a File from a Rapid Eye Unit, page 155. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide System Files and Associated Rapid Eye Settings Table 8-1 lists the different system files that can be downloaded and the configuration settings on the Rapid Eye unit that each file is associated with. Table 8-1 Rapid Eye Downloadable System Files and Settings System File Settings Associated with the System File System.xml System Settings Cameras Audio Eagle Audio Modem Serial Devices Switchers Rules.xml Rules Events based recording Scheduling Security.xml Site Name Access Privileges Denied Users Alarm Stations User.xml User Name and credential Sensors.xml Sensor Name (GPIO) LocalView.xml Unit User Preferences Downloading a File from a Rapid Eye Unit 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 2. Click the System Files tab (see Figure 8-4). 3. Select a system file in the System Files list. For example, select system.log (see Logging System Messages, page 157). Only one file can be selected at a time. 4. Click Download. A Receive file from Remote Site dialog box appears. 5. Specify the location where you want to download the file to. You also have the option of renaming the file. 6. Click Save. A copy of the file is sent from the Rapid Eye unit to the location specified in step 5. 7. Use a text editor or word processor to view the contents of the file. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 155 Configuring Other Hardware Figure 8-4 Downloading the System.log File from a Rapid Eye Unit To receive a system file from a Rapid Eye unit. Uploading a File to a Rapid Eye Unit An upgrade to a Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT unit, or its reconfiguration, means uploading new system files to the unit. Caution Only trained View operators should perform uploads on a Rapid Eye unit. 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 2. Before proceeding, check if the System Operational message appears in the Feedback box. 3. Click the System Files tab. 4. Click Upload. The Send file to remote site dialog box appears. 5. Specify the name of the file that you are planning to upload, and its location (on the PC or network). Caution 6. Click Open. A copy of the file is sent to the Rapid Eye unit; its name appears in the Temporary files pane. Uploading on slow connections can take a few minutes. 7. Either: • • 8. Click Promote, OR Abandon the upload by clicking Clear, then skip the next step. You have the following options: • • 156 Double-check that you are uploading the correct file. The file name should not be more than eight characters long. Uploading the wrong file can halt a Rapid Eye unit, causing that site to become inoperable. Upload more files. Repeat step 3 to step 6, as needed. Empty the Temporary Files list. Click Clear. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide System Tab in a Maintenance Session Each part of the System tab is discussed in turn. Default System data is listed in Table 8-3. Rapid Eye Unit Registration During the first Rapid Eye unit’s Maintenance Session, the Serial Number (the site name in the site definition) and Software version are obtained from the Rapid Eye unit and displayed in the upper-left corner of the System tab, under Site Info. The version of a Rapid Eye unit’s software may differ from the version number of the Admin and View applications. See Making a Site Operational on page 67. Figure 8-5 System Tab and Configuration Options See Camera Signal Format on page 159 for more information. See Making the Fault Relay Operational on page 158 for more information. See Changing the Maximum Network Data Rate on page 160 for more information. See Enabling or Disabling Local Monitoring on page 159 for more information. See Changing Network Settings on a Unit on page 160 for more information. See Setting a Bandwidth Throughput Option on page 159 for more information. Logging System Messages The system message log is useful mostly to Rapid Eye technical support personnel. Placing a checkmark in the Log System Messages box sets the unit to log all commands received in a system.log file, stored on the unit. The system.log file stores the 10,000 most recent entries. It will not get larger over time, the older entries are overwritten by new ones. How to obtain a copy of the system.log file is explained in System Files on page 154. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 157 Configuring Other Hardware Other Rapid Eye Logs Take care not to confuse System.log messages of commands with the logs of alarms or events. For the alarm log, see Alarm Log on page 271; for the events log, see Events Defined on page 215. System Monitor Enable status pulse. Enables the Fault Relay to trigger. Power outages and other causes can lead to a unit’s failure to record video or failure to function. Failure to do either, for more than 19 minutes, triggers the Fault Relay located on the unit’s back-panel. See the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide or Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. Monitor alarm reporting. Enables delays greater than 19 minutes in the reporting of alarms to trigger the Fault Relay. The monitoring is designed to report alarms that have not reached their designated alarm station, because that alarm station is unavailable. Making the Fault Relay Operational 1. On the System tab, add a checkmark to Enable Status Pulse and/or Monitor Alarm Reporting checkboxes (see Figure 8-5). 2. On the Events tab, click the Outputs subtab. 3. Output 6 can no longer be configured for logging or alarms. You have the option of entering a new name in the box for Output 6. Figure 8-6 158 Enabling the Fault Relay Changes the Output 6 Options Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Camera Signal Format NTSC or PAL. Signal Format is a global setting for all cameras (see Figure 8-5). Enabling or Disabling Local Monitoring The LocalView user interface uses Rapid Eye resources even if it is not being used in your system. For example, if all the Rapid Eye users only connect with Remote View and Admin applications, LocalView will be using Rapid Eye resources with no added benefit. If users in your Rapid Eye system do not use LocalView, you can disable it in the Local Monitoring section of the System tab during a Maintenance session (see Figure 8-5). Enable is the default setting. Select the Disable option to disable LocalView. This should improve the performance of your Rapid Eye DVR as resources are not wasted on an unused feature. Once disabled, LocalView can only be used to configure network settings. Setting a Bandwidth Throughput Option The available bandwidth of the network your Rapid Eye unit(s) are connected to will affect the Rapid Eye performance and the quality of the live video displayed by the Remote View application. The bandwidth Throughput option is only available on Rapid Eye units running V9 or newer software. You have the option of specifying your network’s bandwidth capability in the Throughput section from the System tab of a Maintenance session (see Figure 8-5). Low is the default setting. Select High if your network uses LAN-type network speeds. Keep this setting at Low if your network uses a slower network (such as dial-up). LAN/WAN Communications Communications settings for local- or wide-area networks (LAN/WAN) are set in the Network Settings fields when the Rapid Eye unit is installed. The System tab offers a convenient report of these network settings, which are seldom changed. Caution Communications to a unit can be temporarily disabled by entering invalid network data. An onsite technician has to re-enable it. Your organization’s network administrator may request changes to a unit’s communication settings when: • • A change is made to the network that harbors the unit. Moving a unit to another network or owner. See Clearing Storage on page 151 and Removing a System Password on page 197. When moving a unit to another network or network address, you have the option of changing the Rapid Eye unit’s addresses in the boxes for: IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway, before the unit is turned off. This avoids having to use the configuration shell to make changes after the move. These changes can also be made using LocalView. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 159 Configuring Other Hardware Changing Network Settings on a Unit 1. See your network administrator about any planned changes to the Network Settings. 2. Using View, continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 3. On the System tab, enter changes in the IP Address, Subnet Mask or Gateway fields, as needed for the Rapid Eye unit, and approved by your network administrator. Default addresses are listed in Table 8-2. You cannot make these changes if the unit is set to Use DHCP. Caution 4. The next step can make the unit unavailable until the new network connection is operational. If a mistake is made and there is a dial-up connection to the unit, you can still access the unit by modem. Click Apply, then confirm that you want to send the configuration data. The Maintenance Session ends by itself. TIP! Changing the Internet protocol address, in the IP Address box requires Admin to change the site’s connection information. See Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit on page 43. Table 8-2 Default Network Communications Settings Box Valuea IP Address of Rapid Eye Unit 172.25.2.1 Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 Gateway 172.25.100.4 a These values are usually changed when installing units connected to a network. For more information about networked units, see the Network Connections section in the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide or Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. Changing the Maximum Network Data Rate The operator enters the Maximum Network data rate, to Send no more than n kilobits per second, where n is a number between 10 and 200 000. Note that some numbers are not ideal to lower the data rate optimally and are automatically adjusted by the software to the closest, better value. For example, if an operator enters 33, the software will display the closest optimal value (32), at the next Maintenance Session. 160 1. Using View, continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 2. On the System tab, enable the Regulate Data Rate checkbox and enter a number in the field. The default setting is 32. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide TCP Ports The transmission control protocol (TCP) ports are listed in the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide and Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. These TCP ports should be left open in a firewall for sockets used in Rapid Eye operations. For example, Rapid Eye sessions (live, retrieval and alarm) are sent to port 10,000. Default System Values for a Rapid Eye Unit Table 8-3 System Tab Default Values Box Group Name of Box/Button Default Site Info Serial Number N/Aa; stored on unit Software N/Aa; stored on unit Upgrade button None Use DHCP Enabled Network Settings Site Name. See the sticker N/Aa; stored on unit, for DHCP use. on the unit. Format: REM serial number IP Addressb 172.25.2.1 Subnet Maskb 255.255.0.0 Gatewayb 172.25.100.4 MAC Address N/Aa; stored on unit, for DHCP use Throughput High/Low Low Signal Format NTSC / PAL NTSC System Monitor Enable Status Pulse Off; see System Monitor, page 158 Monitor Alarm Reporting Off Regulate Data Rate Off Send no more than […] kilobits per secondc 32 Enable/Disable Enable Max Network Data Local Monitoring a Factory settings to identify the unit software and hardware. Unavailable when DHCP is enabled. On networks that are not DHCP-enabled, the DHCP default times out and is set to off. c Unavailable while Regulate Data Rate is not selected. b Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 161 Configuring Other Hardware Setting Up a Modem Serial Device A dial-up connection is optional. Internal modems in Rapid Eye units can remain unused. Note Internal modems for Rapid Eye Hybrid LT units are only included with NTSC models. PAL units will need an external modem for use with a dial-up connection (see Setting an External Modem on page 164). Both NTSC and PAL Rapid Eye Hybrid HD models include internal modems. Modem Settings Modems are set up using the Serial Devices tab. The Serial Devices tab shows an Internal Port that either lists a modem or nothing at all. If the Internal Port holds a modem, the modem cannot be deleted. The internal port cannot receive devices from the New devices or the Unassigned devices groups. Caution Changing modem values in the next step can make the unit unavailable for dial-up connection. If you are unsure, see your System Administrator. Viewing and Changing Modem Settings 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Please wait until a System Operational message appears. 2. Click the Serial Devices tab. Note 162 Internal modems for Rapid Eye Hybrid LT units are only included with NTSC models. PAL units will need an external modem for use with a dial-up connection (see Setting an External Modem on page 164). Both NTSC and PAL Rapid Eye Hybrid HD models include internal modems. 3. Click the Internal Port - Modem icon. Boxes appear in the right half of the Serial Devices tab (Baud Rate, Wait for Connection, and so on). The box names and their default values are listed in Table 8-4. 4. You have the option of changing the values, as needed. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 8-7 Serial Devices Tab Showing Internal Port-Modem Data Table 8-4 Default Modem and Dial-Up Communications Settings Port icons Modem icon For an external modem, drag the modem icon to the port icon. Device Box Value Modem hardware Baud 115 200 Wait for Connection 60 Prefix AT Initialization Z Dialing D Client IP 172.26.200.1 Host IP 172.26.2.1 PPP temporary network PPP IP Settings Reserved for Modem Connection During a dial-up connection, temporary network communications are established between the Rapid Eye site and the PC. A Host IP address for the Rapid Eye unit is auto-detected by the Microsoft Dial-Up Networking application. Different terms are used to describe these communication points. To avoid confusion, these terms are listed in Table 8-5. Table 8-5 Names of Temporary TCP/IP Addresses, for PPP Addressa Internal Port Description Installation Shell 172.26.200.1 PPP: client IP At operator PC host 172.26.2.1 PPP: host IP At Rapid Eye unit local a Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 This is not the Rapid Eye unit network addressed as discussed in System Tab in a Maintenance Session on page 157. 163 Configuring Other Hardware The default, point-to-point protocol (PPP) IP settings can be changed, in the unlikely event that they conflict with another network device (printer, scanner, and so on). Setting an External Modem 1. Consult the installer to find out which port on the unit is connected to the external modem. 2. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Click the Serial Devices tab. 3. Click the Internal Port - Modem icon. Boxes appear in the right half of the Serial Devices tab (Baud Rate, Wait for Connection, and so on). 4. Change the values to those suggested by the external modem’s documentation. 5. Drag the modem icon to the port icon with the number of the port identified in step 1. PTZ Serial Device A PTZ serial device is only used to control cameras that pan, tilt and zoom (PTZ). A System Administrator obtains the Rapid Eye unit’s port number that is used for PTZ functions from the installers of a Rapid Eye system or by taking note of the back panel of the unit. Note ACUIX IP PTZ cameras do not require a serial device connection to the back panel of your unit. ACUIX IP PTZ control is communicated through the network connection. PTZ Device Settings A PTZ device is set using a Maintenance Session, on the Serial Devices tab. It enables the PTZ settings on the Video tab. See Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup on page 101. Assigning and Setting a PTZ Device 164 1. Consult the installer to find out which serial port of the unit the PTZ cameras are connected to. If more than one PTZ camera shares the same serial communications line, make a note of the address set on each camera. 2. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site (see Starting a Maintenance Session on page 65). Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide 3. Click the Serial Devices tab. A PTZ device is either: • • • Assigned to a Port. Click PTZ. The settings are displayed and can be changed. In the Unassigned Devices group. Click PTZ. The settings are displayed and can be changed. In the New Devices group. Drag the PTZ icon and drop it either on the Unassigned Devices group or on a Port. If you drop it on a port that is already assigned to another device, the PTZ device replaces it. The displaced device is sent to the Unassigned Devices group. 4. Change the values to those suggested by the PTZ camera documentation. 5. Drag the modem icon to the port icon with the number of the port identified in step 1. Hardware Report During a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site, click the Hardware tab. The report includes a serial number of the unit at the Rapid Eye site, the version of software running the Rapid Eye unit, the date of manufacture, and internal hardware used by the unit. Using Monitor Output 1 as a Public Display Monitor A public display monitor can be set up independently of LocalView, on Rapid Eye Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT units. There is no need for converters between the monitor and the Rapid Eye unit. Note Video from connected IP cameras will not be able to display on a public display monitor (analog cameras only). To view live video from IP cameras, use LocalView or the Remote View application to display the video feeds. 1. Mount a monitor where you plan to have it display a video feed. For NTSC cameras, use an NTSC video monitor; for PAL cameras, use a PAL monitor. 2. Connect a coaxial cable to the INPUT connector on the video monitor. 3. Connect the other end of the coaxial cable to MONITOR OUTPUT 1, on the back of the Rapid Eye Hybrid HD or SPOT MONITOR on Hybrid LT unit. 4. Using View, continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site (see page 65). Click the Monitor Out tab. 5. Select a camera that will be seen on the monitor in the Cameras to Choose from box (see Figure 8-8). Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 165 Configuring Other Hardware 6. Enter a number in the Duration box. The number sets the amount of time (in seconds) that the video feed is displayed on the monitor. If only one camera is listed, the duration is ignored and the feed is continuously displayed. When many cameras are listed, the monitor sequences through them for the time specified. You have the option of changing the duration directly in the list by selecting it and entering another value. 7. Click Add. Repeat step 5, to step 7 to add more video feeds to the public monitor. A camera can be included multiple times in the same tour. Color Bars On Rapid Eye 480/400 ips units, the MONITOR OUTPUT 1 connector on the back of the Rapid Eye unit cannot produce a test pattern. For these units, the Color Bars option is not available, on the Monitor Out tab of a Maintenance Session. External Hardware Control of a Public Display Monitor You can connect a third-party hardware switch to a Rapid Eye unit. The switch can freeze a public display monitor and control whether the next camera or previous camera is monitored. For wiring details, see Table 8-6 and the switch documentation. To enable local hardware control of a public display monitor: 1. Using View, continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site (as explained in Starting a Maintenance Session on page 65). 2. Click the Monitor Out tab. 3. Enable the Enable External Control checkbox (see Figure 8-8). This reserves a Rapid Eye unit’s General Purpose Inputs 13, 14 and 15 for switch use. Figure 8-8 166 Monitor Out Tab, for a Unit’s Monitor Output 1 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Table 8-6 Inputs for External Control of Monitor Output 1 General Purpose Input Instructs the Video Capture Card To … 13 Display previous camera 14 Display next camera 15 Continue or pause public display monitora a A selection of video feeds from one unit for use with a public display monitor is very different from site tours, involving many Rapid Eye sites (see Touring Many Sites on page 265) or PTZ tours, preset PTZ movements (see Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup on page 101). Use of a local user interface is also unrelated to these public display monitor settings. Using LocalView as an Additional Public Display Monitor For a better public display of video, Honeywell recommends using a dedicated NTSC (or PAL) monitor, rather than the VGA output used for LocalView. Nonetheless, you have the option of using the VGA monitor displaying LocalView as a public display monitor or as a secondary public display monitor (in addition to a dedicated monitor). Set LocalView to display the camera(s) that you need. More than one camera can be displayed simultaneously. Customer Data and Customer Device Events View can display messages from many non-Rapid Eye hardware devices and systems such as cash registers, door access sensors, a guest registration system, and so on. A Rapid Eye unit can record these messages. Video From a Customer Device Event A message from a third-party device is treated as a Customer device event by a Rapid Eye unit (see Events Defined on page 215). You have the option of having up to 100 messages per device either logged, trigger an alarm or both. These customer device events are synchronized to the recorded event video. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 167 Configuring Other Hardware Preparation Before defining customer device events and using them as alarms, a View operator needs: • • • • Serial communication settings of the customer device. These are obtained from the device’s manufacturer and are required to correctly receive data from the device. Specific rights added to a typical View user account: the Modify configuration right and access to the site that is connected to the device. See Removing Rapid Eye Software on page 226. To know which serial port on a Rapid Eye unit is used by the device, and knowing if it is already being used by other devices, such as a PTZ camera, and so on. To know how strings of text are formatted and produced by the customer device(s). Adding a Customer Device that Sends Data to a Unit In this procedure, let us suppose that the owner of a retail store wants video of an employee at a point-of-sale (POS), when goods are purchased. Assume that a cash register is connected to a Rapid Eye unit and you know the cash register communication settings. 168 1. Start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Wait until a System Operational message appears. Click the Serial Devices tab. 2. Expand New Devices (as needed) to see a Data Input icon (see Figure 8-9). 3. Drag the Data Input icon to a port icon, as needed. If you drop the icon on a port that is already assigned to another device, the POS device replaces it and the displaced device is sent to the Unassigned Devices group. 4. To name the interface between the Rapid Eye unit and the cash register, select the Device Name box for the Serial device (see Figure 8-9), and enter a name, for example, Cash1. Click elsewhere on the View window to save the name. 5. Set the communication parameters (Baud Rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits, and Parity Bits) to values recommended by the POS device manufacturer. 6. Ignore the Buffer Size field for now. To add a data recording rule, see Adding an Event Rule for a Data Recording Device on page 169. 7. Select the Log or Alarm checkboxes to log the event (No Sale in the Figure 8-9 example) or have it trigger an alarm. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 8-9 Some Devices Can Be Searched for Data Such as No Sale Adding an Event Rule for a Data Recording Device 1. While adding a data recording serial device (as explained in Adding a Customer Device that Sends Data to a Unit, page 168), select the Event Name box and enter a name (for example, No Sale, as in Figure 8-9). 2. In the Event Rule box, enter either: • A code obtained from the manufacturer of the device. For example, a no sale message from a device is coded as one or more numbers, or text (refer to the documentation for the device for manufacturer codes). - or - • A regular expression of your choice (see Reference for Searching Rules and Regular Expressions on page 170). 3. Click Add. 4. The default Buffer Size value of 250 bytes should be adequate for most organizations. However, consider that you may need to use a bigger buffer if any rules use wildcards (see Table 8-7). For large rules, change the number of bytes in the Buffer Size field so that there are twice as many bytes as there are keystrokes in the longest rule entered in step 2 of this procedure. 5. You have the option of adding more events, as many as 512 different events or regular expressions can be processed for each data recording device. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 169 Configuring Other Hardware Reference for Searching Rules and Regular Expressions Table 8-7 lists the special characters available for use when making rules in the Rule box. Technical users who know how to use a regular expression (RE) will benefit most from using Table 8-7. Also, there are examples of extended data searches in the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide. Table 8-7 Special Characters Available for a Search Rule Character Name Searches for a Match of (…) Within the Rule . Period Any one character. Ex: .ire finds wire, tire, 4ire, and so on. [] Square brackets Each character in the brackets, in turn. Ex: c[aou]t finds cat, cot or cut. ^ Caret Characters that are not in brackets. Ex: r[^a] finds rb, rc, rA, r1 and so on. A rule at the beginning of a line. Ex: ^Hume finds Hume at the start of lines. A control code, when used with a backslash. Ex: \^C finds the control-C control code. $ Dollar sign A rule at the end of a line, when placed after it. Ex: Kant$ finds only Kant at the end of lines. - Dash A range of characters set in square brackets. Ex: [a-z] matches any lower case letter. + Plus sign The character that it follows, once or more. Ex: tu+ finds tu, tuu, tuuu, and so on. * Asterisk The character that it follows, whether absent, occurring once or more. Ex: mo*e finds me, moe, mooe, moooe… Ex: c[au]*t finds ct, cat, caat, cut, cuut… ? Question mark The character that follows the question mark, whether absent or occurring once. Ex: me?y matches either mey or me. \ Backslash Special character, when placed before it. Ex: \? Finds ?. Control character, when placed before it. Ex: \b finds a backspace, \e an Esc (escape), \f a form feed, \n a new line, \r a carriage return, \t a tab and \x0D a hexadecimal encoded ASCII character. 170 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide NetPIT and PIT Devices Support for Protocol Interface Translators Honeywell supports Protocol Interface Translators (PITs) and a networked Protocol Interface Translator (NetPIT), for attaching many serial devices to a Rapid Eye unit. Figure 8-10 Cash Registers Connected to a Honeywell PIT Protocol Interface Translator (PIT) Rapid Eye Hybrid HD unit Set of customer devices that can send data A NetPIT device provides communications for up to 16 point-of-sale (POS) devices from one serial port. NetPIT supports applications by Retalix (RetPIT), Micros (MicPIT) and AtmPIT. A PIT can provide communications for one device (AVBPIT1) or up to four devices (AVBPIT4POS). See Figure 8-10. When assigned to a port on a Rapid Eye unit, the configuration values of the serial interface are shown (see Figure 8-11). Figure 8-11 A NetPIT Device on PORT 3 Showing Serial Interface Settings NetPIT device on Port 3 When expanded, a NetPIT device shows 16 virtual ports, labeled A to P (see Figure 8-12). A PIT device (AVBPIT4POS) shows 4 virtual ports, labeled A to D. When a device is assigned to a virtual port, the settings of that device are shown on the Serial Devices tab. Each virtual port can be configured independently for speed, data format, and protocol. For the details of the configuration for these devices, refer to their documentation. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 171 Configuring Other Hardware Figure 8-12 Expanded NetPIT Device on PORT 3, Showing Four POS Devices Port Restrictions • • A PIT device cannot be assigned to the virtual port of a NetPIT. Only one NetPIT device can be assigned to a Rapid Eye port. Rapid Eye Audio Channels can be renamed. View operators use audio channels to: • • Listen, using a microphone at the Rapid Eye site. Talk, by talking on one channel, or broadcasting on both. All sound sources are mixed at a View operator’s station, regardless of the number of sites being monitored at once. Each Rapid Eye site can send up to two channels of audio to a View operator. Audio Hardware Microphones, powered speakers, and so on, need to be connected to a Rapid Eye unit. The operator PC also needs a microphone and speaker for two-way audio, and a sound card. For more details about audio hardware connections, refer to the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide or Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. A PC running View requires a sound card to transmit sound to and from the Rapid Eye site. 172 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Using Rapid Eye Audio Monitor, Record and Broadcast Audio 1. Using View, continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Click the Audio tab. 2. Select the Enable boxes to enable transmission of sound from point to point and monitor it. 3. Select the Record box to record sound along with the video from the site. You can monitor, record or do both, for each channel of audio. 4. Select the monitor Talk (Audio Out) boxes, as needed for each channel (see Figure 8-13). An operator can broadcast on either one or both of the channels, and to as many sites at once as can be opened. Figure 8-13 Audio Tab Audio Interference Checking one’s installation for hard-to-predict situations includes spotchecking for: • Live audio. Coordinate the testing of audio with fire alarm and security alarm testing. Using View, connect to that Rapid Eye unit and check audio for feedback and interference, before and during alarms. Caution • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Loud alarms can interfere with microphones or a speaker at times when they could be needed most. Recorded audio. After a day or two, check for background noise in recordings, using a retrieval session to spotcheck each microphone for a few seconds at every half-hour or so, during a 24-hour period. This can reveal if microphones are placed too near sources of background noise (such as a vent) that are amplified to a point where they interfere with audio. Hard to predict noise from the area—rush-hour traffic, passing trains and planes, crowds in a stadium, and so on—may not have been apparent during the installation of the microphones and speakers. 173 Configuring Other Hardware Using Audio with LocalView At sites where LocalView is in use, Channel 2 can be reserved for use onsite. View operators using these sites can use only Channel 1. Audio can be changed by System Administrators by using View to connect to the Rapid Eye unit. Enabling Audio for Onsite Use by LocalView 1. On the Audio Setup tab, add a checkmark to the Channel 2 (Right) Used by Site Operator for Local Audio Monitoring checkbox. The channel 2 Enable, Record and name fields become unavailable. They are not needed for monitoring audio by a LocalView operator. 2. In the Channel 1 controls, add checkmarks to the Enable boxes for Talk, Listen or both, as needed. 3. You have the option of adding checkmarks to Record boxes for Talk, Listen or both, as needed. The Enable box needs to be checked before the Record box can be. Disabling Audio for LocalView Using either View (or LocalView), on the Audio tab, remove the checkmark from the Channel 2 (Right) Used by Site Operator for Local Audio Monitoring checkbox. Eagle Audio Eagle Audio is discussed in the Rapid Eye and Eagle Audio Configuration Guide, 800-00371. Please contact your distributor if you need more information about Eagle Audio. TIP! 174 Rapid Eye Audio differs from Eagle Audio, which is an optional, third party, audio interface. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Multiple Operators Connecting to One Unit Sessions Table 8-8 Maximum Simultaneous Sessions Session Type Number of View Operatorsa Who Can Participate Live or Live-alarm 10 Retrieval 10 Event 10 Data 10 Alarm 10 Motion 10 Maintenance 1b a Number of operators that can share the streams that are left from a unit’s pool of available streams (see Table 8-9). For Rapid Eye Hybrid LT units, the number of simultaneous View operators may be less. b Other sessions are terminated if the Reboot command is used in a Maintenance Session. Example of Session Availability When ten operators open a Retrieval session to the same unit, an eleventh operator cannot. However, that operator could open another type of session (such as Live or Event). Streams Table 8-9 Stream Availability from One Unit (16-Channel Hybrid HD Units) Sessiona Video (Stream) Audio (Stream) Data (stream) Live 32b Available in each Live session Available in each Live session Retrieval 32 16 16 a b Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 For the number of sessions available from one unit (see Table 8-8). For live video streams, there is an additional limitation (see Live Video, page 176). 175 Configuring Other Hardware Example of Stream Availability (on 16-Channel Hybrid HD Units) Two operators open a Retrieval session to the same unit, and each operator monitors video from 16 cameras. A third operator can open a Retrieval session to the same unit, but cannot monitor recorded video, since a total of 32 streams of recorded video, available from that unit, are already in use. For live audio, up to ten operators running Live sessions could each hear the channels of Live audio, and each could monitor all data streams. Live Video Limitation on Viewing Live Video in Many Live Sessions When live video is being monitored, use of live video from cameras from the same group of cameras cannot total more than eight. The groups of cameras are defined in Table 8-10. For example: • Let 2 operators view live video from 3 cameras in group C (3 cameras × 2 operators = 6 live streams). A third operator can view live video using only 2 of the cameras in group C. Let 8 operators, each running a live session, use the same live camera. A ninth operator cannot view live video using a camera from the same group. • Table 8-10 Camera Groups on 16-Channel Hybrid HD Units Group Camera port # A 1, 8, 11, 14 B 2, 5, 12, 15 C 3, 6, 9, 16 D 4, 7, 10, 13 One Operator Connecting to Multiple Units Up to 64 simultaneous connections to different units can be made by one operator. This number can be lower due to the CPU of the PC running View, the PC’s memory and the number of other tasks running. Audio Broadcast Audio can be broadcast to many units simultaneously, using the View application. To broadcast audio, click Talk in more than one player before using the microphone at the operator PC. 176 9 Managing User Accounts Key Facts Flexibility If one operator, or very few users are operating the Rapid Eye unit(s) in your organization, you may not need to create user accounts (see Default User on page 178). However, in organizations with many Rapid Eye operators or units, Honeywell recommends creating user accounts for unit operators. Account Users Operate Units A System Administrator creates accounts so that personnel can operate the units. Accounts created using LocalView can only be used onsite at the site where they were created. Accounts created using Admin are generally used to run the View application, for connecting to one or many units over a network or dial-up connection. Administrator Account Use the Administrator account to run the Admin application. Use of Admin and the Administrator account should be limited to your organization’s System Administrator. Good reasons for protecting access to Admin are explained in Limiting the Use of Admin on page 190. The Administrator can also run the View application to configure units. System Password The system password is not used by users. Authorized users do not need to know the system password. It protects units from Admin and View users in other organizations. See System Password on page 194. Using LocalView Only System Administrators have the option of creating user accounts, using LocalView, on a unit-by-unit basis. This is convenient when your organization has very few units and users. Before Creating User Accounts Preparation Using Admin At this point, a Rapid Eye System Administrator using Admin has: • • • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Obtained or created a database. See Obtaining a Rapid Eye Database on page 276. Created at least one site. You can create accounts without an existing site, but users won’t be able to do much more than open View. See Adding a Site on page 37. Added a password to the Administrator account. This is highly recommended by Honeywell, but is optional. See Administrator Password on page 205. 177 Managing User Accounts Preparation Using LocalView Onsite At this point, a System Administrator using LocalView has added a password to the Admin account. This is highly recommended, but is optional. See Administrator Password on page 205. What You Need From Your Security Officer Before adding accounts, your System Administrator may need to find out if: • • • • The installation will be open or if it needs security. See Security Overview, page 189. Operators are required to use passwords. See User Password, page 204. Operators should have different profiles in their user accounts. See Rights of User Accounts, page 206. All operators should be able to access Rapid Eye sites and operate the Rapid Eye units. See Right to Access a Site, page 210. Default User Administrator Accounts The Admin and LocalView applications each have a default, permanent Administrator account. These accounts cannot be removed or modified. However, Honeywell recommends that you add a password to them. If two or less users are using the Rapid Eye unit(s) in your organization, you may not need to create other user accounts. Admin Remote Administrator Account The Administrator account in the Admin application grants a remote operator access to every Rapid Eye unit in your organization. Users of this account can also use every function in the Admin and View applications. If a unit’s management of accounts is central, the Administrator account in Admin replaces the one in LocalView. Local Administrator Account The Administrator account in LocalView grants an onsite operator access to one Rapid Eye unit in your organization. Users of this account can also use every function in LocalView. Many Users If many users will be using the system, Honeywell recommends: • • 178 Your System Administrator limit the use of the Administrator account and add password protection to the account (see Administrator Password on page 205). That the password to the Administrator user account, and of any others based on that account, should be kept secure and changed regularly. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Using Admin Software To log on to the Admin application, user accounts other than the Administrator can be used if they have the rights to access the site (based on Administrator). Creating such accounts should be handled with care in high security environments. Configuring LocalView To configure LocalView, a user account needs the Modify Configuration right. User Management Switching a unit from Local User Management (the default) to Central User Management is an option. Keep in mind: • • • Changing User management is performed on a unit-by-unit basis. Only the Admin application can be used to set a unit to Central User Management. Only LocalView can be used to re-enable a unit to use Local User Management. Creating Accounts For View Whether user management is central or local, Admin can always be used to add accounts for connecting to a unit from a PC running View. Older Units User management is not available on older Rapid Eye models such as Multi-Media units. Local User Management Creating Accounts Using LocalView Local User Management enables a System Administrator to create operator accounts onsite, using LocalView, for operating that unit. When user management is set to Local in LocalView, the list of accounts on that unit can be edited. Creating Accounts Using Admin In addition, a System Administrator can create Rapid Eye accounts using the Admin application while Local User Management is enabled. These standard Rapid Eye accounts are used to access one or many units remotely using a PC running the View application. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 179 Managing User Accounts Setting Local User Management A LocalView administrator has the option of setting User Management to Local. Accounts that were created centrally will remain on the unit. Central User Management Creating Accounts Using Admin Central User Management only disables the onsite creation of operator accounts using LocalView. If Central User Management is enabled, a System Administrator uses the Admin application to create accounts. These central accounts can access Rapid Eye units using the View application or LocalView. Figure 9-1 Changing User Management Click to change the local user management Setting a Unit to Central User Management 180 1. While using Admin to update (or create) a site’s definition, click the Change button next to Local User Management is in effect (see Figure 9-1). A dialog box appears to confirm setting the site to central user management. After clicking Yes, the message next to the button changes to Central User Management is pending. 2. Use View to run a Maintenance Session at the site. Click the Security tab. 3. Click Update Security. The procedure to update security is shown in Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit, page 153. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Result The next time that you update the site using the Admin application, the label next to the Change button reads Central User Management is in effect. The accounts of users authorized to operate the unit are copied to the unit and replace the accounts created locally. Operators with accounts that authorize operation of the unit, can access that unit either offsite using View, or locally using LocalView. Notification of an Admin and LocalView Problem After a System Administrator has used Admin to select Central user management and View to run a Maintenance Session (as explained above), the LocalView Administrator can select Local user management. The next time that the System Administrator runs a Maintenance Session, a message indicates that there is a discrepancy in the User Management settings. The System Administrator has the option of setting User Management to Central or of leaving it on Local. Using Admin and View to Create a User Account Whether user management is central or local, Admin is used to create accounts for operating units from a PC running the View application. 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. To display the Add User dialog box, do one of the following: • • • Click on the toolbar. Click Add on the Actions menu. Press Ctrl+Ins. 3. Enter a name in the User name field (see the example in Figure 9-2). You will be asked to use another name if the name you entered is already being used in your system. 4. Click Save and Close. Naming Restrictions For user account names, do not use: • • • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 The database name of the Rapid Eye database. A user account with the same name as the central database causes an error when a copy of the database is made locally. Self or (self). A phrase used by some Rapid Eye reports. Administrator. This account name is reserved. 181 Managing User Accounts Figure 9-2 Adding a Night Operator Account Account Options • • • • Add a password to the account. Enter a password in the Password field. Enter the password again in the Confirm password field. Change the Language of the Rapid Eye interface for users of that account, if needed. Base the user-account on another. Select the Rights and site access are based on option. The box next to it lists other accounts on your Rapid Eye system that can serve as a basis for the user account. Use the drop-down arrow to select an account. Modify the rights. See Granting More or Less Rights to an Account on page 185. Updating Security Onsite Using a Central Account When Central User Management is enabled, an operator account created with Admin can also be used onsite, in LocalView. To enable use of the account onsite, use View to update security on that unit. See Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit on page 153. Language The System Administrator has the option of customizing the language that an operator of that account will see while using the View, LocalView or Admin applications. Click the drop-down arrow in the Language box to select a language. The Language setting does not affect the Logon dialogs to the Admin and View applications (these always appear in English). An operator has the option of overriding the language setting while running View, using the Language command under Options, in the View menu. 182 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Grouping Accounts To create a group of accounts, assign the same user account to different users. To do so, View operators can: • Use an account that is based on another. View Operators each have their own account, but the rights, sites and so on, of the accounts are common. See Granting More or Less Rights to an Account on page 185. Share the same account. Add an account (as explained in Using Admin and View to Create a User Account on page 181), then assign the same account to different staff. Language of the interface is independent of rights and sites and can be customized for each account user within a group. This can be useful for multilingual staff (for example, two operators can have the same rights, yet see the interface in a language that they can deal with more effectively). • • Basing Account Rights on Another User Note This feature is available in Admin, but not in LocalView. 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. Double-click the name of an account. Note The Administrator account cannot be based on another. 3. Select the Rights and site access are based on option. 4. Use the drop-down arrow to choose a user account from the list. 5. Click Save and Close. Updating an Account 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. Double-click the name of the account. You can also select the user account and do one of the following: • • • Click on the toolbar. Click Update in the Actions menu. Press F12. 3. Edit the user account information, as needed. 4. Click Save and Close. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 183 Managing User Accounts Updating Security Onsite Using a Central Account If Central User Management is enabled and the operator account will be used to operate the unit onsite, using LocalView, use View to update security on the unit(s) to which the account will be granted access. See Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit on page 153. Creating an Account in LocalView 1. Using LocalView, click the Configuration tab. 2. Select User Management. 3. Click Add New User. 4. Enter a name in the User Name box. You will be prompted to use another name if the name entered is already being used. 5. You have the option of adding a password to the account. To do so, enter a password in the Password box. Enter the password again in the Confirm Password box. Some characters cannot be used in a password, such as a double-quote ( " ). Nothing happens if you try to enter an invalid character. 6. You have the option of modifying the account rights. See Granting More or Less Rights to an Account on page 185. 7. Click Save. Account for Accessing One Unit Accounts created using LocalView can only access the Rapid Eye unit running LocalView. Central User Management When user management is central, accounts cannot be created using LocalView. Updating an Account in LocalView 184 1. Using LocalView, click the Configuration tab. 2. Select User Management. Select a user. 3. You have the option of modifying the account’s password and user name. To modify rights, see Granting More or Less Rights to an Account on page 185. Click Save. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Granting More or Less Rights to an Account Rights can be selected when adding a user account or when updating a user. You can: • • Customize the rights of an account. Base the rights on those of another account. Admin. Account rights granted using Admin apply to View software and to many units. LocalView. LocalView can add a user account onsite, only for that unit. For security guidelines on assigning rights see Rights of User Accounts on page 206. Customizing the Rights in an Account 1. While adding or updating an account, click a checkbox next to a Right (see Figure 9-3). Adding a checkmark adds that right to the account. Removing the checkmark removes that right from the account. 2. To limit site and camera access, see Limiting the Use of Cameras and Other Devices by Partitioning on page 211. 3. After modifying rights, users of Admin need to click Save and Close. Users of LocalView do not. Figure 9-3 Default User Account Rights and Site Access Select a checkbox next to a Right to add or remove that Right from the account. Select to have users be able to access all sites, or select specific sites for users to access. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 185 Managing User Accounts If Central Management is enabled and the operator account will be used to operate the unit using View and LocalView, use View to update security on the unit(s) to which the account will be granted access. See Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit on page 153. Right to Use ActivEye, by Honeywell Video Analytics Granting rights for ActivEye adds ActivEye command buttons on the Sites toolbar in View. Table 9-1 ActivEye Tasks and Rights of a User Account Refer to …a Right Needed Client Software ActivEye live Live Monitoring Station Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide ActivEye forensics Forensics Tool Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide ActivEye configuration Configuration Tool Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide ActivEye reports Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide a Reporting Tool ActivEye documentation is available at the operator PC. Click Start  All Programs  Honeywell Video Analytics-Client/Documentation/[publication title]. Running ActivEye ActivEye sessions can be run: • • While running the View application. After letting the operator run View once, to register his Rapid Eye account, that operator has the option of clicking Start  All Programs  Honeywell Video Analytics - Client  [ActivEye session]. It is usually best to use the Configuration Tool first, to set up ActivEye objects, making the Forensics session more useful. For an introduction to ActivEye by Honeywell Video Analytics, see the Video Analytics: Getting Started Guide, publication number 800-00923. See the Video Analytics V4 Rapid Eye DVR Integration Application Note, publication number 800-03866, for more information on using Video Analytics with Rapid Eye. Note The HVA commands can be used whether a Rapid Eye unit being operated offers HVA or not. If not, clicking HVA commands only produces a message. Availability of LocalView on V9/V10 DVRs Offering Video Analytics LocalView is now fully supported by Rapid Eye’s latest V9/V10 software. Earlier V9 software on units with Video Analytics cannot access full LocalView features. Only network configuration is available with LocalView on these units (see the Using LocalView to Modify the IP Address of a Rapid Eye Unit on page 45 for more information on setting up your network settings with LocalView). Use the Admin and View applications to monitor video and make all other configuration changes needed for these units (see Unit Configuration Basics on page 65, Video Feed Setup on page 81, Configuring Other Hardware on page 186 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide 151, and other sections of this guide for more configuration information; see the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide for more information about monitoring and playing back video). Visit http://www.honeywellsystems.com/support/download-center/index.html to download the latest Rapid Eye software. Follow the instructions on the Download Center website to logon to the Download Center and find the latest Rapid Eye software. User Rights and Security Your System Administrator can use Admin to provide operator accounts that: • • • Limit the sites that a user can access. By default, access to all sites is granted. See Right to Access a Site, page 210. You can set accounts to access only some sites. Automatically access sub-sites added in the future. Select this option (see Figure 9-3) if you want users to be able to access all sub-sites that are added to groups of sites the user can already access. Limit the amount of time for use of a site. See Right to Access a Site, page 210. LocalView When using LocalView, there is no time limit for operating a unit. Denying Access Denying access to sites is a security measure that is used against an operator who must be stopped from using Rapid Eye units as soon as possible. The account data is preserved. For less severe cases, removing an account may be a sufficient measure (see Removing a User Account on page 188). Denying Access to All Units with Admin 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. Double-click the name of the account in the User Name column. 3. Click the box next to Deny this account access to sites... so that it shows a checkmark. Click Save and Close. 4. Update security at each site listed in the User can access selected sites list. To update security, see Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit on page 153. Denying Onsite Access to LocalView 1. Using LocalView, click the Configuration tab. 2. Click the Users tab. 3. Select the account. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 187 Managing User Accounts 4. Click the box next to Deny Access so that it shows a checkmark. Removing a User Account For accounts created using Admin, whether user management is local or central: 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. Select the user that you want to delete. 3. Do one of the following: • • • 4. Click on the toolbar. Click Delete in the Actions menu. Press Delete on the keyboard. When you are warned that the user is about to be deleted, click Yes to continue or No to cancel. A message will warn you if other accounts are based on the account, offering the option to proceed with—or cancel—the deletion of the account. Deleting an Account Used to Access LocalView Onsite Local User Management For accounts created using LocalView: 1. Using LocalView, click the Configuration tab. 2. Select User Management. 3. Select the user that you want to delete and click Delete. 4. When you are warned that the user is about to be deleted, click Yes to continue or No to cancel. Central User Management When Admin is used to set a unit to Central User Management, LocalView cannot be used to delete user accounts. After using the Removing a User Account procedure, above, use the View application to run a Maintenance Session and then Update Security on the Rapid Eye unit. You also have the option of running a Maintenance Session to Update Security on other units to which the operator had access. 188 10 Security for a Rapid Eye System Security Overview These guidelines are suggestions to complement your organization’s security policies and procedures. Most are optional in low-security environments. The Rapid Eye security features can be applied to very different areas of security: • • • Securing the system includes using passwords, designating as few System Administrators as possible, and so on. This type of security starts in Securing the Rapid Eye System. Using a Rapid Eye system as a security device. This includes setting up alarms that are triggered by an Outside World event. See Events Defined on page 215. Hybrid use. Rapid Eye can be used as a security device to supervise users. See Tracing Events on page 219, and Denying Access on page 223. Securing the Rapid Eye System What Level of Security is Needed? Rapid Eye units can be used effectively in high and low security situations. Use of security features is optional, making the system a flexible tool in many security environments. Security officers in your organization can help define how open or secure the Rapid Eye system should be. Caution Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Even in minimal security environments, using passwords for system access and for the default Administrator account are highly recommended by Honeywell. See System Password on page 194, and Administrator Password on page 205. 189 Security for a Rapid Eye System Security Priorities Table 10-1 suggests an order or priorities for implementing a secure Rapid Eye system. Additional Security for Installations This additional security may not apply to your installation. If you are unsure, see the network administrator. • LocalView. System Administrators can use Central User Management to control user accounts. See User Management on page 179. Rapid Eye databases on a network. Network System Administrators or database administrators can protect a Rapid Eye Central database from deletion. See Rapid Eye Database Security on page 192. Remote access service. System Administrators may need to obtain PPP connectivity passwords. See PPP Connectivity on page 222. • • Table 10-1 Priority a a a Security Priorities Action Page Limit installation of Admin to System Administrator PCs page 190 Limit access to the System Administrator Guide page 191 Use a system password page 194 Add a password to the Administrator account page 205 Designate specific PCs as Rapid Eye alarm stations page 222 Assign passwords to user accounts page 204 Limit the rights of user accounts page 206 Trace critical system events page 219 Deny site access to a user, as needed page 223 Backup and safeguard your Rapid Eye central database page 192 Optional priorities for dealing with external security, or tampering that originates outside of your organization. Minimal Security Minimal security can be appropriate when a Rapid Eye system is used by only one person. At the very least, Honeywell recommends that you add a system password (see System Password on page 194). Limiting the Use of Admin Like most Rapid Eye security features, limiting the installation and use of Admin to the PCs of System Administrators is optional. 190 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Limiting Access to Admin Documentation Use only the View CD to install Rapid Eye software on a View operator’s PC. Features For secure installations, the Security Officer(s) in your organization should: • • TIP! Designate as few System Administrators as possible. Limit the installation of Admin software to the PC(s) of System Administrators, especially in open systems. For secure installations, Honeywell recommends that only System Administrators receive copies of Admin software. Also consider that: • • TIP! View operators should only receive copies of View software. Distribution of Admin documentation should be limited to System Administrators. As a security measure, only the Admin CD can be used to install the Admin user documents. When you use the View CD, only a Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide, is copied to the PC hard drive. The guides are in Adobe Portable Document format (PDF). The software needs to be installed before the documentation is available for viewing. Documents cannot be viewed directly from a software CD. However, a documentation CD is included if you need to circulate the documentation. Password Guidelines Like most Rapid Eye security features, use of passwords is optional. Honeywell recommends using and changing the system password and the password of the default Administrator account, even in minimal security environments. See System Password on page 194, and Administrator Password on page 205. Access to the Rapid Eye system is obtained through user accounts. The Administrator account is the key account of the system. Administrator access should be carefully guarded. Using passwords counteracts unauthorized access to the Rapid Eye units. Passwords System password A System password is applied to all of the units in your organization. The system password is not used by users. It counters access by unauthorized users, such as those of another Rapid Eye system. Make a record of the System password in case technical support is needed for a Rapid Eye unit. Honeywell recommends that your System Administrator use a system password (see System Password on page 194). Administrator account password Users of the Administrator account can use every function in Admin and View. They can access every Rapid Eye site in your system. Add a password to this account to control it (as explained in Administrator Password on page Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 191 Security for a Rapid Eye System 205). The Administrator account password also protects units from unauthorized clearing of storage (see Preventing Users from Clearing Storage, page 152). This password and any others based on the Administrator account, should be kept secure and changed regularly. User account password A user’s password can be unique or the same as another user’s, as called for by your organization’s security requirements. Passwords can be: • • • • Of variable length. Compose passwords of up to 50 alphanumeric characters. Double-quotes ( “ ) cannot be used. Repeated. Your Rapid Eye System Administrator has the option of assigning the same password or differing passwords to different users. Deleted (that is, emptied). This is equivalent to not assigning a password. There is no reset function. Your System Administrator does not need to know a user account password to delete it. A System Administrator only needs to remember/log the Administrator password. Set only by a System Administrator. A View operator cannot set a user account password, only the System Administrator can. Using Text Securely in Rapid Eye Password Boxes • • • • TIP! To prevent onlookers from obtaining a password, asterisks appear onscreen as you type in these boxes. To prevent use of the Windows Clipboard to obtain passwords, Rapid Eye software prevents the copying or cutting of passwords from password boxes. To help guarantee against a typing error when a password is set up, you are asked to enter the password again, in the Confirm password box. To further guarantee against a typing error when setting passwords, you can paste copied text into a password box. Insert numbers into common words for more secure passwords. For example, a password such as security is made more secure as secur2691ity. Such passwords are easier to remember than randomly generated passwords. Rapid Eye Database Security Like most Rapid Eye security features, using network means to protect a Rapid Eye database is optional. If the database is protected, Rapid Eye unit operators need read/write permissions for the database. Protecting the Database from Deletion The Rapid Eye database can be protected using server file system capabilities. As a preventive measure against the accidental deletion of a database, back it up and use network security settings (such as NTFS security). See Deleting a Database on page 289. Password Security Passwords are encrypted in Rapid Eye database files (*.mdb and *.mdf). 192 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Protecting the Database from Copying It is important to protect your Rapid Eye database from copying, if only to avoid its use by unauthorized users, who may also be licensed Rapid Eye software users. SQL-Server Option To add security to a Rapid Eye database, your SQL database administrator can setup a SQL login just for Rapid Eye users. By default, Rapid Eye software connects to a SQL-Server by using sa as a logon account, with no password. SQL-Server Logon Reserved for Rapid Eye Operators 1. Run SQL Server Enterprise Manager. 2. Add a new log on. 3. The public and db_owner database roles need to be assigned to the log on, so that a user can connect to the Rapid Eye database, update it and—if System Administrators are to use Admin to create a database—create a new SQL-based database. TIP! Creating a SQL-server type of logon is a procedure for a SQL-Server administrator, not for Admin users or View operators. Result When these changes are made to SQL-Server security, a SQL Connection login window appears, as in Figure 10-1. The Login and Password for SQL can differ from the User ID and Password of a Rapid Eye account. Figure 10-1 Note Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 SQL-Server Login The next time that you use the Admin or View applications, the same SQL logon and password are used automatically, without the SQL Connection window appearing. 193 Security for a Rapid Eye System System Password Use a system password for units that use a dial-up connection or are on a public network. A system password may be unnecessary on a private network, depending on the security protocols in your organization. Consult your security personnel. Keeping Unauthorized Users Out A system password blocks access to all (or optionally, some) of your sites from unauthorized users, external to your organization, who may have found out the dial-up number or IP address of a site, and who have access to the Admin and View applications. Authorized Operators do not have to remember the system password to use a Rapid Eye unit. Only the Rapid Eye System Administrator needs to keep a record of it, in case a unit is added or removed from your Rapid Eye system. Road Map to Setting the System Password Setting (or changing) the system password requires three procedures: • • • Use Admin to set a system password in the Rapid Eye Central database. Use View to run a Maintenance Session on a Rapid Eye unit and click Update Security on the Security tab. This copies the system password to the unit (see Figure 10-2). Repeat this for each unit. The password is copied to the local database of View operators as they log on, when they are connected to the Rapid Eye Central database. On systems in session 24/7, or for operators who run View on standalone PCs, the System Administrator should communicate that a system password has been added, so that the View operators can refresh their local databases. See Refreshing a Local Database on page 288. Figure 10-2 Securing a Unit Click to update the security information on a Rapid Eye unit. After Setting the System Password Even Rapid Eye technical support cannot access Rapid Eye units from a LAN once your system password has been changed. 194 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Caution Do not use multiple Rapid Eye databases. Using multiple Rapid Eye databases with different system passwords on the same Rapid Eye system is confusing and prone to operator error. A forgotten system password can prevent access to a unit even by Rapid Eye technical support. Please manage your system password with care. For Admin’s report on the status of your system password, see Status Report on page 197. Always Update Security on All Units When the system password is changed, perform a Maintenance Session to update the security on each of the units in your Rapid Eye system. This prevents confusion and access problems. For example, when touring many sites, the sites with a system password that differs from the current system password will be skipped over. Caution Do not leave an older system password on a Rapid Eye site record or unit, in your CCTV system. Extra Steps in Some System Password Scenarios After your system is secured with a system password, a System Administrator may need to perform a few extra steps when faced with these tasks: • • • • Mistakenly deleting a site definition. To re-enter it, see Last Valid Password, page 202. Adding a used Rapid Eye unit. If you obtain a unit from another organization, and it is protected by that organization’s system password. See Last Valid Password on page 202. Removing a system password from a single Rapid Eye unit. This is useful when disposing of a unit. See Removing a System Password on page 197. Replacing a Rapid Eye unit. Should you need to replace a unit with a factory-issued unit. See Replacing a Unit on page 201. Caution When adding a brand new Rapid Eye site to your system, do not use the LVP (last valid password) utility, even if you have a system password set. The LVP utility is for dealing with used or replacement Rapid Eye units, and for mistakenly deleted site definitions, as explained in Last Valid Password on page 202. Changing the System Password Using Admin 1. Run Admin to access the System Password box. Either: • • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Click on the Admin toolbar. Click the System Password command on the File menu. 195 Security for a Rapid Eye System - or • 2. Press the F8 key. Enter a password in the System Password field, as shown in Figure 10-3. A double-quote ( “ ) character cannot be used. Figure 10-3 System Password Click to change the system password 3. Re-enter the password in the Confirm Password field. 4. Click Save and Close to set the system password. Changing the System Password on Each Rapid Eye Unit 1. Using View, start a Maintenance Session for a site that is designated for a system password change. Either: • • Right-click the site name (on the Site tab) and select Maintenance from the shortcut menu. Select the site, then click the Maintenance command in the Actions menu. • Select the site, then click on the toolbar. 2. Click the Security tab in the Maintenance window. 3. To update the site’s security with the Rapid Eye Central database, click Update Security on the Security tab. You have the option of checking the status of the site’s system password, reported in Admin. See Table 10-2 on page 197. 4. You have the option of ending the Maintenance Session, as explained in Ending Maintenance on page 76. 5. Repeat step 1 to step 4 for each Rapid Eye unit in your system. Updating Users on System Password Changes The System Administrator needs to tell View operators, who are logged on, to refresh their copy of the Rapid Eye database, or they will not be able to connect to Rapid Eye sites. See Refreshing a Local Database on page 288. Note that only users logged on to View 24/7 need to be warned of this. Refresh is automatic as users log on to use the View application. 196 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Status Report System Passwords and Security Status After changing the System password and synchronizing security at your sites, the Admin Sites tab reports a yes in the Secure column of each site’s line. For other values, see Table 10-2. Table 10-2 System Password: Status Value Action Meaning and Recommended Action Details No needed The worst report in a high security environment. The site is not secure from unauthorized users. Honeywell recommends that you assign a system password immediately and update security on the unit. See System Password on page 194. No; set needed The site is not secure from unauthorized users. A system password has been set using Admin, but security at the site has not been updated. Run a Maintenance Session at the site and update security. Yes; set needed The site is secure, but with another, older System password. Yes it is protected with an old password, however, you should set the site to the new password. Run a Maintenance Session and update security. Yes none needed The optimal report. The site is secure from unauthorized users. The latest System password is in effect. Removing a System Password You can remove a system password from either: • • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 All of your units, globally. If your Rapid Eye system consists of a single unit, you can use this procedure too. See Remove Password from All Units on page 198. Only one of many units. To remove a system password from a unit that needs servicing (for example) while leaving it on other units in your system, see Remove Password from One of Many Units on page 198. 197 Security for a Rapid Eye System Figure 10-4 After Removing a System Password To remove the system password on Rapid Eye units, delete all of the asterisks (*) in the password boxes. Remove Password from All Units 1. Run Admin to access the System Password window. Either: • • • Click on the Admin toolbar. Click the System Password command in the File menu. Press the F8 key. 2. Delete the asterisks from the System Password field. 3. Delete the asterisks from the Confirm Password field. The System Password window should look like Figure 10-4, above. 4. Click Save and Close. 5. Using View, click 6. Click the Security tab in the Maintenance window. 7. Click Update Security on the Security tab. You have the option of ending the Maintenance session (see page 76). 8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 for each Rapid Eye unit in your system. 9. The System Administrator needs to tell site users whose System password has been changed, to refresh their copy of the Rapid Eye database, the next time that they use View. See Refreshing a Local Database on page 288. Caution to start a Maintenance Session for a site. If the system password is not removed from a unit, that system password will need to be remembered when another site definition is created for that unit. The system password is also needed if you delete a site definition by mistake. See Adding a Site on page 37, and Deleting a Site on page 39. Remove Password from One of Many Units You may need to remove a system password from only one unit in your system, when: • • 198 Selling the unit to another organization. Sending the unit to Honeywell for repair. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide TIP! If there is only one Rapid Eye unit used by your organization, do not use the following procedure. Please use Remove Password from All Units, page 198. 1. Check your System Administrator’s password records to find the current system password on your Rapid Eye system. If the password is unknown, follow Remove Password from All Units, page 198, to change the system password on all units first. 2. Run Admin, to access the System Password window. Either: • • • Click on the Admin toolbar. Click the System Password command in the File menu. Press the F8 key. 3. Delete the asterisks in the System Password and Confirm Password boxes. The two boxes in the System Password window should now be empty (see Figure 10-4). 4. Click Save and Close. 5. Using View, start a Maintenance Session for site(s) from which you want to remove the system password. Either: • • Right-click the site name (on the Site tab) to select Maintenance from the shortcut menu. Select the site. Click the Maintenance command in the Actions menu. • Select the site, then click on the toolbar. 6. Click the Security tab in the Maintenance window. Click Update Security. End the Maintenance Session. See Ending Maintenance on page 76. 7. You have the option of powering down the Rapid Eye unit and disconnecting it from your network or its telephone line. 8. Run Admin to access the System Password window. 9. Enter the system password used earlier in the System Password field (the password that was removed in step 1 of this procedure). Re-enter the password in the Confirm Password field. 10. Click Save and Close. 11. To follow-up: • • Caution Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 The System Administrator may need to tell some users that they need to refresh their copy of the Rapid Eye database. See Refreshing a Local Database on page 288. You have the option of deleting the site in the site list, as explained in Deleting a Site on page 39. If the system password is not removed from a unit, that system password will need to be remembered when another site definition is created for that unit. The system password is also needed if you delete a site definition by mistake. See Adding a Site on page 37, and Deleting a Site on page 39. 199 Security for a Rapid Eye System System Password Extras Older System Password If you do not know the system password at a site, you will run into some difficulty removing the password (see Remove Password from One of Many Units on page 198). Table 10-2 on page 197, shows that reports of Yes; set or No; set indicate that the system password on the unit is not current. If a unit reports Yes; set or No; set, run a Maintenance Session to update security on the unit (as explained in Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit on page 153; or in Changing the System Password Using Admin on page 195). When There are Many Units in a Rapid Eye System Avoid changing the system password and then updating security on only a few units when there are many units in your Rapid Eye system. Doing so repeatedly to different unit subsets serves no security purpose and can lead to unnecessary confusion, should repair or sale of units occur. Changing a system password means you need to update the security on every unit in your Rapid Eye database. Using Another Rapid Eye Central Database Using other Rapid Eye databases to run your system should only be considered for: • • Troubleshooting new installations before a system password is added. Databases using identical system passwords. After a system becomes established and a system password is added to your system, Honeywell does not recommend using multiple Rapid Eye databases. Caution Do not use many databases for the same unit(s) if the Rapid Eye databases use different system passwords. System passwords should match on all Rapid Eye databases. The warning above means that using the LVP utility to connect to units protected by the system password of another Rapid Eye database is an abuse of the system function and could jeopardize your organization’s ability to respond to alarms and to make requests for video clips and stills. See High-Security Considerations on page 212. 200 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Replacing a Unit New Unit When you replace a Rapid Eye unit at a site with a new unit from the factory, the factory unit’s last valid password (LVP) is blank. Use LVP Utility to Match Site Definition If you replace a Rapid Eye unit and your Rapid Eye database is set to a system password (see System Password, page 194), you need to use the LVP utility to match the site definition to the blank password on the unit. Figure 10-5 Use the LVP Utility when a Unit Replaces Another Use the LVP utility to replace a unit at a secured site. Use the utility to delete the asterisks (*) that represent the system password used at that site. Replacing a Unit when a System Password Is Enabled TIP! This unit replacement procedure only applies when you replace a unit at a site that has already been defined and is operational. The procedure does not apply to adding a new site to your Rapid Eye system. To simply add a site to your system, see Adding a Site on page 37. 1. Check that the Rapid Eye unit is powered-up at the site. 2. Using Admin, update the site’s definition (see Updating a Site on page 39). 3. Click LVP (last valid password). A Reset Last Valid System Password dialog box appears. Note the asterisks in the unit Password and Confirm Password fields. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 201 Security for a Rapid Eye System 4. Remove the asterisks from the unit Password and Confirm Password fields (see Figure 10-5, above). This does not remove your system password from other units. 5. Click Save and Close. 6. Using View, start a Maintenance Session for the site. 7. To set the unit to your system password, click Update Security on the Security tab. 8. Tell any logged on View Operators that they need to refresh the Rapid Eye database to use the new site (see Refreshing a Local Database on page 288). Occasional users will have their local database automatically refreshed the next time that they log on to View. If the Site Cannot be Accessed You may have left asterisks behind in the unit Password and Confirm Password fields. Last Valid Password TIP! The scenarios described below are exceptions. They only apply when dealing with re-entry of information in a site definition for used units. Last Valid System Password When your Rapid Eye System Administrator adds a site definition, the last valid password (LVP) entry for that site remains blank in your Rapid Eye central database. When a system password is added, this database entry is updated along with the unit. There are situations when a discrepancy can occur between the system password held by a unit and the system password entry in the Rapid Eye database. An LVP utility is available to resolve these discrepancies. The LVP utility may need to be used if you: • • Obtain a used unit, from another organization’s Rapid Eye system. A Rapid Eye unit may still be protected by a system password. You may need to contact the other organization’s System Administrator. Delete a site definition by mistake. When a system password is in use and a site is deleted by mistake, you need a few extra steps to re-enter the site definition, as a system password is in use on the unit. Note If a site definition is deleted by mistake, but no system password has been set, you can disregard using the LVP when re-entering the site. See Adding a Site on page 37. Entering a Site Definition for Another Unit If you have obtained a unit from another user and you suspect that the system password on that unit was not removed, use the next procedure. 202 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide If a Used Unit Comes from Another Rapid Eye System Figure 10-6 Example of Using LVP Utility to Reset System Password Your Rapid Eye system with a system password set to Y. A used unit with a password set to X. READY ALARM HDD You can introduce a used unit into your system if you know its system password (X). For the used unit, use the LVP utility to input the used unit’s password (X). Update the security of the used unit to reset its system password to yours (Y). 1. Create a site definition (see Adding a Site on page 37). 2. Use View to run a Maintenance Session. If an error message is produced, contact the previous owner to obtain the unit’s system password for the previous owner’s system. 3. After obtaining that password, use Admin to update your site definition. 4. Click LVP (last valid password). A Reset Last Valid System Password dialog box appears (see Figure 10-6, above). 5. Enter the password obtained from the previous owner in the Unit Password box (see Figure 10-6). 6. Confirm the password. 7. Click Save and Close. 8. Using View, start a Maintenance Session, to register the site. Failure to Run a Maintenance Session If the site cannot be accessed, it is possible that: • • • You’ve obtained an incorrect system password from the unit’s previous owner. You’ve incorrectly entered the password into the LVP utility. A Maintenance Session is being run by another user. Try to run a Live Session instead. If the site is still inaccessible, contact Rapid Eye technical support, as explained in For Questions on page 35. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 203 Security for a Rapid Eye System Re-Entering a Site Definition for a Unit with a System Password TIP! When a system password is in use and a site is deleted by mistake, you need a few extra steps to re-enter the site definition. 1. While adding a site (see Adding a Site on page 37), click LVP. A Reset Last Valid System Password dialog box appears. 2. Enter the system password that was securing the unit in the unit Password field. 3. Confirm the password. 4. Click Save and Close. Checking if the Correct System Password Was Entered Use View to start a session. If the site cannot be accessed, you may have made a mistake entering the password in the previous procedure. User Password 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab to view the list of users. 2. To update a user’s account, double-click the name in the User Name column. The Update User dialog box appears. 3. Enter the password in the Password field. A double-quote ( “ ) character cannot be used in a password. 4. Re-enter the password in the Confirm password field. 5. Click either: • • 6. Save and Close, to update the user’s password. Close, to cancel the update. You will be asked to confirm that the changes are to be ignored. Click OK on the message. Communicate the new password to the user(s) of the account. Results After the System Administrator assigns a password to a Rapid Eye unit operator: • • • • 204 The Password column shows set for that user. A password must be entered at every logon. Entering an illegitimate user ID/password combination produces a warning message. At the first log on to the View application, a local copy of the Rapid Eye Central database is made to the PC running View. A user cannot change the password while using View. Only users of the Admin application can change a password. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Note A user account password is encrypted in the Rapid Eye database. It is a combination of the User ID and password. This ensures a password always exists, even if the Password box is left empty. As a result, accessible, third-party tools such as MS-Access cannot be used to remove the Administrator’s password simply by loading a Rapid Eye database. Your system is protected against such elementary database tampering. Defense against criminal techniques, such as social engineering, operator negligence when managing passwords, and so on, are the operator’s responsibility. Administrator Password The procedure for adding/changing the Administrator account password is similar to the one for adding/changing another user account’s password. TIP! After a successful Rapid Eye installation, Honeywell recommends that the System Administrator add/change the Administrator user account password. Basic Security Changing the password to the Administrator account is an essential security precaution. The password should be carefully guarded against loss and changed regularly. The password protects against: • • The most basic hacking of Admin by unauthorized users. Inadvertent use of the clear storage feature by adding an important safeguard. For information about this feature, see Clearing Storage on page 151. Password Independence Accounts that are based on the Administrator account are not affected by changes to the Administrator’s password (see Default User on page 178). Such accounts have their own passwords. Accounts based on the Administrator account can still change the Administrator password (or any other). Setting the Administrator Account’s Password 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab to view the User Name list. You can ignore user names in the Settings Based On column. 2. Double-click Administrator in the User Name column. The Update User dialog box appears. Only the password can be changed for the Administrator account. The account name and its rights cannot be modified. 3. Enter the password in the Password field. A double-quote ( “ ) character cannot be used in a password. 4. Re-enter the password in the Confirm password field. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 205 Security for a Rapid Eye System 5. Click either: • • Save and Close, to update the Administrator password. Close, to cancel the update. You are asked to confirm that the changes are to be ignored. Click OK. Results After the System Administrator assigns a password to the Administrator account: • • • The Password column shows set at the Administrator line. The password must be entered every time that a user using that account logs on. If that user enters a user ID/password combination that is not valid, the user is warned with a message and returned to the logon dialog box. The first time that the Administrator account is used to log on to the View application, a local copy of the Central database is made to the PC running View. Sharing the Administrator Account When an organization’s security needs are limited and Rapid Eye software is used by very few people (one or two), you may elect to simply change the password of the Administrator account and not create any accounts for other users. What to Avoid The locking out of authorized, legitimate users from the Rapid Eye units on your Rapid Eye system is a worst-case scenario that requires many steps to fix, one of which is knowing the password to the Administrator account. See High-Security Considerations on page 212. Rights of User Accounts Like most Rapid Eye security features, limiting user rights, or limiting access to sites is optional. A Rapid Eye account can have as few or as many rights as are needed (see Figure 10-8). The Admin application is used to set the rights of all user accounts. These rights apply to: • • • Admin Maintenance View Your Rapid Eye System Administrator also defines the sites that a user is authorized to use, including the amount of time that can be spent connected to sites. 206 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Checking Rights Granted and Accessible Sites 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. Double-click a user’s line. The Update User dialog box appears, showing the rights defined for the account. Assigning Rights When Adding / Updating Accounts The rights are assigned in a single location, when adding or updating a user account (see Using Admin and View to Create a User Account on page 181). By default, new accounts do not have the Modify rights. See Figure 10-8 for a sample list of rights. Denying Access to Some Sites By default, a user account can access every site in your system. You can limit the user’s access to some of the sites. See Defining the Sites that Can Be Accessed on page 210. Rights of Users Based on Others You have the option to base user accounts on any other. The rights of all such users can then be modified together. A user account can also be based on the Administrator account. This grants all rights to that user, including use of the Admin application. Removing Rights When a right is removed, the Rapid Eye function associated to it is unavailable to the user. The user may log on to View, but commands will be unavailable or disabled. Rights only apply to sites that the user has been authorized to use. Figure 10-7 Summary of a User’s Rights on the Users Tab User account rights summary Sharing Accounts When an organization’s security needs are limited and the software is used by a very small number of people, your System Administrator may elect to create one account and share it among users. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 207 Security for a Rapid Eye System Right to Use Admin To use Admin, your account must be the Administrator account, or an account based on it. TIP! The set of rights in an account based on the Administrator account cannot be modified. Only the password can be changed. Granting Access to Admin 1. View the rights of a user account. 2. Select the Rights and site access are based on option. 3. In the box next to Rights and site access are based on, select Administrator with the drop-down arrow. 4. Click Save and Close. TIP! Why limit the use of Admin? a. The Administrator account has all user rights to all functions of View, and to every site identified in your Rapid Eye database. With such an account, a malevolent user can quickly disable your system or cover up unwarranted or illicit actions, such as deleting items in the alarm log. b. The Admin CD is used to install the user documents for Admin and the Rapid Eye unit. This information may exceed an operator’s need to know about your Rapid Eye system. c. Users of the Administrator account can remove an important safeguard to prevent inadvertently clearing storage. See Clearing Storage on page 151. Right to Use Maintenance Each of these rights are sensitive for system security. Each right only gives access to portions of a Maintenance Session (see Table 10-3). You can start a Maintenance Session in View with any one of these three rights. The tabs that appear in the Maintenance Session may differ depending on rights that are assigned. • • • 208 Modify configuration. Gives access to the tabs for making hardware configuration settings. These rights should be controlled in a Rapid Eye system. A user with these rights can turn recording off or set an NTSC system to PAL, jeopardizing the unit’s ability to record video. Modify security. Gives access to the Security tab. User has the right to click Update Security. Modify system settings. Gives access to the Statistics and System tabs. These rights should be controlled in a Rapid Eye system. A user can destroy all of the video and audio stored in a Rapid Eye unit by clicking Clear Storage on the Statistics tab (see Clearing Storage on page 151). It also controls the rebooting of units and upgrading files to a Rapid Eye unit. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Caution Your security officer and System Administrator must exercise vigilance if operators have accounts with enough rights to jeopardize the operation of a unit. Table 10-3 Right Needed a Maintenance Tasks and Rights of a User Account Task See... Page Time Unit Time Zone and Clock page 69 System configuration System Tab in a Maintenance Session page 157 Video; includes: picture, motion, PTZ and AGC General Camera Settings page 82 Serial devices Customer Data and Customer Device Events page 167 Eagle Audio Eagle Audio page 174 Hardware Hardware Report page 165 Audio Rapid Eye Audio page 172 Public display monitor Using Monitor Output 1 as a Public Display Monitor page 165 Events Events Defined page 215 Recording Schedule Scheduling Configuration page 123 Alarm Schedule Alarms and Scheduling page 127 Modify security Security Maintenance Reference page 76 Modify system settings Statistics Rapid Eye Unit Storage Statistics page 149 Clearing storage Clearing Storage page 151 System files System Files page 154 Modify configuration a The Administrator account has all rights, including these three. TIP! Why limit the use of maintenance? Operator error. Misuse of a Maintenance Session can lead to a complete loss of recorded video, compromized video recordings caused by disabling cameras, or the turning off of alarm reporting. See the sections listed in Table 10-3, above. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 209 Security for a Rapid Eye System Right to Use View Each function of View (excluding Maintenance) is subject to one of five rights. The most important rights for system security are marked with an asterisk (*). • • • • • • • • TIP! Live video. The right to obtain a live video feed from cameras at a site. This is a Rapid Eye system’s fundamental purpose. All Rapid Eye user accounts usually have this right. The amount of cameras that a user can access may be limited (see Limiting the Use of Cameras and Other Devices by Partitioning on page 211). Retrieve video. The right to search for and obtain recorded video feeds. This right also grants use of the Search for Events feature. Audio, listen. The right to monitor audio through a site’s audio hardware. Audio, talk. The right to broadcast audio through a site’s audio hardware. Use PTZ. The right to operate the pan, tilt and zoom (PTZ) commands on cameras that have this capability, during a Live Session. Use of this right requires the user to have the right to View Live Video. * Use outputs. The right to operate outputs (for controlling gates, lights and other facilities) during a Live Session. Use of this right requires the user to have the right to View Live Video. * Process alarms. The right to respond to alarms, using an alarm session to acknowledge and to reset alarms. Time limit. The right to make use of sites, but for a limited amount of time. Why limit the use of View? This depends on your organization’s security protocols. Perhaps some operators should only be allowed to monitor live video and not to view recorded video? Right to Access a Site A user account grants site access to either all sites or a subset of the sites in your Rapid Eye system. Rights to access sites can be modified, as explained in the next procedure. See Using Admin and View to Create a User Account on page 181. Defining the Sites that Can Be Accessed 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. To display the Update User dialog box, do one of the following: • Double-click the name of the user account that you want to update. - or - • 210 Select the user account that you want to update, then click either: toolbar, Update in the Actions menu, or press the F12 key. on the 3. In the Update User dialog box, click the User has restricted access option. 4. Select one or many sites by clicking the boxes next to the site names so that a checkmark appears (see Figure 10-9). The checkmark means that access to the site is granted to the account. 5. Click Save and Close. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide 6. Update security at each site you have denied access to. The procedure to update security is in Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit on page 153. TIP! Why deny or limit access to a site? This depends on your organization’s security protocols. An operator might be allowed to monitor only some sites, and so on. Limiting the Time that a Unit Can Be Used Figure 10-8 Setting an Account’s Session Time Limit Select to limit site access time Select the sites that can be accessed by the user Select the Time limit option and set the number of minutes that the user can access the sites for (see Figure 10-8, above). You can also set the default time limit for new users on the Options dialog box of the Admin application (see Figure 11-9). Select View  Options in the Admin application to open the Options dialog box. Select the Default time limit of a new User (in minutes) checkbox and then adjust the minutes as needed with the up and down arrows ( ). Limiting the Use of Cameras and Other Devices by Partitioning You can deny access to some or all devices at a site (including cameras and POS devices). By default, a user account can access every camera at a site. TIP! Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Why deny access to a device? This depends on your organization’s security protocols. Perhaps an operator should only monitor some cameras, and not others. 211 Security for a Rapid Eye System You need to have configured the devices at a site before you can limit their use in a user’s account. See General Camera Settings on page 82 to configure cameras and Configuring Other Hardware on page 151 to configure POS devices. 1. 2. Using Admin, click the Users tab. Display the Update User dialog box by either: • Double-clicking the name of the user account that you want to update. - or - • Selecting the user account that you want to update, then click either: toolbar, Update in the Actions menu, or press the F12 key. on the 3. In the Update User dialog box, select the User can access selected sites option. See Figure 10-9 for more information. 4. In the tree of sites below the User can access selected sites option, select a site by clicking the checkbox next to the name of the site. The checkmark that appears means that access to the site is granted to the user of the account. 5. Expand the site, as in Figure 10-9. In the branch of cameras and devices below the name of a site, select one or many devices. A checkmark means that access to the device is granted to the user of the account. 6. Click Save and Close. Figure 10-9 Limiting an Account’s Access to Devices Select the sites, cameras, and devices that the user can access. High-Security Considerations Your Rapid Eye unit could be left insufficiently protected, so that performance or security may be compromised. To reduce the probability of this, Honeywell recommends that your System Administrator and your security officer check for situations such as the ones in Table 10-4. 212 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Physical Compromise As obvious as such security compromises may seem, they include: • Vandalism to Rapid Eye units or other hardware. See Tamper Detection on page 139 for more information. Power outages beyond the range of an uninterruptible power supply (UPS). Placing cameras where direct sunlight, dew, frost or reflections can hamper visibility. Placing cameras at an outside window and in a room that remains lit during evenings. Reflection from the window can hamper outside visibility. Objects placed to obstruct a camera’s view. See Tamper Detection on page 139. • • • • Table 10-4 Security Situations Situation Preventative and / or Last Resort Measures Vandalism • • Schedule onsite equipment inspections. Use access control to control Rapid Eye unit access. Vandalism or operator error • Schedule regular connections to each Rapid Eye unit in your security system. Using many Rapid Eye databases • Through training, discourage the use of many databases. Using more than one database and using different system passwords is beyond the product’s design and is unsafe. As a last resort, use the last valid password utility, as explained in Last Valid Password on page 202. • Breach of trust • • • Refrain from communicating a system password to a System Administrator running another Rapid Eye system. Ask security personnel to exercise vigilance if operators have accounts with enough rights to jeopardize the data on a Rapid Eye unit. As a last resort, contact Rapid Eye technical support for help, as explained in For Questions on page 35. Compromising Video Recording Setting the Recording of a camera to OFF. Video is not recorded when Recording of a camera is turned OFF. This is easy to detect, each camera shows a recording meter during a Live Session (see Figure 10-10). Figure 10-10 Identifying Camera Recording Status Camera recording statuses during a live session: Camera is not recording Camera is recording normally Camera is recording with boosted settings If an operator turns Recording to OFF, Live viewing would still work but no recordings would be available to review if there was an incident. Such an abuse can be traced, as explained in Tracing Events on page 219. See also General Camera Settings on page 82. Camera brightness. Video may be compromised when the brightness setting for a camera is set too high or too low. Your PTZ cameras may be installed in a manner that they can be turned away from the sun. See the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 213 Security for a Rapid Eye System Resetting the time/date. It can become complicated to analyze video after the time and date of a Rapid Eye unit is changed. Recordings with incorrect time and date stamps could be of no use in a court of law. You can trace events leading to such abuse of the unit, as explained in Tracing Events, page 219. See also Unit Time Zone and Clock, page 69. Scheduling cameras to not record. See Scheduling Configuration, page 123. This feature is designed to efficiently use storage space. However, it can be abused to defeat security. Use of the Boost button can override a camera that is not scheduled to record. See Figure 10-10. Countermeasures An effective countermeasure strategy includes using Tamper Detection (page 139) and scheduling short Retrieval sessions on all cameras to check that Rapid Eye sites are recording as they are configured to. One can also check if the environment has diminished the effectiveness of a site. Verification can supplement tracing of events, as explained in Tracing Events on page 219. Boosted recording can override a unit to record a video feed from a camera with recording turned OFF (see Figure 10-10). Clearing Storage to Destroy Recorded Video and Deny Service Clearing a unit’s storage or one of its streams destroys all recorded video and, during the time that a unit is emptied (up to a few hours; see Clearing Storage on page 151), the Rapid Eye unit cannot show live video, record video, send alarms, and so on. Clearing storage requires use of the Administrator account password. Caution Honeywell recommends that you properly train users that have the right to use the Clear Storage or Clear Stream buttons. Compromising the Response to an Alarm Scheduling alarms to not trigger. See Alarms and Scheduling on page 127. This feature is designed to control some obvious false alarms; but, it can be abused to defeat security. Using more than one Rapid Eye database. Using a database, A, set to system password A with the LVP utility, to create a site definition for units protected by system password B, can lead to confusion if that user were to update security on the unit. The LVP utility does not change the system password on the unit, updating security does. Updating security with another A system password locks out all other View Operators who attempt to log on (using their usual B database), thus jeopardizing their ability to respond to alarms and to make requests for video clips/stills. Caution 214 Honeywell does not recommend using multiple databases, even if they are set to the same system passwords. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Compromising and Locking-Out a System Administrator The locking out of authorized, legitimate users from the Rapid Eye units on your Rapid Eye system, including the System Administrator, is a worst-case scenario for high-security organizations. Many steps are needed to do so (obtaining copies of Admin and View software, creating another database, and having knowledge of your system password). Even access to your Rapid Eye Central database, knowledge of Admin and of the Administrator account’s password could allow a malevolent user to change passwords for the Administrator’s account (and to the system), then update security on units, and locking everyone out. Circulating passwords only to the users that need them and utilizing access control are your best assets to combat this type of security breach. Countermeasures. If ever such a breach occurs, contact Rapid Eye technical support for help, as explained in For Questions on page 35. LocalView Another type of security breach can occur through LocalView, which can be used to change a unit’s LAN communication settings. Events Defined Figure 10-11 1. 2. Four Sources of Events Outside world event, such as detected motion. 3. Point-of-sales (POS) event, such as from an ATM. 4. View Operator event, such as unauthorized use of a site. Rapid Eye unit event, such as a power outage. READY ALARM HDD A Rapid Eye alarm station can receive alarms from many sources. Rapid Eye units provide notification of events. Events can be produced from four sources: Outside World event Rapid Eye’s motion detection (Motion Detection, page 133) and Honeywell Video Analytics (Tamper Detection, page 139) can trigger alarms. Connecting a unit to sensors for fire, water and so on, can also produce such events. Customer-device event Messages from a cash register, card swipe and so on, that can be sent to a Rapid Eye unit. See Customer Data and Customer Device Events, page 167. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 215 Security for a Rapid Eye System Rapid Eye Unit event For notifying a System Administrator of events at the unit or of some events from the IT environment. Extended power outages can also be monitored by connecting a Rapid Eye unit to an alarm panel. See Tracing Events on page 219. View Operator event An administrator can trace events caused by View operators, such as connecting to a site, and so on. Notification of such events is usually of more concern than video of that event. See Tracing Events on page 219. Setting an Event to Trigger an Alarm or To Be Logged When events occur, the Rapid Eye unit can respond in the following ways: The Event is Logged. The Rapid Eye unit logs the time of the event. These events are not listed in an alarm session. Sound an alarm in View. Alarms reach View operators either through an alarm station or during an alarm session. They are stored in the Rapid Eye database. See Figure 10-12. Do both. An event can sound an alarm and be logged. Have no effect. This is the default setting for most events. For the events that are logged by default, see Table 10-6, on page 219. Even when alarm hardware is connected to a Rapid Eye unit, an event is ignored until View is used to set it to trigger an alarm, to be logged or both. Setting an Alarm Setting events to trigger alarms in your system is an option that is turned off by default. Alternatively, events can be silently logged for administrative purposes. Figure 10-12 Alarms Are Entered into the Database after being Acknowledged An event is captured by a unit Events can be set up to trigger an alarm R E A DY AL ARM HDD Rapid Eye Database 216 Another option is to have events silently logged for future use Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Setting an Event to Report an Alarm 1. Start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Please wait until the System Operational message appears. 2. Depending on the type of event that you want to set, either: • • • Click the Events tab. More tabs will appear. Select a tab (Session, System, and so on) that lists the event that is to be set as an alarm. Click the Serial Devices tab. Select a device and one of its events. Click the Video tab. See Motion Detection, page 133, to set up motion detection. 3. To set the event to trigger an alarm, select the Alarm checkbox next to the event, so that it shows a checkmark. For a Customer-device event, click Update on the Serial Devices tab after selecting an Alarm or Log checkbox. 4. You also have the option of having the event entered into the log. To do so, select the Log checkbox so that it shows a checkmark. Who Can Set Alarms? To set events as alarms and/or to be logged, two items must be included in of the user’s account rights: • • The Modify configuration right, and Access to the site to be modified (see Rights of User Accounts on page 206). Who Can Receive Alarms? A different right is needed to use an Alarm session. A View operator needs a System Administrator to: • • Add the Process alarms right to the operator’s user account. This enables a View operator to receive, view, acknowledge and rearm alarms. See Right to Use Maintenance on page 208. Grant the operator(s) access to the site(s). Logging an Event 1. Start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Please wait until the System Operational message appears. 2. Depending on the type of event that you want to set, either: • • • 3. To set the event to create an entry in the event log, select the Log checkbox next to the event so that it shows a checkmark. • • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Click the Events tab. More tabs appear (see Table 10-5). Select the tab (Session, System, and so on) that lists the event that is to be set as an alarm. Click the Serial Devices tab. Select a device and one of its events. Select the Video tab, then click Motion. See Motion Detection on page 133 for motion detection settings. Inputs can be additionally configured as either NO, NC or EOL. For a Customer-device event, you must also click Update after selecting the Log checkbox. 217 Security for a Rapid Eye System Event Reference Table 10-5 Event Reference, by Source and Tab Source Event in Maintenance (Except Where Noted) Possible Causes: an Alarm or Log Entry Could Indicate... Outside World event System: no video recordinga A cut cable, dead camera, or power outage. Inputs: activate, input ports 1 to 16 Security sensor has been triggered or the unit is booting. Inputs: deactivate, input ports 1 to 16 Security sensor has been reset or the unit is booting. Video: signal unlock, cameras 1 to 16 Cut cable, hardware failure in a Rapid Eye unit, faulty camera, and so on. Can be momentary. Video: lockb, cameras 1 to 16 A buggy camera. The time since video was unlocked. Helps when troubleshooting. ActivEye: event or alarm An ActivEye client has notified the Rapid Eye unit of an ActivEye event or alarm. Motion: On the Video tab (not on the Event tab) An intruder is detected, a change in lighting, a fire, an explosion, vermin, and so on. Tamper Detection: On the Video tab (not on the Event tab) Tampering with a camera. Customer-device event User-defined: Not on the Event tab. On the Serial Devices tab Transaction made using hardware at a customer’s facility. View Operator event Session: connect, reject and disconnect Use/misuse of View to connect to or disconnect from a site. Maintenance: changes to security, time, storage, and so onc Use/misuse of Clear storage or Synchronize time by an operator or System Administrator. Outputs: activate, output ports 1 to 8 Use/misuse of an onsite device by a View operator (for example: remote locking of a gate). Outputs: deactivate, output ports 1 to 8 Use/misuse of an onsite device by a View operator (for example: unlocking a gate). System: no video recordinga Camera disabled by View operator. System: reboot Use/misuse of Reboot command. b Rapid Eye Unit event System: failure, self-restart, reboot a Power failure or catastrophic failure of a unit. System: No video recordinga Failure of a unit’s video hardware. System: time server, no synch, clock drift, and so on Failure of network or network’s time server. System: disk failure Warning of imminent failure of storage. Some events are repeated in the table because their source can vary. For example, an alarm triggered by an Outside World event can also be triggered by rebooting a unit. b A System Administrator can set a Video lock event to only be logged rather than trigger an alarm. c Some configuration settings can be changed onsite, using LocalView. These changes are not logged, nor do they trigger an alarm when the configuration event is set to do so. 218 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Table 10-6 Event: Default Settings for Log and Alarm Source Event Log Alarm View Operator event Session: connect, reject and disconnect off off Maintenance: configuration, security, system files, synchronize time, clear storage, clear stream All are logged; logging cannot be disabled off Outputs: activate, deactivatea off off Rapid Eye Unit event System: run-time failure, self-restart, reboot, no video recording, time server unusable, no synchronization in 24 hours, excessive system clock drift, SMART disk failure All are logged; logging cannot be disabled off Outside World event Inputs: activate, deactivate off off Video: signal lock, signal unlock off off ActivEye: event or alarm off off Motion: Not on Event tab, on the Video tab off off Tamper Detection: On the Video tab (not on the Event tab) off off User-defined: Not on Event tab, on the Serial Devices tab off Customer-device event a off Control Output 6 is unavailable as an event, due to its use by the Fault Relay. On a Rapid Eye Hybrid LT unit, the Fault Relay does not make use of a control output. Tracing Events Like most of the Rapid Eye security features, tracing events caused by a View Operator event or Rapid Eye Unit event is optional. You can also set a site to produce an alarm if these events occur. Alarms can be sent to specific PCs. See Rapid Eye Alarm Stations on page 227. Tracing these events is performed on a site-by-site basis. Use tracing to monitor: • • • Power outages. A site that regularly reboots or has long gaps in its recorded video archive can be monitored for power outages. A breach to site security. You can be warned about some damage, vandalism or destruction to a Rapid Eye site, due to hurricanes, fire, criminal activity, and so on. Operator error. Tracking critical operator actions that result in missing video can help when unidentified problems start occurring and you suspect operator error. Who Can Trace a Rapid Eye Unit or View Operator Event? By using the Administrator account—or an account based on it—your System Administrator has the Modify configuration right automatically and can record or report these or other events. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 219 Security for a Rapid Eye System To authorize other users to do so, the System Administrator can add the Modify configuration right to their user account. With this right, the operator can: • • • Start a Maintenance Session at a site Set events: to be logged, to trigger alarms or to be ignored, as needed Arm/disarm alarms Event Log A Rapid Eye Unit event is always logged, to help troubleshoot your system. Use an Event Search session to search the event log. Using an Event Session to Search the Event Log By default, some events are not set to be logged and no events are set to trigger alarms. To obtain positive results from an Event session, your organization’s System Administrator needs to set events to be logged or to trigger an alarm. See Logging an Event on page 217, and Setting an Event to Report an Alarm on page 217 for more information. 1. Using the View application, select a site in the Sites tab. 2. Click 3. Select events that you want to search for by clicking an event tab and selecting events (see Figure 10-13, Motion is selected). 4. Enter a date and time in the From and To fields: a. Select a part of the time to change (minutes, for example) and either enter a new value with the keyboard or use to change the value. b. Use the date drop-down arrow to open the calendar utility and select a date for the event search. 5. Click Start to perform the search. 6. Select an item in the Results pane. 7. Click Video, to obtain video from the time of the item. The video playback starts five seconds before the time of the event. Note 220 on the toolbar to display the Events window. The Start button is unavailable until the dates and times in the From and To fields are properly set to perform a valid search. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 10-13 Search for Events Window Enter dates and times in which to search for events Click to see video at the time of the event Working with Search Results You can use the search results to: • • • View video from the time of the events located by the search. Select a log entry and click Video. Print the log entry of an event. Select one or more events and click Print. Select a printer, if needed, and click OK. Select font information, if needed, and click OK. Copy the log entry into a *.txt file. Select one or more events and click Save. Enter a name for the txt file, select a location, and click Save. System Failure A Rapid Eye unit can be monitored for: • • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Failure to function Failure to record video 221 Security for a Rapid Eye System You can set the FAULT RELAY to trigger when these failures last for 19 minutes or more. An alarm panel or other external device can be preset to warn your organization if a failure occurs. A power failure also triggers the relay, but does so immediately. A system failure is not a Rapid Eye event but it can trigger Rapid Eye events. See System Monitor on page 158. A Rapid Eye Alarm Station Like most Rapid Eye security features, use of an alarm station is optional. An alarm station is a PC that is designated to receive alarms first, from one or more Rapid Eye units. View software needs to run on the PCs designated as alarm stations. Their setup is discussed in Rapid Eye Alarm Stations on page 227. To set up an alarm station, you might need to obtain some point-to-point connectivity information. Setting Response Priority for Alarm Notification After making an alarm station operational (see Making an Alarm Station Operational on page 243), notification of an event’s occurrence can be: • • • • Immediate. When Rapid Eye units are networked to an alarm station, or you are running an alarm session at the site when and where the alarm occurs, or your PC is set up for Live alarm sessions and you happen to be connected to the site where the alarm is triggered. Within the minute. Your Rapid Eye System Administrator has configured a dial-up Rapid Eye unit to call an alarm station running View as soon as possible, after an alarm. Should the alarm station be unavailable, an attempt to call it back is made every minute, until a connection to the alarm station is established. Deferred. When a Rapid Eye unit is not assigned to call an alarm station, the unit holds the alarms until you start an alarm session for the site. If deferral meets your organization’s needs, logging the events rather than having them trigger alarms could be a good alternative strategy. Indirect. A FAULT RELAY on a Rapid Eye unit can warn a System Administrator or Rapid Eye alarm station through an alarm panel. See System Monitor on page 158. PPP Connectivity TIP! Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) user names and passwords are only used in some dial-up connections. This procedure might not apply to your Rapid Eye system. 222 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Purpose PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) Dial-up Networking usernames and passwords are used for some dial-up connections. The PPP username and password for an alarm station usually differs from the PPP username and password needed to access a RAS server. The following situations may apply: • • • • The System Administrator includes the RAS server in the connection definition. • See RAS Server on page 56. • See also Dial-Up Technical Note on page 54. The Operator to RAS server connection is in front of one or more units. Using a connection to access a RAS server before using View is illustrated in sections: • Using a RAS Server Before Connecting to Units on page 58. • Dial-Up Technical Note on page 54. A unit connecting by dial-up to an alarm station’s modem. To automate the process of a Rapid Eye unit sending alarms to the View application over telephone lines, use Admin to enter the PPP username and password for a PC in the definition of an alarm station. See Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 234. A unit connecting by dial-up to a RAS server that is in front of a Rapid Eye alarm station. Using an alarm callback that includes a RAS server is illustrated in RAS Connection to an Alarm Station on page 241. Denying Access There may be situations when a specific user account must have access quickly denied for a Rapid Eye site (for security reasons, termination, and so on). If your Rapid Eye system is accessed using a laptop, or by many PCs on your network, it could be inconvenient to physically prevent a rogue user from accessing the Rapid Eye software. The best solution is to Deny access to sites for the account, as explained in Denying Access to a User of Your Rapid Eye System on page 224. This is quicker than deleting the rogue account and more effective than changing the account’s password. Stopping a User in Session On networked units, you can end a rogue user’s use of sessions (maintenance, live video, and so on) by using the Admin and View applications in combination. See Stopping a Session on a Networked Rapid Eye Unit on page 225 for more information. Stopping Sessions on Units that Use Modems Rapid Eye sessions on a unit that is only accessible by dial-up, cannot be interrupted in any way other than physically intervening. You must either apprehend the user or unplug the phone line that connects to the Rapid Eye unit’s modem. For high security needs, a remotely controlled telephone line switch can be used. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 223 Security for a Rapid Eye System Dealing with an Open Maintenance Session These solutions require running a Maintenance Session. If the user has left a Maintenance Session open on a station, a System Administrator’s efforts to rectify the situation are hampered. When creating accounts, you can plan to limit the amount of time that sites can be used by a user account. See Right to Access a Site on page 210 for more information. Outside Hackers To prevent someone who has a copy of Rapid Eye software outside of your organization from accessing your sites, change your system password (see System Password on page 194). Denying Access to a User of Your Rapid Eye System Caution Honeywell recommends the following procedure as the only expedient way to deny access to a user. Figure 10-14 Denying Access and Updating Security for Sites When this option is checked, this user cannot access any sites. Update security on each unit after selecting this option. 224 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. Double-click the name of the user who must be denied access to your site(s). The Update user dialog box appears (see Figure 10-14). 3. Select the Deny this account access to sites option so that it displays a checkmark. Click Save and Close. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide 4. Using View, start a Maintenance Session at a site where access must be denied. 5. Click Update security on the Security tab. See Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit on page 153 for more information. 6. Repeat step 4 and step 5 for each site which the user must be denied access to. 7. There is no harm in leaving the account in the database, for archival purposes. However, you do have the option of using Admin to delete the user’s account. Caution To deny access, you only need to update security at the sites the user must not access. On large systems, this can save the trouble of running multiple Maintenance Sessions. See Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit on page 153. Ineffective Strategies for an Unwanted User Caution • • Honeywell does not recommend the following strategies for dealing with unwanted users. They are explained so that they do not produce a false sense of security or are mistakenly used. For a correct strategy, see Denying Access to a User of Your Rapid Eye System on page 224. Changing the user’s password. For this to work, the unwanted user would have to first refresh the Local database or quit using View. Both are optional acts, so this is not an effective strategy. Deleting a user’s account (instead of denying access). This involves more steps than in the Denying Access procedure at the beginning of this section. After deleting the account, you would still have to change the system password (see System Password on page 194). As a result, you then need to update security at the sites that this user must not access, and communicate with your entire user base, so that they refresh their local databases. This is not an effective strategy. Stopping a Session on a Networked Rapid Eye Unit When unauthorized use of a Rapid Eye site is identified, you may need to stop a user in the middle of a session. 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. Double-click the name of the user who must be stopped. The Update user dialog box appears. 3. Either: • Select the Deny access to sites option so that it displays a checkmark. - or - • Remove the account’s rights by clicking the checkbox for each Right until each checkmark is removed. 4. Click Save and Close. 5. Using View, start a Maintenance Session at the site where access must be stopped. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 225 Security for a Rapid Eye System 6. On the Security tab, click Update Security. Removing Rapid Eye Software To remove Rapid Eye software from a PC, a Microsoft Windows procedure is used: 1. On the Windows desktop, open the Start menu. 2. Click Control Panel. 3. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. 4. On the Change or Remove Programs tab, use the scroll bar to locate the Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT program. Select either: • Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT Admin and View [version number]. - or - • 5. Click Change/Remove. Follow the InstallShield utility instructions to remove the software from the PC. Caution 226 Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT View [version number]. It is not recommended that you use Windows Explorer to delete Rapid Eye executable files. Rapid Eye software uses registry keys that may also need to be removed. Please use the above procedure to remove the software. 11 Rapid Eye Alarm Stations Overview Like most Rapid Eye security features, use of alarm stations is optional. A Rapid Eye alarm station can receive alarms from one Rapid Eye unit or many. Customizing a PC to be an Alarm Station Use the Admin application to designate a PC as an alarm station. A Rapid Eye unit that is set to trigger alarms (see Events Defined on page 215), can be directed by your Rapid Eye System Administrator to send its alarms to a designated PC (alarm station). Note You should have user accounts and at least one site configured before setting up an alarm station. You will need users to use the alarm station and a site to send the alarms. Checklist to Configure a Rapid Eye Alarm Station 1. Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports on page 228. 2. Identifying and Defining a Connection on page 229. An Alarm station can be reached over either a: • • 3. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Network Connection to an Alarm Station, page 231, or Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station, page 234. Making an Alarm Station Operational on page 243. 227 Rapid Eye Alarm Stations Alarm Station Operator Requirements View operators who deal with alarm stations should have the rights to: • • Process alarms. See Granting More or Less Rights to an Account on page 185, and Right to Use View on page 209. Access the sites that call the alarm station. See Right to Access a Site on page 210. System Administrator Requirements Before your System Administrator designates an alarm station, they need: • • • An IP address. The IP address of an alarm station on the same network as the Rapid Eye units (see Figure 11-2). Or, A Telephone number. The telephone number that Rapid Eye units dial to reach a modem on an alarm station. Or, Both. For connecting to the modem of a remote access service (RAS) server, your System Administrator needs the RAS server’s telephone number and IP address of the networked PC used as an alarm station. Caution Let your network administrator know that alarms are sent to port 10,003. This port should be left open in your organization’s firewall for the sockets used by Rapid Eye alarms. For other ports that may be needed, see the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide or Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports 1. Using Admin, click the Alarm Stations tab. 2. To open the Add Alarm station dialog box (see Figure 11-1) and start adding an alarm station, do one of the following: • • • 228 Click on the toolbar. Click Add in the Actions menu. Right-click the pane and select Add from the menu that appears. 3. Enter a name in the Station Name box. 4. Select the checkbox for each site that reports to the alarm station in the Sites that Report to this Station field. 5. You are now ready to define a connection (see page 230) and make the alarm station operational (see page 243). Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 11-1 Adding an Alarm Station Reducing Alarm Station Complexity by Adding Alarm Station Definitions Adding Alarm Station Definitions For View operators that use sites in many different areas, you have the option of creating two (or more) alarm station records to shuttle alarms to the same PC. Duplication can reduce complexity, especially where customized dial-up connections are needed. For example, you could have one definition for local sites, and another for sites in other cities. Use Descriptive Names To further avoid complexity, use descriptive names such as [location name] units or [city name] units (Chicago sites or Illinois sites). Identifying and Defining a Connection Caution Honeywell recommends that System Administrators check if their organization allows the type of connection they plan to use. For example, your organization may not allow connecting by modem to a PC on its network if this bypasses a firewall. Enter either dial-up information, an IP address, or both (as listed in Table 11-1) in the Connection area of the Add Alarm Station dialog box (Figure 11-1). Connection data is compulsory when adding an alarm station. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 229 Rapid Eye Alarm Stations Table 11-1 Defining a Connection to an Alarm Station For a Connection to... Dial-Up IP Address See... Alarm station modem  n/a page 234 Alarm station modem using an irregular area code, and so on  n/a page 237 and page 62 Networked alarm station n/a  page 231 Server modem, with alarm station networked to it   page 241 Network address translation n/a  page 232 Table 11-2 Connection Information for a Rapid Eye Site to an Alarm Station To Set Up Alarm Station Using... A System Administrator Needs... Identical dial-up calls to on alarm station’s modem from Rapid Eye units reporting to it The alarm station’s: • Telephone number • PPP user name and password Various local, long distance or international dial-up calls, to the same alarm station’s modem The alarm station’s: • Telephone number • PPP user name and password To adjust the alarm station’s telephone number in the site definition. Network access The alarm station’s IP address Dial-up to RAS server, to access alarm station on server’s (remote) network (1) The Rapid Eye alarm station’s: • IP address (2) The RAS server’s: • Telephone number • PPP user name and password Network address translation The IP addresses for both the Rapid Eye alarm station and the internet router. Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) Fields in an Alarm Station’s Definition Scope This feature is for use in complex systems involving many Rapid Eye Hybrid HD, Rapid Eye Hybrid LT and older Rapid Eye units using modems and a RAS server to connect to a number of alarm stations. General Case For simple systems involving only a few units, Honeywell recommends that static PPP User Names and Passwords be typed in an alarm station’s definition. 230 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide PPP Fields Can Be Left Blank When adding or updating a Rapid Eye alarm station, you have the option of leaving the PPP fields blank. The sites that report to that alarm station will use their site’s name for PPP fields that are left blank. Updating Unit Security and Network Routers For this feature to take effect, your organization’s Rapid Eye System Administrator needs to update security on each unit that plans to use alarm stations where PPP fields were left blank. Use of this feature involves reconfiguring network routers to allow the unit names or passwords through for further processing. Network Connection to an Alarm Station TIP! Your Rapid Eye site might not need this type of connection to an alarm station. For some installations, a dial-up connection would meet your requirements. For other means of connecting to an alarm station, see Table 11-2 on page 230. Figure 11-2 1. Alarms Sent to an Alarm Station’s IP Address Over a Network Alarm Station Make note of the alarm station’s IP address. 4. Alarms sent from Rapid Eye units can now be received by the alarm station. REA DY ALARM HDD Rapid Eye Database Admin Station 2. Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT unit Remote View Station Running Admin, enter the alarm station’s IP address into a Rapid Eye database. 3. Use View to run a Maintenance session on each Rapid Eye unit. Setting Up a Network Connection to an Alarm Station 1. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 While adding or updating an alarm station definition in the Add/Update Alarm Station dialog box, select the Use Existing Network Connection option. 231 Rapid Eye Alarm Stations 2. Enter the alarm station’s IP address in the IP Address field. An IP Address is all that is needed for a successful network connection. 3. Click Save and Close. In the Alarm Stations tab’s Connection Method column, the first letter of network appears in parentheses: (n), followed by the IP address used to connect to the alarm station. 4. To finish preparing the alarm station, see Making an Alarm Station Operational on page 243. Network Address Translation for Alarm Stations A connection to one or many Rapid Eye alarm stations, using one IP address, can be made by using network address translation (NAT) and port address translation (PAT), a one-to-many address translation. This is useful to connect to alarm stations through: • • • A WAN The Internet Another segment of the same LAN. Figure 11-3 Receiving Alarms from a Unit Over a WAN or the Internet Wide area network (WAN) Router’s outside interface Rapid Eye unit, sending an alarm. The connection uses a router’s outside IP address and source port: alarm station C - 56080, alarm station D - 56090. READY ALARM HDD Router’s inside interface Internet Router. Map each alarm station’s source port to its destination port plus a LAN IP. Router interfaces: outside IP - 162.112.99.12, inside IP - 192.168.0.1. Rapid Eye alarm station C. Destination Port: 10003. LAN IP: 192.168.0.78. Mask: 255.255.255.0. Gateway: 192.168.0.1. Rapid Eye alarm station D. Destination Port: 10003 (same as alarm station C). LAN IP: 192.168.0.78. Mask: 255.255.255.0. Gateway: 192.168.0.1. IP Addresses The key is to configure a router to translate and map the Callback’s source IP port. The Network Administrator of the destination’s LAN can supply a System Administrator with the outside IP address of the internet router. IP Port Callbacks to alarm stations on a remote LAN are identified by the value of the Callbacks Source IP Port, in the Add/Update Alarm Station dialog boxes shown in Figure 11-4. Each alarm station on a remote LAN needs to have a different Callback value. 232 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Mapping IP Port in Network’s Router For each Rapid Eye alarm station, one port mapping is needed when translating a network address. Using Admin to Prepare a Rapid Eye Unit for NAT 1. Using Admin, configure the connection to an Alarm Station. Assign the router’s outside IP address to the IP Address field (see Figure 11-4). Figure 11-4 Connecting Through a WAN to an Alarm Station on a LAN Internet Router Use router’s outside IP address (WAN) Use router’s inside IP address (to LAN) 2. Enable the Use Network Address Translation option. 3. Assign a value to the Callbacks Source Port. In Figure 11-4, for example, the value of Callbacks has been changed from 10,003 (the default) to 56,080. The source port value must be below 65,532. 4. Select the Rapid Eye sites that report alarms to the alarm station. 5. Click Save and Close. In the Alarm Stations tab’s Connection Method column, a (d) appears, standing for dial-up, followed by the telephone number that calls the RAS server; then an (n), standing for network, followed by the IP address of the Rapid Eye alarm station. 6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 for other alarm stations on the same LAN. 7. Use the router’s software to map each alarm station’s source port to the corresponding destination port, plus the alarm station’s LAN IP. See Table 11-3, below, or Figure 11-3, on page 232. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 233 Rapid Eye Alarm Stations Table 11-3 Router Mappings: Example for Unit Callback to Alarm Stations Admin setting to: destination NAT Port (to network router) Network device: mappings Router’s Outside IP (network constant) Physical Port Inside IP (unit & firewall) (alarm station) Alarm station C Callback Port: 56,080 164.178.32.59  10,003a 10.1.0.78  10,003a 10.1.0.79 Alarm station D Callback Port: 56,090 map as above a Alarms are sent to port 10,003. For other ports used by Rapid Eye, see the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide or Rapid Eye™ Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station Figure 11-5 Rapid Eye Unit Calls an Alarm Station to Report an Alarm POTS or ISDN Rapid Eye Alarm Station Rapid Eye unit READY ALARM HDD Modem Modem Preparing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station Modem Rapid Eye units can use a telephone line to connect to the modem of an alarm station, or its RAS server. Telephone lines can be either a plain old telephone system (POTS), or higher speed integrated services digital network (ISDN). You also need to know the telephone number to reach that modem. Microsoft Windows To send alarms over a dial-up connection, you will need to obtain a point-to-point protocol (PPP) username and password for the PC used as an alarm station, or for its RAS server, from their Microsoft Windows operating system. See Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) Fields in an Alarm Station’s Definition on page 230. 234 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Setting Up a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station 1. Add or update an alarm station definition (as explained in Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports, page 228). The IP Address field is left empty for a dial-up connection to an alarm station, except if a remote access service (RAS) server—apart from the alarm station—is part of the connection. For RAS servers, see RAS Connection to an Alarm Station on page 241. 2. Select the Use Dial-up Networking option. 3. Leave the Country Code as (dialing same country), unless the Rapid Eye unit is in a different country than the alarm station. Caution Honeywell recommends using the (dialing same country) option. Do not use your country’s name, such as United States of America (1), unless the alarm station is in a different country from the Rapid Eye unit. Figure 11-6 Area Code Needed to Connect to a Rapid Eye Alarm Station 4. Enter the alarm station’s area code in the Area Code (City Code) field. 5. Enter the alarm station’s telephone number in the Phone Number field. 6. Enter the alarm station’s PPP User Name and PPP Password in their fields. These can be obtained from your network administrator, as indicated in Overview, page 227. 7. Enter the PPP password a second time in the Confirm PPP Password field. 8. Click Save and Close. In the Alarm Stations tab’s Connection Method column, a (d) appears, standing for dial-up, followed by the telephone number that calls the Rapid Eye alarm station. 9. To finish preparing the alarm station, see Making an Alarm Station Operational on page 243. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 235 Rapid Eye Alarm Stations Entering Area Codes in Site and Alarm Station Definitions When the country and area codes of an alarm station match those of the sites reporting to it, calls to the alarm station are considered local. If they do not match, a long distance code (1 by default plus an area code) is used to make the call. This is illustrated in Figure 11-7. TIP! Long distance or local, Honeywell recommends that you enter long distance codes for alarm stations and for Rapid Eye sites. The software can compare the phone numbers more easily that way, suppress their display automatically as needed, and avoid processing an error. Figure 11-7 236 Connection for an Alarm Station Shown in Site Definition Window Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Dial-Up to Another Area Code An example, shown in Table 11-4, uses an alarm station in Chicago, Illinois, and Rapid Eye units in Chicago and Fargo, North Dakota. Note that comparing telephone numbers without area codes can produce a local call when a long-distance call is needed. Table 11-4 Matching Area Codes for Sites and Alarm Stations Rapid Eye Unit Alarm Station (Chicagoa) Match Result Enter: 773 (Chicago) Enter: 773 (Chicago) Yes OK: 555-1212 Enter: 773 (Chicago) Code not entered No OK, local: 555-1212 Enter: 701 (Fargo) Enter: 773 (Chicago) No OK: 1-773-555-1212 (Fargo) code not entered (Chicago) code not entered Yes (?) Error; a long distance call is needed a One of the area codes for Chicago is 773. Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station Before customizing a dial-up connection, check your alarm station definition, as explained in Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 234. You do not need to customize a long distance code when a unit uses regular long distance. One or many such sites can call-in alarms to the same alarm station without concern. By default, Rapid Eye makes local calls when long distance codes match. You can add a long distance or toll-free code, site-by-site, as needed, in the Update Station to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box. See Figure 11-8, below and Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 62. Irregular Area Code Use Why customize? When a unit is not in the same area code as its alarm station. Sometimes a local call can be used when the alarm station is close by. You can customize an alarm station’s: • • Long distance codes, for irregular and toll-free uses. Dialing speed, by using a delay code. - and/or - • Telephone exchange, at the Rapid Eye site or at the alarm station. A copy of the telephone number in the alarm station definition is available for customization at each site definition, in the Report Alarms to these Alarm Stations pane. For example, in Figure 11-8, long distance and Chicago area codes 1 773 were added to the local number, for a site that requires an irregular long distance call within one area code. A customized number is not shared with other sites. The customization is shown by an asterisk. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 237 Rapid Eye Alarm Stations Figure 11-8 TIP! Customizing the Dial-Up to an Alarm Station in the Site’s Definition The alarm station telephone number in the site definition is the one that is actually used to dial to an alarm station. Alternatively, see Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 62. Using a Local Call Across Area Codes Customization is needed when your telephone company does not require a long-distance call for calling another area code. Remove the long-distance code for a remote Rapid Eye unit, site-by-site, as needed, in the Update Station to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box, obtained by updating the alarm station on the Update Site dialog box. See Figure 11-8, on page 238, and Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 62. Using Toll-Free Numbers Customization is needed when toll-free numbers match and dial-up is used to reach units or call in alarms. 238 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Using a Long Distance Call in One Area Code Customization is needed when your telephone company requires a long-distance call within an area code. You can add the area code for a local Rapid Eye unit, site-by-site, as needed, in the Update Station to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box, obtained by updating the alarm station on the Update Site dialog box. See Figure 11-8, on page 238, and Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 62. Using a Long Distance Call with Regular Mixed Area Codes You do not need to customize Rapid Eye units that use regular long distance when in different area codes. The units can call-in alarms to the same alarm station without concern. Delaying the Speed of Dialing You can add one or more commas to a telephone number to delay further dialing by one-second increments. For example: 9,,, 555 -1212, dials nine followed by a three-second pause (indicated by the three commas) before the rest of the number is dialed. Telephone Exchange A telephone exchange might be a component in the connection chain between a Rapid Eye site and an alarm station. Find out if your system has an exchange at the Rapid Eye site, at the alarm station, or at both ends. Telephone Exchange at an Alarm Station In the alarm station definition, add an extension suffix in the Phone Number box, after the telephone number. A delay might be needed to give the exchange time to answer, before any exchange commands or the extension are dialed (see Delaying the Extension Suffix on page 240). Telephone Exchange at a Rapid Eye Site A prefix number is the extra telephone keystroke, such as a 9 or an 8, that needs to be dialed to reach an outside telephone line. For Rapid Eye units on a telephone exchange using the same alarm station, either: • The exchange is shared. In the alarm station definition, add a prefix in the Phone Number box, before the telephone number. You can use commas, as needed, to delay the dialing of the extension until the alarm station’s exchange answers. See Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 234. - or - Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 239 Rapid Eye Alarm Stations • The exchange is not shared. You will have to add the prefix before the telephone number, site-by-site, as needed, in the Update Station to Call in Case of Alarms box, obtained by updating the alarm station on the Update Site dialog box. This is illustrated in Figure 11-8, on page 238 and in Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 62. Delaying the Extension Suffix To delay dialing to the extension, enter commas in the Phone Number box of the alarm station definition, as needed. Each comma adds a one-second delay. For example: 9,,, 555-1212,,,,,,,, 226, introduces an eight second delay (eight commas would produce eight seconds of delay) before dialing the final 226 extension. See the previous section, Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 234, for more information. International Dial-Up Long-distance prefixes are used for units that dial-up to alarm stations. Your Rapid Eye site might not need this type of customization for its dial-up connection to an alarm station. For other means of connecting to an alarm station, see Table 11-2, on page 230. Planning for a Few International Units If only a few units reporting to an alarm station are outside of the alarm station’s country, it is more effective to add the prefixes site-by-site, as needed. Add the prefixes to the Update Station to Call in Case of Alarms box, opened by updating the alarm station on the Update Site dialog box. See Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 62. Alarm Station for Many International Units If their are many international units reporting to an alarm station and they are all in the same country, you have the option of changing the long distance prefixes for out-of-country and in-country dialing (see Figure 11-9). Changing Long-Distance Prefixes Long distance prefixes only affect connections from units to alarm stations. Connections from View to units will not be affected. 240 1. Select Options from the View menu of the Admin application. 2. As needed, enter a new In-country long-distance prefix or Out-of-country long-distance prefix in their fields. For example, Figure 11-9 shows the prefixes 1 and 0,1,1. Foreign prefixes for alarm station dial-up connections vary depending on the country. Note that commas can be used to introduce a delay in the dial-up. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 11-9 International Prefixes for Dial-Up in Rapid Eye Software Creating Extra Alarm Station Definitions The simplest solution when many international sites need customization is to create two (or more) alarm station definitions that shuttle alarms to the same PC. For example, one alarm station records alarms from international sites in country a, and another alarm station from sites in country b, as needed. You can then add whichever alarm station is most appropriate for a site, on a site-by-site basis. To create alarm station definitions, see Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports on page 228. When most units are outside the operator’s country, it is best to change the country code in the alarm station definition (see Setting Up a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 235). RAS Connection to an Alarm Station Figure 11-10 Sending Alarms Through a RAS Server to an Alarm Station RAS Server Modem POTS or ISDN Rapid Eye site RAS Server LAN Rapid Eye Alarm station READY ALARM HDD Modem Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 241 Rapid Eye Alarm Stations A Rapid Eye site may need to connect to a remote access service (RAS) server to reach a Rapid Eye alarm station. Figure 11-11 shows a telephone number to a server’s modem. The number is dialed first and point-to-point protocol (PPP) authentication occurs. Alarms can then reach the alarm station using the unit’s IP address (as in Figure 11-11). Figure 11-11 RAS Configuration for an Alarm Station Rapid Eye unit’s IP Address Telephone number to RAS server’s modem Network Administrator Requirements Alarms are sent to port 10,003. This port should be left open in your organization’s firewall, for the sockets used by Rapid Eye alarms. TIP! Your Rapid Eye site might not need this type of connection to an alarm station. For other means of connecting to an alarm station, see Table 11-2, on page 230. Setting Up a Connection to a RAS Server 1. While adding or updating an alarm station definition (as explained in Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports, page 228), you will see the Add/Update Alarm Station dialog box. Enter the alarm station’s IP Address in its field (see Figure 11-11). 2. Select the Use Dial-up Networking option. 3. Leave the Country Code as (dialing same country), unless the Rapid Eye unit is in a different country than the RAS server. Caution 4. 242 Honeywell recommends using the (dialing same country) option. Do not use your country’s name, such as United States of America (1), unless the alarm station is in a different country from the Rapid Eye unit. Enter the RAS server modem’s telephone number in the Phone Number field. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide 5. Enter the RAS server’s area code in the Area Code field, as in Figure 11-11. 6. Obtain the PPP User Name and PPP Password of Rapid Eye Alarm Stations that use a modem. This information is either kept by your network administrator or set by the user of the workstation in the Windows Dial-up Networking program. Enter one of the RAS server’s PPP User Name and its PPP Password in their fields. This authorization is obtained from the network administrator responsible for the RAS server’s network, as indicated in Overview on page 227. 7. Enter the PPP password a second time in the Confirm PPP Password field. 8. Click Save and Close. In the Alarm Stations tab’s Connection Method column, a (d) appears, standing for dial-up, followed by the telephone number that calls the RAS server; then an (n), standing for network, followed by the IP address of the Rapid Eye alarm station. 9. The next step is Making an Alarm Station Operational, page 243. Customizing a RAS Dial-up Connection To customize a RAS dial-up (irregular or toll-free use of long distance codes, and so on), use the same procedures and suggestions as indicated in Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station, page 237, and International Dial-Up on page 240. Processing a Dial-up Callback When a Rapid Eye unit uses telephone lines to communicate with a Rapid Eye alarm station, the unit needs to use the alarm station’s PPP user name and password for dial-up networking. After answering its modem, the alarm station must recognize the PPP user name and password before the Rapid Eye unit can access the View application. Making an Alarm Station Operational After adding an alarm station (see page 228), and defining how a Rapid Eye unit connects to it (see page 229): • • • • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 You need to update security for each Rapid Eye unit involved. See Updating Security on a Rapid Eye Unit on page 153. An alarm station is of little use if you have not set any events to trigger alarms. See Events Defined on page 215. Use the Update Site dialog box in the Admin application, to prioritize alarm stations. See Sequencing Site Alarm Stations on page 60 for more information. Operators of PCs not designated as alarm stations can also receive alarms sent by a Rapid Eye unit by running an Alarm session with the View application. To find out how to run an Alarm session, see the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide. 243 Rapid Eye Alarm Stations Using More Than One Alarm Station Definition If enough sites need customization, you could create two (or more) alarm station definitions to shuttle alarms to a PC. For example, one alarm station for long distance calls and another for local sites within the same calling area. To avoid confusion, use descriptive names, such as: Fire sensors - local calls, Fire sensors - long distance, and so on. You can then add the alarm station most appropriate for a site, on a site-by-site basis. Creating alarm station definitions is explained in Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports, page 228. For more information, see Addressing Alarms to an Alarm Station on page 60, and Quickly Assigning a Site to Many Alarm Stations on page 61. Creating Extra Alarm Station Definitions for the Same PC A System Administrator has the option of creating two (or more) alarm station definitions to shuttle alarms to the same PC (for example, one for local sites, and another for remote sites). To avoid complexity, use descriptive names such as: local sensors and remote sensors. To create alarm station definitions, see Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports on page 228. Disconnecting When Alarms Are in Progress Closing View or disconnecting a session after a successful alarm callback voids that callback. This can occur due to power failure, user action, and so on. You can still view the alarms in an alarm session. If you have set up your alarm handling options to Automatically Rearm Alarms (see Overview of Automatic Clip Creation and Rearm Features on page 245), the alarms will not be automatically rearmed if the unit is disconnected during a session. You will have to open another alarm session to manually rearm the alarms. Successfully Listing Alarm Callbacks After an Interruption Run View and start an alarm session to list and work with the alarms. See the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide to find out how to run an Alarm session. 244 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Setting Up an Alarm Station for Alarm Callback Keep the following points in mind when setting up an Alarm Station for alarm callback: • At any point during alarm callback, only one Alarm Station can have Alarm callbacks reported at one time even if we have multiple Alarm stations configured for a unit. Alarm Stations will be notified in the sequence that you setup (see Cascading Alarm Stations and Priority on page 60). If an Alarm session is kept open in the Remote View application in any of the user PCs, then the Alarms are reported in the Alarm session only, rather than to Alarm Callback stations. Open Alarm sessions take the first priority (see Setting Response Priority for Alarm Notification on page 222). If no alarm sessions are open, alarm callbacks will go to the Alarm station. If you are trying to change the alarm station, then make sure that you use one of the following two steps: • • a. Update Security for the unit  rearm all Alarms reported in the alarm session  reboot the unit. b. Update Security for the unit  make sure no new alarms are generated (to avoid alarm generation, disable all of the events reporting alarms)  rearm any pending Alarms reported through an alarm session (if necessary)  pause for 10 to 15 seconds  then try enabling all the events which generates alarms. Note The above steps a and b, are to avoid any racing conditions, between switching over from the old alarm station to a new alarm station. Overview of Automatic Clip Creation and Rearm Features You can set up your system to automatically create video clips for input activated and motion alarms and then automatically rearm the alarms after the clip is created. Setting Up Automatic Clip Creation To have your system automatically create clips for input activated and motion alarms: 1. Open the Alarm Handling Options window (see Figure 11-12). Open the View menu of the Remote View application  Options  Alarm Handling. 2. Place a checkmark in the Automatic Clip Creation on Alarm Callback box. 3. If needed, change the Pre-Trigger Duration and/or Post-Trigger Duration values. These values determine the number of seconds before and after an alarm that will be included in the automatically created clip. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 245 Rapid Eye Alarm Stations Figure 11-12 Alarm Handling Options Make sure that the file location for saved clips exists to confirm that they will be saved. Setting Up the Automatic Rearm Alarms Feature Rapid Eye units with the automatic rearm feature support automatically rearming Input Activated and Motion alarms from a Rapid Eye unit after automatic clip creation (see Setting Up Automatic Clip Creation on page 245). If the View application is shut down before automatic clip creation is completed, the corresponding alarms (Input Activated and Motion) will be automatically rearmed the next time the application is opened. The user can enable the Automatic Rearm feature from the Alarm Handling Options window (opened with the Rapid Eye View application, View menu  Options  Alarm Handling), shown in Figure 11-12. Please note that: • • • 246 When the Rapid Eye software is installed and started for the first time, it does not have any information about the alarms that are not rearmed. Therefore automatically rearming alarms will not be supported on the initial startup. After the application has been running and alarm callbacks are received, it maintains information about the status of the alarms (Rearmed / Not Rearmed). If the application shuts down in the middle of clip creation, pending Input Activated and Motion alarms will be automatically rearmed the next time the application starts. The Automatic Rearm feature is system dependent. That is, this feature will be supported only from the server that has been configured as the Alarm Station. While trying to automatically rearm, if any of the sites are unreachable, alarms from those sites will remain in their non-rearmed state. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Removing an Alarm Station 1. Using Admin, click the Alarm Stations tab. 2. Select the alarm station that you want to delete. 3. To remove the selected Alarm Station, do one of the following: • • • 4. Click on the toolbar. Click Delete on the Actions menu. Press the Delete key on the keyboard. You will be asked to confirm the deletion. Click Yes to continue or No to cancel. Disabling/Enabling the Dial-Up Server For some mission critical applications, your IT personnel may wish to disallow access to the Microsoft Windows procedure to disable and enable a RAS server on a PC. Alarms from a De-Listed or Unregistered Unit Situations View operators are warned with a message when a call about an alarm is from a Rapid Eye unit that has been: • • Removed from a Rapid Eye database. Your Rapid Eye System Administrator can remove a Rapid Eye unit from a database. However, the de-listed unit that you have removed may still be operating at a customer site, set to call a PC designated as a Rapid Eye alarm station. Added without registration to a Rapid Eye database. To register a Rapid Eye unit, a View operator must invoke the first Maintenance Session on the unit. Even users without the right to use the commands of a Maintenance Session can start a Maintenance Session to register a unit. A message appears in both situations. When the operator receives the message, calls about the alarm have stopped. Tracing a Unit Sending an Alarm To trace a unit sending an alarm, either: • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 A View operator can make a note of the unit’s serial number and IP address indicated in the message. 247 Rapid Eye Alarm Stations - or • A System Administrator can consult the alarm log. Note Before de-listing a Rapid Eye unit from a database, Honeywell recommends that your System Administrator use the Admin application to remove alarm stations listed in a site definition. See Stopping a Site from Reporting to a Specific Alarm Station on page 248. Stopping a Site from Reporting to a Specific Alarm Station 1. Using Admin, select the Sites tab. 2. Double-click the site that you plan to remove. An Update Site dialog box appears. 3. Click in the Report Alarms to these Alarms Stations pane. The Add/Delete Stations to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box appears, displaying a list of alarm stations. Stations already assigned to the site are listed the Report Alarms to column. 4. To move alarm stations back to the available Alarm Stations column, either: • Select one or more station names in the Report Alarms to column, then click the left-arrow (<). - or - • Double-click the stations that you want to move. 5. Click Save and Close. The Update Site dialog box reappears, listing the alarm stations in the Report Alarms to these Alarm Stations pane. 6. You have the option of ending the site edit. To do so, click Close. The Admin window reappears, listing your system’s sites on the Sites tab. 7. Use the View application to start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye unit that you plan to remove. 8. Click Update Security on the Security tab of the Maintenance Session. Information from the Rapid Eye database is copied to the Rapid Eye unit. Please wait until Updated security appears in the Feedback field. 9. Close the Maintenance Session. 10. Using Admin, remove the site (see Deleting a Site on page 39). 11. Using View, click Refresh. 248 12 Archival Policies Use Archival Policies to archive data from multiple units at one remote view station and then store the archived video clips on either the local PC or a network server. This chapter covers creating immediate and scheduled archival policies, running an archival policy, playing back archived data, and viewing and searching through archival logs and past archive details. Note Rapid Eye does NOT currently support Archival Policies with IP cameras. IP cameras should not be included in any archival policies in your system. Only video from analog cameras will be archived for any policies you set up. Configuring an Archival Policy Configure an Archival policy to archive data from a unit: 1. Right-click in the Archival tab of the Admin application. Figure 12-1 2. Archival Tab of the Admin Application Click Add on the menu that appears. Note Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 You can also use the toolbar buttons to configure the archival policies. Click to Add, to Update, to Delete, and to Duplicate a policy. 249 Archival Policies 3. Enter a name for the archival policy in the Policy Name field (see Figure 12-2). Figure 12-2 4. Click the browse button ( Note 5. Select an archival server location in the Browse for Folder dialog box (Figure 12-3) and click OK. Browse for Archival Server Location The default Policy Type is Immediate. An Immediate policy must be manually run by an operator before any data is archived. If you want to set up automatic archiving on specific days and times: a. 250 ) to select a Server Location. The Server Location can be either a local folder or a network share path with write permission. If the folder or share path is not available during archiving, the policy will backup data in the working directory (the location where the application is installed) by default. Figure 12-3 6. Add Archival Policy Window Select Scheduled as the Policy Type with the drop-down arrow. The Add Scheduled Archival Policy window (Figure 12-4) opens. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide b. Use the Policy Type drop-down arrow to select either a Daily or Weekly scheduled archival policy. Figure 12-4 Scheduled Archive Policy Setup Daily Scheduled Archival Policy Note When a scheduled If you select a Daily scheduled archival policy, select the days of the week on which the archival policy will run. daily policy runs, it archives data of the previous day. The time that is archived is specified in the From and To fields of the Add Archival Policy window. Note When a scheduled Weekly Scheduled Archival Policy weekly policy runs, it archives data from the last 7 days at the times specified in the From and To fields of the Add Archival Policy window. If you are archiving on a Sunday, data is archived from the previous Sunday up to the Saturday prior to archiving. If you select a Weekly scheduled archival policy, select the day of the week on which the archival policy will run. c. Note d. Use the arrow buttons ( ) to change the time that the policy will Run At. It may take a considerable amount of time for archiving to complete. We recommend you schedule archiving to take place at times when no other operations are in progress (such as late at night). Click Save and Close. 7. Now use the Add/Delete button ( 8. Click the checkbox next to the sites or folders that you want associated with the archival policy (see Figure 12-5). Depending on what boxes are checked, you can associate all the sites, some of the sites, one site, or just a couple cameras at a site with the archival policy. Click Save and Close after your selections are made. Note Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 ) to add Sites Associated with this Policy. Rapid Eye does NOT currently support Archival Policies with IP cameras. IP cameras should not be included in any archival policies in your system. Only video from analog cameras will be archived for your policies. When selecting cameras to be archived (step 8, above), leave any IP cameras in your system unchecked. 251 Archival Policies Figure 12-5 Adding Sites to an Archival Policy Note If a site uses Cameras 1 to 16 will be listed here for each unit. The number of cameras displayed is not dependent on the number of cameras connected to the unit. Archiving will only occur for connected cameras. multiple connections, only the primary connection will be used for archiving. Note Honeywell and supported ONVIF IP cameras will not be archived with a policy. Only analog cameras should be selected. Point-of-sales (POS) streams are not listed here. By default, all POS streams are included in the archives. 9. The archival time is displayed next to the site names (see below). The default archival time is the half hour that includes the current time (time when policy was created). Figure 12-6 List of Sites Associated with a Policy Note Archiving will happen in the order listed here, one at a time. In this example, unit 001, or Main Unit, will archive first and unit 002 (Multi-Media RU) will archive next. Data is backed up between the From and To times listed. Note Archiving data during the daylight saving time switching period may cause some difficulty. We recommend that you create a clip specifically for the switching period to ensure the data is safely backed up. 10. To change the archival time (see Figure 12-7): a. Select one or more sites in the Sites Associated with this Policy table. b. Click c. Use the appropriate drop-down arrows to change the From and To archival Times. If you are using an Immediate Archival Policy, you can also change the From and To archival dates. Click Save and Close. Figure 12-7 Immediate Archival Policy Scheduled Archival Policy 252 . Updating a Site Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Note Clicking Save and Close in the Update Site In Policy window will save the entire policy. The Save and Close button in the Add Archival Policy window will be grayed out. Note Archiving will only take place on sites that use an Ethernet network connection. Sites that use a dial-up connection are not currently supported. Figure 12-8 Filled In Archival Policy Window Add Archival Policy window after it has been filled in Note If no sites are associated with the policy, the policy will not be listed with other policies in the View application. 11. Click Save and Close to save the archival policy. Note Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 It is recommended that you double-check the cameras to be backed up for a site. After configuring the policy, you should open individual sites and check the camera associations again. 253 Archival Policies Using the Archival Policy Note It may take a considerable amount of time for archiving to complete. We recommend you run archival policies at times when no other operations are in progress (such as late at night). Note When an archival policy backs up redundant data (data from a time and site that has previously been backed up), the policy will overwrite the data from the same time period. Caution Do not turn the Rapid Eye unit off when archiving is in progress. This may result in archiving errors and the application may not behave as expected. To run an archival policy: 1. Launch the View application and select the Archival tab. The archival policies and servers that have already been configured are listed here. Note 2. 254 Only Immediate policies are listed on the View application. Scheduled policies will run automatically when scheduled and do not need to be run manually. If you have recently added policies or servers, you should click Refresh to update the lists of policies and servers (see Figure 12-9). Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 12-9 3. List of Archival Policies and Servers To view the details of a Policy, select it and click Display ( Figure 12-10 4. Archival Policy Properties Select an Archival Policy and click Run ( (see Figure 12-11). Note ). ). The Archiving progress bar appears Archiving will not occur if either the Rapid Eye site has a system password set or if the archival server is not accessible. Figure 12-11 Archiving Progress Bar Note If you click Cancel, the current archiving will stop, but anything archived previous to clicking Cancel will be retained in the local folder or network share path Server Location. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 255 Archival Policies 5. Click Close when the archiving is 100% completed. Note Only one archival policy can run at a time (immediate or scheduled). If a policy is running when a scheduled policy is set up to run, the scheduled policy will be queued to run when the first archival policy is finished. Storing Archived Data Archived data is stored in the folder specified in the Server Location field. The file structure of the archived data is as follows: [Server Location]\[site name]\[year]\[month]\[day]\[site name]_[start time]_[end time].dat With this file structure, you can quickly search for files archived from specific units or for specific times. You just need to know the unit, year, month and day that the archived clip comes from. For example, if you archived data from the Main Unit to the E:\Backup folder on September 2, 2008 from 2:30:00 PM to 2:59:59 PM, the path to this data would look like: E:\Backup\Main Unit\2008\09\02\Main Unit_143000_145959.dat Manage these data files as needed. You can delete unneeded data files, copy them or move them to a backup server. 256 Note If the Server Location folder or share path is not available during archiving, the archival policy will backup data in the working directory (the location where the application is installed) by default. Note If you are trying to archive more than 30 minutes video, the data will be stored in data files of 30 minutes each. If you are archiving two hours of video, the two hours will be split into four 30-minute data files. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Playing Back Archived Data To play back archived data, you must first add an archival server with the Admin application. Once the server is added, you then discover the archival sites with the View application, select a site to retrieve data from, and then play back the video. Note Video recorded at a very low frame rate (0.5 fps) may not play back properly. Green blocks may be observed during playback. Increase the recording frame rate to work around this issue. Note Playing back clips from an archival server will be slower than playing back clips from a retrieval session. Setting Up an Archival Server 1. Right-click in the Archival Server tab of the Admin application. Figure 12-12 Archival Server Tab of the Admin Application 2. Click Add on the menu that appears. 3. Enter a name for the server in the Share Name field (see Figure 12-13). 4. Click the browse button ( Figure 12-13 Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 ) to select a Server Location. Add Archival Server Window 257 Archival Policies Note The Server Location can be a local folder or a network share path. Data will backup to the working directory (location where the application is installed) by default if the server location is not accessible. If data has been backed up to the working directory, you can choose the working directory in this step as the Server Location or manually copy and paste the files to the proper location. 5. Select an archival server location in the Browse for Folder dialog box and click OK. 6. Click Save and Close. Note Select an archival server and click to modify the server’s options. You can also add another server ( ) or delete a server ( ). Discovering Sites on the Archival Server 1. Launch the View application and select the Archival tab. The archival policies and servers that have already been configured are listed here. 2. If you have recently added policies or servers, you should click Refresh to update the lists of policies and servers. 3. Select an Archival Server and click Discover Sites ( 4. All the sites found on the archival server will be listed after clicking Discover Sites (see Figure 12-14 as an example). Figure 12-14 Archival Servers before discovery 258 Discovering Sites on an Archival Server Archival Servers after discovery ). Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Playing Back Archived Video and Data Note Rapid Eye does NOT currently support Archival Policies with IP cameras. IP cameras should not be included in any archival policies in your system. Only video from analog cameras will be archived for any policies you set up. If you are having problems playing back some video from your archival policy, check to make sure that the video you are searching for is not a video feed from a IP camera. Before you can play back archived data, you must first set up an archival server and discover the sites on the archival server (see Setting Up an Archival Server, page 257, and Discovering Sites on the Archival Server on page 258). To play back video and data: 1. Select a site listed under an Archival Server and click Playback ( Playback Select Date and Time window (Figure 12-15) appears. Figure 12-15 ). The Archival Archival Playback Select Date and Time Window 2. Use the Date drop-down arrow to open the calendar utility. Select the date and time from which data is to be played back. Click the left or right arrows to change the month that is displayed. 3. Select an element of the Time field (hours, minutes, seconds, AM/PM) and use the arrow buttons ( ) to change the playback time. 4. Click OK. The Select streams for Archival Playback window (Figure 12-16) appears. Figure 12-16 Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Select Streams for Archival Playback Window 259 Archival Policies 5. Select the video and data streams that you want to play back. To select more than one camera, press the Ctrl or Shift keys while selecting the streams in the list. 6. Click OK. Video from the selected streams will play back in the View application. Use the playback controls to find the video you are looking for. See the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide, for more information on playback options and controls (Figure 12-17). Figure 12-17 Archival Playback Options and Controls Note Playback of archived data is NOT continuous. Because the archived data is chunked into 30 minute files, playback of the data can only occur within the 30 minute data file that is currently selected. If you want to play the next 30 minutes of video, you will need to close the viewing window, click Playback again, and select the appropriate time in the Select Date and Time window. Note If media is not available from the requested time, the Late Media Indication window will open. This window shows the nearest future time at which data is available. Click OK to start playback from this time. Using Archival Logs Setting Up Archival Logs to be Recorded To view and search through archival logs, you must first enable archival logs to be recorded: 260 1. Open the View menu on the Admin application and select Options. 2. Make sure the checkbox for the Log archival policy execution status in the database option is selected (see Figure 12-18). This option is checked by default and must be checked for archival logs to be saved. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 12-18 Options for the Admin Application Must be checked for archival logs to be saved 3. You have the option of setting the archival logs to be automatically deleted by selecting the Delete archival logs older than (in days) option. If necessary, use the arrows ( ) to change number of days before the archival logs will be deleted (default 30 days). 4. Click Save and Close. 5. Now run a couple of archival policies so that you generate some archival logs. Viewing Archival Logs with the Admin Application After you have enabled archival logs to be recorded in the database and have executed a couple of archival policies, you can view the archival logs with the Admin application: 1. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Click the Archival Log button ( ) on the Admin application. 261 Archival Policies Figure 12-19 Archiving Log Report Log filtering details 2. From here you can search through the archive log details (see Figure 12-19). Click the heading of a column to sort the logs for that category. For example, if you click Status, logs that are Progressing or Success will be grouped together. 3. You can also Print, Archive and Delete logs from the report. To print, archive or delete more than one archive log, press Ctrl or Shift keys while selecting the log. 4. If you are getting too many logs in the report, you can filter the results (see Figure 12-20). The filtering details can be seen on the bottom bar of the Archival Log Report window. To filter the archival log: Figure 12-20 5. 262 Archival Log Filtering Options a. Click Filter. b. Select one of the Time Filter options. Narrow the filter time as much as possible to avoid a large number of archival logs. c. To filter the policies, select the These Policies option, then select one or more policies from the Policy Name list. d. To filter the sites, select the These Sites option, then select one or more sites from the Site Name list. e. Select one of the Status options. You can filter to show Any Status, or only Success or Failure statuses. f. Click OK. The Archival Log Report will automatically filter with the new options. Click Close when you are finished viewing the Archival Log Report. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Viewing Archival Logs with the View Application You can also view archival logs with the View application: 1. Launch the View application and select the Log tab. 2. Select the Archival Log option and click Refresh ( ). 3. Select the appropriate dates and times in the Show Archival Logs from and to fields. 4. Click Display Archival Log. The archival log displays (see Figure 12-21). Figure 12-21 Archival Logs in the View Application Select times to show archival logs from 5. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Close the View application when you have finished your session. 263 Archival Policies 264 13 Touring Many Sites A Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT system can be set to show all of the video and data from a series of sites, one site at a time, automatically. This is a common function of a CCTV security system. Admin is used to setup the site tours. View is used to run the tours. A site tour, involving multiple Rapid Eye sites is very different from other types of tours, such as: • • • PTZ tours, which only include one camera, at one site. See Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup, page 101, to see how to setup a PTZ-camera tour. LocalView tours, which uses LocalView to tour multiple cameras at one site. See the LocalView online help for more information. Public display monitors, which displays multiple cameras at one site by connecting a monitor to one Rapid Eye unit. See Using Monitor Output 1 as a Public Display Monitor on page 165. Preliminary Checklist Before Defining a Site Tour Your Rapid Eye System Administrator needs at least two sites to define a tour. See Adding a Site on page 37 for more information. For systems using one site only, a Live session is as effective as a Site tour. See the Rapid Eye™ Hybrid HD and Hybrid LT Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide, for more information. TIP! A site tour is not listed in the View application until more than one site is assigned to it. Design a site tour using two or more Rapid Eye units. System Password The system password should be the same for all of the Rapid Eye sites selected for a site tour (see System Password on page 194). Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 265 Touring Many Sites Adding a Site Tour 1. Using Admin, click the Tours tab. 2. To display the Add Tours dialog box, either: • Click on the toolbar. - or • Click Add in the Actions menu. 3. Enter a name in the Tour Name field (see Figure 13-1). 4. In the Add Tour dialog box, click in the Sites that are part of this Tour pane. The Add/Delete Sites in Tour dialog box appears. The tour’s name must be entered before you can add sites to the tour definition. 5. Select the checkboxes next to one or more sites that you want to add to the tour. 6. Click Save and Close. The Add/Update Tour dialog box reappears, listing the names of the sites you’ve added. See Customizing a Tour on page 267 for more information on changing your tour options. Figure 13-1 Note Adding a Tour Name The meaning of the word tour can be different for some cameras that pan, tilt and zoom (PTZ). PTZ cameras can be programmed to move independently when not in use by an operator. For more information about PTZ camera configuration, see Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup on page 101. Changing the Default Time that a Unit Displays During a Site Tour 266 1. Select the Options command in the View menu of the Admin application. 2. Adjust the minutes or seconds, as needed, in the Default stay of a new Site in a Tour field (see Figure 13-2). 3. Click Save and Close. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 13-2 Default Amount of Time for a Tour of Each Unit Customizing a Tour For each tour, you have the option of specifying: • • • The order in which sites are displayed in a tour (see Changing the Order of Sites in a Tour on page 267). The time spent at each site during a tour (see Changing the Time Spent at a Site During a Tour on page 268). The connection to be used to reach the site. By default, the first connection in the site’s definition is used (see Selecting Another Connection to a Site During a Tour on page 268). Changing the Order of Sites in a Tour 1. Using Admin, select the Tours tab. 2. To display the Update Tour dialog box, do one of the following: • Double-click the name of the tour that you want to customize. - or - • Select the tour that you want to customize, then either: click Update on the Actions menu, or press the F12 key. on the toolbar, 3. In the Update Tour dialog box, drag and drop a site name to a new position in the list. 4. You can click Save and Close or make more changes to the site tour. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 267 Touring Many Sites Changing the Time Spent at a Site During a Tour 1. Using Admin, click the Tours tab. 2. To display the Update Tour dialog box, do one of the following: • Double-click the name of the tour that you want to customize. - or - • Select the tour that you want to customize, then either: click Update in the Actions menu, or press the F12 key. Figure 13-3 3. on the toolbar, Customizing the Duration of a Rapid Eye Unit in a Tour In the Add/Update Tour dialog box, do one of the following: • Select a site, then click . - or • Double-click the name of a site. 4. In the Duration field, you can adjust the minutes or seconds to change the time spent at the site, as needed (see Figure 13-3). 5. Click Save and Close. TIP! Should you plan to view a site for long periods, say thirty minutes or more, consider using a Live Session instead of changing the durations of time spent at each site. Selecting Another Connection to a Site During a Tour 268 1. Using Admin, click the Tours tab. 2. To display the Update Tour dialog box. Double-click the name of the tour you need to customize. 3. Double-click the name of a site. 4. Click the drop-down arrow next to the Connection box. There may only be one connection to select. Connections are defined while adding or updating a site. See Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit on page 43. 5. Select a connection type used for the site during the tour. 6. If needed, click Save and Close. Change the amount of time that the site will display for in the site tour (see Changing the Time Spent at a Site During a Tour on page 268). Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide 7. Close the Add/Update Tour dialog box. Removing a Tour 1. Using Admin, click the Tours tab. 2. Select the tour that you want to delete. 3. Do one of the following: • • Click on the toolbar. Click Delete on the Actions menu. - or - • 4. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Press the Delete key on the keyboard. You are warned that the tour is about to be deleted. Click Yes to continue or No to cancel. 269 Touring Many Sites 270 14 Alarm Log During an alarm session, a record of the event that caused the alarm is entered in the Alarm Log of the Rapid Eye central database. Alarm logs are a separate feature from the Archival logs. See Using Archival Logs on page 260 for more information on Archival logs. Note Alarm log entries accumulate over time. Each alarm takes approximately 530 bytes. There can be many entries, as many as your database engine allows. See your organization’s database administrator for rules on managing the size of the database. Viewing the Alarm Log Figure 14-1 Viewing the Alarm Log To sort the log, click a column heading Log filtering details Report: alarms displayed / total alarms The alarms produced in the last 24 hours are listed when the log is opened. The log can appear to be empty if there have been no alarms on this day. Earlier alarms can be viewed by filtering the log (see Filtering the Log on page 273). Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 271 Alarm Log Opening the Alarm Log To view the alarm log, either: click on the Admin toolbar, select Alarm Log on the Actions menu, press F11 on the keyboard, or click View Log on the LocalView Setup tab. Sorting the Log Note Caution Click the column headings in the alarm log to sort the log entries by those columns. Items are sorted by their textual appearance. For example, if your PC is set to display dates as month-day-year, you might obtain a listing with years unsorted. This may not be what you want. You can use the simple workaround in the next procedure to obtain a chronological list. Honeywell recommends that the Short Date Style in Microsoft Windows be set to yyyy/mm/dd or a similar date input (such as yy-mm-dd). What matters most is that a sequence of year, month, day be used in the format, and that months be expressed in numbers, not text. The double m and d ensure that single digits are padded with zeroes. For example, June 7, 2009 should be expressed as 2009/06/07. Selecting Log Items Use Windows’ mouse and keyboard techniques to select/deselect log items. For example: • • To select more than one user or site, press the Ctrl or Shift keys while selecting. To select all the alarms in the list, press the Ctrl+a keys. Printing the Log Before printing one or more of the alarms listed in the log, you have to select them (see Selecting Log Items on page 272). 272 1. While viewing the log (as in Viewing the Alarm Log, page 271), select alarms that you want to print. To select more than one alarm, press the Ctrl or Shift keys while selecting the names in the lists. 2. Click Print. The print dialog box appears. If necessary, make changes to your printing preferences. Click Print. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Filtering the Log Only alarms produced in the last 24 hours are listed when the log is opened. If you are getting too many or too few logs in the report, you can filter the results by Time, User or Site. The filtering details can be seen on the bottom bar of the Alarm Log Report window (see Figure 14-1). To filter the alarm log: 1. Click Filter. Select one of the Time Filter options to sort the logs by time. Narrow the filter time as much as possible to avoid a large number of alarm logs. Figure 14-2 Filtering the Alarm Log 2. Select These Users in the User Filter pane to filter the logs by user. Select one or more users in the Received by list. Press the Ctrl or Shift keys to select multiple users. 3. Select These Sites in the Site Filter pane to filter the logs by site. Select one or more sites in the Alarm from list. Press the Ctrl or Shift keys to select multiple sites. 4. Click OK. The Alarm Log Report will automatically filter with the updated options. Archiving the Log You can copy a selection of alarms to a text file. The archived list of alarms is not removed from the log. 1. While viewing the log (see Viewing the Alarm Log, page 271), select the alarms that you want to archive (see Selecting Log Items on page 272). Click Archive. The Save As dialog box appears. 2. Enter a name for the archive and select a location to save it in. Click Save. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 273 Alarm Log Removing Log Items 1. While viewing the log (see Viewing the Alarm Log, page 271), select the alarms that you want to delete. You can select more than one alarm by pressing the Ctrl or Shift keys while selecting alarms in the list. 2. Click Delete or press the Delete key on the keyboard. You are warned that the deletion is permanent. Click Yes to delete the items. Click No to cancel. Caution An Access-type Rapid Eye database filling with alarms can become inoperable. Alarm Log Data Reference For more information on the type of data found in the alarm log, see Table 14-1. Table 14-1 274 Logged Data Column Value Section Reference User Name Name of user logged on to alarm station or using alarm session. Using Admin and View to Create a User Account, page 181 Site Name Name as specified in the site definition. Adding a Site, page 37 Action New, Ack, Rearm Right to Use View, page 209 Action Time Date and universal coordinated time (UTC) at which the action was taken. n/a Alarm Time Date and UTC of the alarm. n/a Sensor Rapid Eye input name for an Outside World event. Events Defined, page 215 Event The name of a Rapid Eye event that triggered the alarm (or event from a customer device). Events Defined, page 215 Description Shows the rule’s description if the log was triggered by a rule. Otherwise this field is empty. Checklist for Setting a Rule in the Response Schedule, page 131 15 Rapid Eye Database A Rapid Eye central database is needed to run the Admin application. Information about sites, users, alarm stations and site tours is contained in a Rapid Eye database. You only need one database for multiple sites. Figure 15-1 Data Flow from Admin to View System Administrator’s PC, running Admin, is used to enter: site and user data into a Rapid Eye database. Rapid Eye Database READY ALARM HDD To access a Rapid Eye unit, a PC running View, uses connection data from the database. Rapid Eye sites READY ALARM HDD When an operator logs on to View, a local copy of data about the operator and the sites they may access, is created from the information on the Rapid Eye database. Database Creation Creating a database is a rare event that may be needed as little as once or twice during the life of your Rapid Eye system. Honeywell supports two Microsoft database engines: Access and SQL-Server. MinAdmin Your System Administrator has the option of supplying a Rapid Eye database that offers a limited Administrator account to run MinAdmin software. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 275 Rapid Eye Database Starting Admin 1. On your desktop, either: • Click Start on the windows taskbar, select Programs, and then Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT. Click Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT Admin. - or - • 2. Double-click the desktop icon for Admin. Then, either: • • Follow Obtaining a Rapid Eye Database on page 276. Use a Rapid Eye database that is already available. Skip to Logging On, page 287. Obtaining a Rapid Eye Database To obtain a Rapid Eye database after starting Admin, you have the option of: • • • • • Using the default, empty, Rapid Eye database. An empty Rapid Eye database comes with the software. It is used to access a unit out of the box. This is a simple way to get started. Switching to another Rapid Eye database. If you are given a Rapid Eye database prepared during the installation or at some other time (see Converting to Another Database on page 278). Creating an empty Rapid Eye database (see Creating a Rapid Eye Database on page 279). Copying a Rapid Eye database. You can base a new MS-Access Rapid Eye database on an MS-SQL or MSDE (see Database Based On Another on page 283). Upgrading a Rapid Eye database. System Administrators can use a Rapid Eye database from their older Rapid Eye system (see Upgrading a Rapid Eye Database on page 285). Using the Default Rapid Eye Database The First Time that you Log On The file name of the default, Rapid Eye central database is: REMCentral.mdb. You can locate it by browsing through the folder holding the Rapid Eye software. 276 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide The Next Time that you Log On The next time that you use Admin, the same Rapid Eye database is used. A database can be renamed (see Renaming a Rapid Eye Database on page 284). Table 15-1 First Log On to Admin (Default Data for MS Access) Item Value User ID Administrator Password None Microsoft Access Selected Database path To installation folder (by default it is C:\Program Files\Honeywell Video Systems\Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT [version number]). Database name REMCentral.mdb, a Rapid Eye database file in the folder where Admin was installed. Contrasting Database Engines Quick Contrast of Database Templates Microsoft Access. You do not need to have Microsoft Access installed on your system to use the default Rapid Eye Central database immediately. The only limitation for larger installations is an MS-Access database may not be able to hold the number of database records needed. SQL Server or MSDE. These database engines require preparation and database expertise. They may involve converting a Rapid Eye Central database. These database engines are also designed to hold a larger number of records. A database administrator or network administrator installs a database server on your network. To create a database, you may need to know the database password. If use of this password is restricted, let the database administrator either create the new Rapid Eye database from your machine, or run Admin on the System Administrator’s PC to create the database from there. Consulting Management Information System Personnel The System Administrator may need a database administrator to advise on or decide upon the database engine used in your Rapid Eye system. TIP! Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 System Administrators are not required to have database expertise or to train others for it. 277 Rapid Eye Database Converting to Another Database Your System Administrator may have created more than one Rapid Eye database. Operators have the option of switching to another Rapid Eye database. Using Another Rapid Eye Database 1. Launch Admin (or View). The Logon window appears. 2. In the Central Database section, leave or switch the database (Access or SQL server) by clicking its button. Enter the name of the Rapid Eye database that you need. 3. Enter an user account name in the User ID field. The account name must be part of the Rapid Eye database selected in the previous step. 4. Enter the password to the account in the Password field. Click OK. Figure 15-2 Specifying the Rapid Eye Database To switch to another Rapid Eye database, change the central database name. Caution Note Take care when entering the name of a database in the Admin logon window. Entering the name of a non-existent database starts the Admin database tool. See Creating a Rapid Eye Database on page 279. Once you have set Admin to use a Rapid Eye central database, the same Rapid Eye database is used every time that you log on. Converting a Rapid Eye Database from SQL to Access A SQL server database can hold many more alarms than an MS-Access database. To convert a SQL database to an Access format, Honeywell recommends removing alarm data from the SQL database beforehand. 278 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Using a Database with View • • View/Admin can be set to a different database while the other application is running. When switching to another Rapid Eye database for use with View, a fresh local Rapid Eye database overwrites the local database used at the previous log on. Entering the name of a non-existent database in the View logon window is of little consequence. Acknowledge the error message and enter the name again. • Creating a Rapid Eye Database TIP! Creating a Rapid Eye database is a rare occurrence. Only one database is needed for all of the Rapid Eye sites in your system. Honeywell recommends using the default REMCentral.mdb if you plan to use only one Rapid Eye database. The installers of your system may have already created a Rapid Eye database to test the installation. Using the Admin - Logon Window to Create a Database If the installers did not supply you with a Rapid Eye database, you can use Admin to create an empty Rapid Eye database while you are logging on. Figure 15-3 Admin Logon and Creating a Database To obtain an empty Rapid Eye central database, either: • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 For an MS Access compatible format, see Creating an Empty MS-Access Compatible Rapid Eye Database on page 280. 279 Rapid Eye Database - or • For a SQL server compatible format, see SQL Server Template on page 281. Following Log On to Admin The next time that you logon to Admin, the same Rapid Eye database is used. What About the Local Database? When users run View, a partial copy of the Rapid Eye database (Local database) is made to that PC’s hard drive. TIP! Creating a Rapid Eye database is a rare occurrence. Though you can create another Rapid Eye database at any Admin log on, there is no need to do so. The Rapid Eye database name is usually left unchanged during regular use of Admin. Only one Rapid Eye database is needed for all of the Rapid Eye sites in your system. Naming Restrictions Rapid Eye Database Naming Restrictions There are restrictions when choosing a name for your Rapid Eye database. Do not use: • • A user name. Names that you will need for a user of the Rapid Eye database. A Rapid Eye database with the same name as a user account causes an error when View is started. Administrator. It is the name of the default user in any Rapid Eye database. User Naming Restrictions When adding users to the database, do not use the database name as a user name. A user account with the same name as the database causes an error if a copy of the database is made locally. For other Naming Restrictions, see page 181. Creating an Empty MS-Access Compatible Rapid Eye Database You do not need a copy of Microsoft Access to use this procedure. Everything is included with your copy of Rapid Eye software. 280 1. Launch Admin (see Starting Admin on page 276). 2. In the Admin Logon window, enter Administrator in the User ID box. 3. Leave the Password box empty. An empty database lists one default user, the Administrator. By default, this user has no password. See Administrator Password on page 205 for more information about the default user. 4. Leave the Rapid Eye Central database selected as Microsoft Access. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide 5. First-time logons can proceed as is: • • First run. You have the option of naming the database and selecting its path. Subsequent runs. Change the name of the database file. This instructs the database tool to create an empty database bearing the name that you entered. 6. Click OK. The Create Database window appears (see Figure 15-3). Note that Create empty database is selected. 7. Click OK. The Admin window appears. A default site is listed on the Sites tab. There is an Administrator user listed on the Users tab. Database Naming Restrictions Do not use a name that you will need for a user of that Rapid Eye database or Administrator (which is the name of the default user in any Rapid Eye database) as a database name. A database with the same name as a user account causes an error when View is started. SQL Server Template Asking your SQL Database Administrator for Help An Admin user may find it useful to ask a SQL server database administrator for help when creating a SQL server compatible Rapid Eye database. The SQL server may have been configured using customized folder names. This can hamper creating an empty Rapid Eye database remotely, without the help of the database administrator. Admin can even be installed on the database administrator’s PC. Security Option By default, Rapid Eye software connects to a SQL server using the sa login, with no password. To add security, your SQL administrator can setup a SQL login just for Admin users. See Rapid Eye Database Security on page 192. Intended Users Of the two procedures in this section, Using Microsoft SQL Server with an Empty Database is for your SQL server database administrator; Using Admin to Create a SQL-Compatible Rapid Eye Database can be used by an Admin user, with the help of a SQL database administrator. Security Considerations On some installations, the Rapid Eye database may need to be protected from copy and deletion (see Rapid Eye Database Security on page 192). Using Microsoft SQL Server with an Empty Database This procedure is for a SQL database administrator, not an Admin user. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 281 Rapid Eye Database 1. Copy the following two files to the SQL server database folder: • • REMTemplateV3-1.mdf REMTemplateV3-1.ldf 2. The default SQL folder name and path is: C:\MSSQL7\Data\. The number in the file name is not related to the version of the software or hardware used. Rename the files to a name of your choice, for the Rapid Eye database, such as Multi.mdf and Multi.ldf. Renaming is necessary to not restrict use of the template files, in order to create another Rapid Eye database at some future time. 3. Run the Query Analyzer, an MS SQL server tool. This tool is not supplied with Rapid Eye, it is a standard SQL server tool. 4. Connect to the SQL server. Enter the following code, including the commas: sp_attach_db ‘Multi’, ‘C:\MSSQL7\Data\Multi.mdf’, ‘C:\MSSQL7\Data\Multi.ldf’ 5. Execute the code by pressing F5, or using the Execute command. Using Admin to Create a SQL-Compatible Rapid Eye Database 1. Before using Admin to connect to a SQL server, your SQL database administrator provides you with: • • • A SQL account and password. The SQL Administrator logon is sa by default, but it and its password may have been changed. The SQL server name. The Share name of the folder that will hold the Rapid Eye database. 2. Make sure a SQL Server client is installed on the PC used to connect to a SQL Server. 3. Launch Admin. The Admin Logon window appears. 4. In the Admin Logon window, enter Administrator in the User ID box. 5. Leave the Password box empty. An empty database lists only one user, the Administrator. By default, this account has no password. See Administrator Password on page 205 for more information about the default user. 6. Select Microsoft SQL. Your next step depends on which Windows operating system is running on your PC. • Users of Microsoft Windows 2000 or XP. You have the option of clicking Scan, to locate SQL servers in your network. The scan takes some time to perform on shared drives. If the scan is ineffective at locating the server you need, you can try the next option, even if it is designed for other versions of Windows. - or - • 7. 282 Users of Win98se, or if a scan (from previous option) was ineffective. Enter the name of a SQL server in the Server name box. Your organization’s database administrator can help you find this name. Click the Database Name drop-down arrow to see the database names that are in use. To create a database, enter a name that is not in use. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide 8. Click OK. • • 9. If you entered a new name, a scan is performed, regardless of the Windows operating system on your PC. If SQL-Server security has been changed, a SQL logon window appears, as discussed in SQL-Server Option on page 193. Enter the Login and Password obtained from your database administrator, then click OK. The Create Database window appears (Figure 15-3). Note that Create empty database is selected. Click OK. In the Admin window, a site is listed on the Sites tab. An Administrator user is listed on the Users tab. Database Based On Another To copy a Rapid Eye database, use the Admin - Logon window as a database tool. The procedure is similar to creating an empty Rapid Eye database. The Create Database window is used to select a model Rapid Eye database (see step 3 in Figure 15-4). You need an account and password for the model database to log on to the copy of the Rapid Eye database. SQL Server When making a copy of a SQL database, a network scan is made. This can be time consuming. If you know the name of the server and database, it is quicker to enter them. Figure 15-4 1. When logging on to Admin, the Rapid Eye database displayed is the same as when you last logged on. 2. Enter the name that you want for the new database, then click OK. 3. Select or enter the name of the model Rapid Eye database that contains the data that you want to copy. 4. The data from the model Rapid Eye database is copied to the new database. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Copying Rapid Eye Database Data to Another Database 283 Rapid Eye Database Making a Copy of a Rapid Eye Database 1. Launch Admin. 2. Enter the name of an account that has the right to use Admin in the database that you plan to copy. TIP! This step for making a copy of a database is not obvious. Your usual account may not work in the database that you plan to copy. If you use the database’s Administrator account, the password may differ from the Administrator account in the Rapid Eye database that you usually use. 3. Enter that account’s password. 4. Select the database engine that will read the Rapid Eye database that you plan to create. 5. Replace the name of the database with a new name. You can also change the path, folder and server name, as needed. TIP! For Windows 98 users using MS-SQL Server or MSDE, a database server name must be entered. The database server(s) cannot be automatically identified and listed at log on. 6. Click OK. The Create Database window appears. See Figure 15-4, above. 7. Select either: • Create from existing MS Access database. Browse for or enter the location and name of an *.mdb file. - or - • 8. Create from existing SQL database. Select a server and enter a database name of an *.mdb file. Click OK. The new database is created based on the data in the model database. The Admin window appears. The information that you see is a copy of the model database. Renaming a Rapid Eye Database You can rename a Rapid Eye using standard Windows techniques. For example, use Windows Explorer to locate an *.mdb file and rename the file as you would any other. Rapid Eye Database Naming Restrictions TIP! The file name of a local database is .mdb. This is why the name of a Rapid Eye database should not be the same as one of its users. When adding users to the database, do not use the database name as a user name. A user account with the same name as the database causes an error when a copy of the database is made locally. 284 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Rapid Eye Database for MinAdmin Software Template For Administrators of client MinAdmin software, there is a Generate Template command in the File menu. The command is used to provide central databases for MinAdmin software. The template imposes restrictions on the rights of MinAdmin’s Administrator account, administration of system password and access to the Rapid Eye database used to create the template. Figure 15-5 Options for Generating a MinAdmin Rapid Eye Database Template You can produce *.DAT files for MinAdmin users. Use of the .DAT file and the template is discussed in the MinAdmin User Guide. Upgrading a Rapid Eye Database Upgrades from v4 to v5 are Automatic You don’t have to know what version of Rapid Eye software you are upgrading, only that a message appears for upgrades from earlier versions of v2 or v3 software, as explained in the next procedure. Upgrading a Local Database Purpose of a Local Database When View runs, it uses a partial copy of the Rapid Eye database. The copy is stored on the PC’s hard drive. The local database can be updated (refreshed) if the PC running View is connected to the Rapid Eye database. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 285 Rapid Eye Database TIP! A local database is upgraded automatically when the user of View has an open connection to the Rapid Eye database. If the connection is not available (laptop PCs, temporary setups and so on), use the information in this section to upgrade a local database. Mobile Users You can upgrade View’s local database without connecting to the Rapid Eye database. Upgrading a Local Database Without Connecting to the Rapid Eye Database 1. Before upgrading View, use Windows Explorer to locate the [user].mdb file(s) on the PC. For example, if a user account called night operator is used to log on to View, look for a night operator.mdb file. These files need to be moved after the Rapid Eye software upgrade. 2. After installing the upgrade to View, move every [user].mdb file (that you located in step 1) to the latest installation folder. 3. Launch View. As each user logs on for the first time to the upgraded View, a dialog box appears stating that the local database needs an upgrade. 4. Click Yes. The [user].mdb file is upgraded, after being backed up to [user].bak. TIP! On PCs used by many accounts, there is a [user].mdb file for each account. Producing a Local Database Your System Administrator can deliberately make it impossible for operators to connect to a Rapid Eye database when using MinAdmin. Your System Administrator may then elect to provide View Operators with a computer file of the local database. The next procedure indicates how to make a local database from a command line. TIP! Run Admin once before using a command line to create a local Rapid Eye database. If not, an error results. Making a Local Database 286 1. Check if View has run on the PC you are using. If you are unsure, run View and exit. 2. Using Windows, run a command line utility and enter: remadmin.exe “[name of user account]”. Double-quotes are only needed for spaces or non-alphanumeric characters, such as an apostrophe. This produces a [name of user account].mdb file. See the examples, below. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Examples acceptable d:> remadmin.exe “O’Donnell #4” d:> remadmin.exe ODonnell4 error d:> remadmin.exe O’Donnell #4 3. (double-quotes are needed) Distribute the *.mdb file to the View operator. The user needs to copy the file to the folder holding the View.exe file. Logging On For Routine Use of Admin After specifying a database, Admin and View will continue to use it, each time that you log on. Logging on to Admin is a simple matter of starting Admin and clicking OK (as explained in Starting Admin on page 276). TIP! To log on to Admin, use either: a. The Administrator account, or b. An account in which user rights and site access are based on the Administrator. The First Use Exception On first use, you are offered an empty, default Rapid Eye database. To obtain a Rapid Eye central database, see Obtaining a Rapid Eye Database on page 276. Setting the Database with View Figure 15-6 The View Logon Window Leave this checkbox empty on a mobile PC Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 287 Rapid Eye Database The First Time That You Use View The View operator needs to set View to use a Rapid Eye central database. TIP! For mobile PCs that will not have access to the Rapid Eye database, have the Rapid Eye system administrator connect the PC to the Rapid Eye database at least once, and have that user log on. When a different Rapid Eye database is used at View’s logon, the local database is overwritten with contents from the most recent Rapid Eye database. Setting a Rapid Eye Database for View 1. Launch View. 2. Set the database. Either: • The PC can only run View. Select the database engine and browse for or enter the name of the database file. For SQL Server or MSDE databases, indicate the server and database. - or - • The PC can run Admin or View. View’s Logon window automatically displays the database selected to run Admin. 3. Leave a checkmark in the checkbox next to The Central database is accessible from this PC. You should uncheck this box after one successful logon only if a PC is stand-alone or mobile. Leave or enter your user account name in the User ID field. 4. Enter your password in the Password field. 5. Click OK. For Routine Use of View Unless another Rapid Eye database is set, View continues to use the same Rapid Eye database every time someone logs on. TIP! For PCs running Admin and View, View’s Logon window automatically displays the database selected using Admin. The User ID and Password are authenticated once in the Rapid Eye database. Afterwards, the local database is used. Local Rapid Eye Database The local database contains a subset of the Central database data, including information for sites that the user is authorized to use. Refreshing a Local Database If changes are made to the Central Rapid Eye database, and it is accessible from the PC running View, the local database is refreshed automatically when you login to View. Security and site information is updated. 288 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide The local database can be refreshed by View Operators, at the request of a System Administrator, for: • PCs that run View 24/7. - or - • PCs that are stand-alone and are only occasionally connected to a Rapid Eye Central database. Refreshing a Local Database while Running View 1. Launch View. At the Logon, confirm that there is a checkmark in the checkbox for the Central database is accessible from this PC option. • • 2. If so, proceed with the logon. If not, check with your System Administrator if the PC used to run View can connect to the PC or server holding the Rapid Eye Central database. If the answer is affirmative, select the checkbox next to The Central database is accessible from this PC. While View is running, operators can either: • Click on the View toolbar. - or • Click the Refresh command on the View menu. Note See your Rapid Eye System Administrator, if this procedure fails. Deleting a Database You can delete a Central database at any point. Note that after deleting a Central database, users can still connect to sites, using their local database. Attempting to refresh the local database causes an error after the Central database is deleted. Protecting the Rapid Eye Database On some installations, the Rapid Eye central database may need to be protected from copying and deletion. See Rapid Eye Database Security on page 192. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 289 Rapid Eye Database Cannot Open a Database Possible reasons for not being able to open the database: • • TIP! 290 The Rapid Eye central database has been deleted. Unavailability of a network connection to the Rapid Eye database. Check the network’s status. When using Admin, this error has the side effect of creating a new, central database that has the same name as the regular database. A IP Cameras The Rapid Eye Hybrid HD/LT units support Honeywell IP cameras in your Rapid Eye system. Rapid Eye Hybrid V10.1 now supports some ONVIF IP cameras as well (see http://www.security.honeywell.com/hota for a complete list of supported IP cameras). Any video channel of your Rapid Eye unit can be assigned to a supported IP camera so that video from the IP cameras can be viewed the same way as analog cameras. The alarm input/output available with the IP cameras can be used with your Rapid Eye system and function just like a Rapid Eye input/output. Note Rapid Eye Hybrid DVRs support Honeywell equIP® V2, equIP® H.264, equIP® 1080p, equIP® Wide Dynamic Range IP, Performance IP, and/or HD3/4 IP cameras on Hybrid V10.1 units. Some ONVIF IP cameras are also supported (see http://www.security.honeywell.com/hota for a complete list of supported IP cameras). Rapid Eye Hybrid HD units support 16 channels of IP video. Rapid Eye Hybrid LT units support 4/8 channels of IP video on Hybrid LT 4/8-channel DVRs. See Supported IP Cameras on page 292 for a list of Honeywell IP cameras supported by Hybrid V10.1 and V10.0 DVRs. This Appendix covers the following topics: • • • • • • • • • • Supported IP Cameras, page 292. Automatically Discovering IP Cameras, page 293. Setting Up Fixed IP Cameras, page 294. Using ACUIX IP PTZ Cameras, page 298. Tamper Detection with Honeywell IP Cameras, page 300. Motion Detection with Supported Honeywell IP Cameras, page 301. Alarm Input/Output with IP Cameras, page 303. Using Supported ONVIF IP Cameras with Rapid Eye Hybrid, page 305 Viewing Video and Alarms from IP Cameras, page 308. IP Camera Limitations with Rapid Eye, page 308. Caution Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 IP cameras should not be added and configured on multiple Rapid Eye units. After configuration, Rapid Eye makes changes to the camera settings according to its need. Multiple Rapid Eye units connecting to the same IP cameras may make conflicting changes to the camera settings. 291 IP Cameras Supported IP Cameras Table A-1 lists the IP cameras that are supported by your Rapid Eye Hybrid unit. More cameras will be added in future releases. Supported camera features (for Honeywell and supported ONVIF IP cameras) are also listed in this table. Table A-1 Supported IP Cameras Supported Features Software Versions that support H.264 Streaming equIP HCD554IP V10.0+   equIP HCS554IP V10.0+  equIP HD4DIP V10.0+ equIP HD3MDIH Camera Model Tamper MPEG4 Detection (CSD Streaming Analytics) Motion Detection GPIO PTZ                V10.0+       equIP HD4MDIH V10.0+       equIP HCD5MIH V10.0+       HD3MDIP V10.0+       HD4MDIP V10.0+       ACUIX IP V10.0+       HD44IP V10.1+       HD45IP V10.1+       HD54IP V10.1+       HD55IP V10.1+       equIP HD3HDIH V10.1+       equIP HD4HDIH V10.1+       equIP HCD5HIH V10.1+       equIP HD3MWIH V10.1+       equIP HD4MWIH V10.1+       equIP HCD5WIH V10.1+       ONVIF IP Camerasa V10.1+       a Some third party ONVIF IP cameras have been tested and are supported by Rapid Eye Hybrid V10.1 units. For a complete list of supported IP cameras, including Honeywell cameras and ONVIF IP cameras, see the Honeywell Open Technology Alliance web page (http://www.security.honeywell.com/hota). For more information on setting up ONVIF IP cameras, and their features, refer to Using Supported ONVIF IP Cameras with Rapid Eye Hybrid on page 305. 292 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Automatically Discovering IP Cameras Rapid Eye Hybrid V10.1 gives users the option of automatically discovering IP cameras connected to a Rapid Eye Hybrid unit’s network. Before you can discover IP cameras in your Rapid Eye system, follow the documentation that was included with your IP camera(s) to connect the camera(s) to the local network and apply power to the camera(s). Once all of the IP cameras needed for your system are connected and powered: 1. Launch the Remote View application and start a Maintenance Session on the Rapid Eye unit (see page 65). Select the Video tab. Note 2. Auto discovery is only supported by Hybrid V10.1 units. Maintenance sessions on V10.0 units will not show the Discover IP Cameras button. Click Discover IP Cameras on the Video tab (see Figure A-2). The Auto Discovery of IP Cameras dialog displays (see Figure A-1). Note If your IP cameras do not appear in the Unassigned IP Cameras list, check that they are connected and powered, then click Refresh. Figure A-1 3. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Auto Discovery of IP Cameras Window Click and drag discovered IP cameras from the Unassigned IP Cameras list to one of the above Rapid Eye channels. 293 IP Cameras Note Be sure that any channels you select for IP camera use do not have analog cameras connected to them on the back of the Rapid Eye unit. 4. Enter the User Name and Password for the IP camera in the Camera Details area. If supported by the camera, and part of your system requirements, you can select the Input and Output mapping options here as well. 5. Click Close. If any camera type has changed, you will be prompted to reboot the unit. Once the unit reboots, you can continue to set up the IP camera recording settings. See Configuring Recording Settings on page 297 to set up IP camera recording settings. See Supported ONVIF IP Camera Limitations with Rapid Eye Hybrid on page 307 to check the limitations when setting up supported ONVIF IP cameras in your system. Setting Up Fixed IP Cameras Setting up IP cameras on your Rapid Eye system is accomplished in three steps: • • • Configuring Video Channels for IP Video, page 294 (alternative is Automatically Discovering IP Cameras on page 293) Configuring IP Camera Settings, page 295 (alternative is Automatically Discovering IP Cameras on page 293) Configuring Recording Settings, page 297 Configuring Video Channels for IP Video Note This procedure is used for manually assigning video channels to IP cameras. Alternatively, you can automatically discover IP cameras and skip this step by following the Automatically Discovering IP Cameras procedure (page 293). Decide which video channels on your Rapid Eye unit(s) you will be using for IP cameras before starting this setup procedure. The Rapid Eye unit must restart for video channels to be enabled for IP cameras (or for the reverse, to be switched back to analog). Enable all the channels for IP cameras that are needed all at once so that restarting the Rapid Eye unit is only required once (instead of restarting each time a video channel is switched from Analog to IP, or the other way around). 294 1. Launch the Remote View application and start a Maintenance Session on the Rapid Eye unit (see page 65). Select the Video tab. 2. Select the Camera (channel) to be enabled for IP video. 3. Select IP at the top of the Video tab. The following message displays (see Figure A-2). Click Yes. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure A-2 Video Tab for an IP Camera with Maintenance Message Or click Discover IP Cameras to automatically find all connected IP cameras 4. Repeat step 2 and step 3 for each camera that needs to be enabled for IP video. 5. Close the Maintenance session (see Ending Maintenance on page 76). A Maintenance message opens (see Figure A-3) warning that the Rapid Eye unit will automatically reboot. There is no option to cancel the unit restarting. In high-security installations, you should plan to reboot the unit at a time when recording of video can be briefly interrupted without incident. Click OK to reboot the unit. Figure A-3 Maintenance Message for Rebooting Configuring IP Camera Settings Note Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 This procedure is used for manually configuring IP camera values (such as IP address, user name and password). Alternatively, you can automatically discover IP cameras and skip this step by following the Automatically Discovering IP Cameras procedure (page 293). 295 IP Cameras Once the video channels have been enabled for IP cameras (see Configuring Video Channels for IP Video, page 294), the next step is to configure the IP camera connection parameters: 1. Start a Maintenance Session and select the Video tab. Select the IP camera to be configured. In the Figure A-4 example, Camera 16, an HD3MDIH IP camera is selected. Figure A-4 IP Camera Settings Click the Click here link to access the IP camera web page 2. Enter the IP camera’s IP address in the IP Address field. Note 3. See the documentation included with your Honeywell IP camera for procedures to obtain your camera’s IP Address, User Name, Password and Device Type information. See the documentation provided with your supported ONVIF IP camera for procedures to obtain these values for ONVIF IP cameras. Enter the IP camera’s User Name and Password in their respective fields. The User Name should be admin, and the password should be the same as what is configured for the IP camera. 296 4. Select the IP camera’s model type from the Device Type drop-down list. 5. Click Save to save the settings. If the settings are correct, the IP camera’s video will display. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Caution IP cameras should not be added and configured on multiple Rapid Eye units. After configuration, Rapid Eye makes changes to the camera settings according to its need. Multiple Rapid Eye units connecting to the same IP cameras may make conflicting changes to the camera settings. Configuring Recording Settings The final step to set up your IP cameras is to configure the recording settings: 1. Start a Maintenance Session and select the Recording tab. In the Figure A-5 example, Cameras 9, 11, 12 and 13 are IP cameras. Figure A-5 2. Recording Tab with IP Cameras You can enable or disable recording for each camera by selecting the cell in the camera’s Record column. A drop-down menu appears. Select ON to enable recording or OFF to disable recording. The settings for Continuous and Event Recording become available to change after enabling recording. Note 3. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Remember to enable recording on all cameras, especially those where alarms are expected. If recording is not enabled, no alarm video will be recorded when alarms are activated. Adjust the Continuous Recording settings for IP cameras, as needed. Change the Resolution, Frame Rate and Quality settings by selecting the appropriate cell and selecting the desired setting from the drop-down list. See Customizing Settings for Recorded Video on page 86 for more information on recording settings. 297 IP Cameras Note 4. Unlike analog cameras, only the Frame Rate setting can be adjusted for IP camera Event Recording settings. Resolution and Quality fields are greyed out and not available for IP camera’s Event Recording settings. Adjust the Frame Rate setting for Event Recording on IP cameras, as needed. Note Caution The frame rate used for live viewing of a IP camera’s video will be the same as what is configured for Event Recording. Do not change any of the compression settings available on your IP camera’s web page. This would result in video from these cameras not displaying properly live or from recorded video playback. Using ACUIX IP PTZ Cameras Using an ACUIX IP PTZ camera in your Rapid Eye system requires a few more configurations steps: • • Configuring ACUIX IP PTZ Settings on the Camera Web Page, page 298 Configuring ACUIX IP PTZ Settings in Rapid Eye, page 299 Configuring ACUIX IP PTZ Settings on the Camera Web Page You need to configure the PTZ Camera Address and Protocol in the ACUIX IP camera’s web page before you can configure the PTZ settings in the Remote View application. 1. Launch the ACUIX IP camera’s web page. This can be done by clicking the Click here link on the ACUIX IP camera’s Video tab (see Figure A-4). Log on to the camera web page. Note 298 See the documentation included with your ACUIX IP PTZ camera for more information about launching and logging onto the ACUIX IP web page. 2. Select the PTZ Protocol Setup tab (see Figure A-6). Change the Camera Address and Protocol settings, as needed. Select the Intellibus protocol for PTZ control with a Rapid Eye unit. 3. Make a note of the Camera Address and Protocol. These settings are needed for the next step, Configuring ACUIX IP PTZ Settings in Rapid Eye on page 299. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Figure A-6 ACUIX IP Web Page with PTZ Protocol Settings Configuring ACUIX IP PTZ Settings in Rapid Eye After configuring the PTZ Camera Address and Protocol in the ACUIX IP camera’s web page you need to configure the PTZ settings in the Remote View application. 1. Start a Maintenance Session and select the Video tab. Select the ACUIX IP camera to be configured. In the Figure A-7 example, channel 13: ACUIX IP is the selected PTZ. 2. Select the PTZ radial button in the lower left corner of the screen. 3. Select the Enable check box to make the PTZ settings adjustable (see Figure A-7). Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 299 IP Cameras Figure A-7 ACUIX IP PTZ Settings in Maintenance 4. The Driver (labelled Protocol on the camera web page) and Camera Address set here must be the same as the address you made note of in step 3 of Configuring ACUIX IP PTZ Settings on the Camera Web Page on page 298. 5. Other PTZ features, such as Presets and Tours can be configured the same way as with analog PTZ cameras (see Chapter 6, Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup, on page 101, for more information on setting up these PTZ features). Caution Make sure that the same protocol is configured for ACUIX IP PTZ cameras in Rapid Eye, on the camera web page, and with the DIP switch settings. See the documentation included with the ACUIX IP cameras for DIP switch information. Different protocol settings can cause inconsistent PTZ use. Tamper Detection with Honeywell IP Cameras The Tamper Detection alarms (camera sabotage detection: Blur, Blind, and Scene Change thresholds) for Honeywell IP cameras need to be configured on the camera web page. See Using Supported ONVIF IP Cameras with Rapid Eye Hybrid on page 305 for more information on setting up Tamper Detection with supported ONVIF IP cameras. 1. 300 Launch the Honeywell IP camera’s web page. This can be done by clicking the Click here link on the camera’s Video tab (see Figure A-4). Log on to the camera web page. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Note 2. See the documentation included with your Honeywell IP camera for more information about launching and logging onto the camera web page. Select the Video Analytics tab. The Blur Threshold, Blind Threshold and Scene Change Threshold levels can be set here (see Figure A-8). The threshold levels can be set to High, Medium or Low. Select Disable for Blur, Blind or Scene Change to turn off that tamper detection option. 3. Click Apply to save your settings. Figure A-8 Tamper Detection Settings on Honeywell Camera Web Page 4. Close the IP camera web page and go back to the Maintenance Session on the Remote View application. Make sure the same camera configured in step 2 is selected on the Video tab. 5. Select Tamper Detection (see Figure A-9). From here you can enable the Tamper Detection for this camera to Log or to raise an Alarm in the Rapid Eye system. Select the Log and/or Alarm check boxes, as needed. If enabled for Alarm, it will work the same as other alarms in the Rapid Eye system. Figure A-9 Tamper Detection Options for IP Cameras in View Motion Detection with Supported Honeywell IP Cameras Motion detection is available on the Honeywell Performance IP, equIP® 1080p, equIP® Wide Dynamic Range IP, HD3MDIP, HD4MDIP, HD3MDIH, HD4MDIH, and HCD5MIH IP cameras (see Supported IP Cameras on page 292 for a complete list of supported IP cameras and their supported features). See Using Supported ONVIF IP Cameras with Rapid Eye Hybrid on page 305 for more information on setting up motion detection with supported ONVIF IP cameras. Follow these steps to configure motion detection on supported Honeywell IP cameras: 1. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Launch the Honeywell IP camera’s web page. This can be done by clicking the Click here link on the camera’s Video tab (see Figure A-4). Log on to the camera web page. 301 IP Cameras Note 2. See the documentation included with your Honeywell IP camera for more information about launching and logging onto the camera web page. Select the Video Analytics tab (see Figure A-10). Note For motion detection configured on HD3MDIP/HD4MDIP IP cameras, it is recommended to set the camera’s frames per second at 2 fps or a higher fps. Figure A-10 3. Select Region 1 (Red) with the Region drop-down menu. Motion alarms from any of the other regions will be ignored by Rapid Eye. 4. Select Enable with the VMD drop-down menu. This will enable the red motion region to appear in the video image. 5. Select the red box. Use the handles that appear on the red motion region box to change the size and/or position, as needed (see Figure A-10). 6. Select the Motion Threshold needed from the drop-down menu. Options are High, Medium and Low. Note 302 Motion Detection on Supported IP Camera Web Page See the documentation included with your Honeywell IP camera for more information about setting up Video Motion Detection. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide 7. Close the Honeywell IP camera web page and go back to the Maintenance Session on the Remote View application. Make sure the same camera configured in step 1 through to step 6 is selected on the Video tab. 8. Make sure Record/Motion/Image is selected (see Figure A-11). From here you can enable Motion Detection for this camera to make a Log entry or to raise an Alarm in the Rapid Eye system. Select the Log and/or Alarm check boxes, as needed. If enabled for Alarm, motion detection for this camera will work the same as other alarms in the Rapid Eye system. Figure A-11 Motion Detection Options for IP Cameras in View Use the Click here link to access the IP camera web page Alarm Input/Output with IP Cameras If input/output connections are supported with the Honeywell IP camera (see Supported IP Cameras on page 292 for a list of supported IP cameras and their features), they can be mapped to any of the available inputs/outputs of the Rapid Eye, or they can be disabled by selecting None. The IP camera’s input/output also needs to be enabled on the camera’s web page. Note ONVIF IP cameras do not support the mapping of input and output alarms with Rapid Eye Hybrid units. 1. Start a Maintenance Session and select the Video tab. Select the Honeywell IP camera that requires input/output configuration. 2. In the Connection Parameters area, use the Input and Output drop-down menus to select the Rapid Eye input and/or output to map to the IP camera. In the Figure A-12 example, Input4 and Output4 are selected. Select None to disable the IP camera’s input/output function. Note Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 After mapping an IP camera’s input/output to Rapid Eye, the physical input/output connections on the back panel corresponding to the selected input/output cannot be used. 303 IP Cameras Figure A-12 3. Launch the IP camera’s web page. This can be done by clicking the Click here link on the camera’s Video tab (see Figure A-4). Log on to the camera web page. Note 4. See the documentation included with your Honeywell IP camera for more information about launching and logging onto the camera web page. Select the IO & Audio tab (see Figure A-13). Figure A-13 304 Setting IP Camera’s Input/Output in View Input/Output Options on Supported IP Camera Web Page 5. Select the state of the Alarm Input as Normally Open or Normally Close, as required, with the drop-down menu. 6. Select the state of the Alarm Output as Open or Close, as required, with the drop-down menu. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Note Normally Open (NO) and Normally Close (NC) alarm input settings made on the Events  Inputs tab of a Remote View application maintenance session will have no effect for IP cameras. Normally Open and Normally Close settings for IP cameras must be made on that camera’s web page (as described above). Using Supported ONVIF IP Cameras with Rapid Eye Hybrid Rapid Eye Hybrid V10.1 now supports the integration of some ONVIF compliant IP cameras. Supported ONVIF IP cameras can be configured in Rapid Eye the same way as other Honeywell IP cameras (see Supported ONVIF IP Camera Limitations with Rapid Eye Hybrid on page 307 for more information on ONVIF camera limitations with Rapid Eye). See http://www.security.honeywell.com/hota for a complete list of supported ONVIF IP cameras. See the following sections to learn more about using supported ONVIF IP cameras in your Rapid Eye Hybrid system: • • • • • Setting Up Supported Fixed ONVIF IP Cameras on page 305 provides information on configuring supported ONVIF IP cameras for use with a Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR. Configuring Supported ONVIF IP Cameras with Web Services on page 306 describes using supported ONVIF IP camera web services to configure the camera options. Tamper Detection with Supported ONVIF IP Cameras on page 306 gives instructions specific to using tamper detection with supported ONVIF IP cameras. Motion Detection with Supported ONVIF IP Cameras on page 306 gives instructions specific to using motion detection with supported ONVIF IP cameras. Supported ONVIF IP Camera Limitations with Rapid Eye Hybrid on page 307 describes specific limitations with supported ONVIF IP cameras when using them with Rapid Eye. Setting Up Supported Fixed ONVIF IP Cameras ONVIF IP cameras are set up the same way as Honeywell IP cameras. There are two methods for setting up supported ONVIF IP cameras: • • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 Automatically. The easiest method is to automatically discover ONVIF IP cameras and set them up to record video. Follow the procedure, Automatically Discovering IP Cameras on page 293, to automatically discover and then assign supported ONVIF IP cameras to Rapid Eye video channel. Then follow the procedure, Configuring Recording Settings on page 297, to adjust the recording settings for the ONVIF IP cameras. Manually. You also have the option of manually adding supported ONVIF IP cameras to your Rapid Eye Hybrid system. Follow the procedure, Configuring Video Channels for IP Video on page 294, to assign a Rapid Eye channel for IP video. Then follow the procedure, Configuring IP Camera Settings on page 295, to enter your ONVIF IP camera’s network and password information in the system. Finally, follow the procedure, Configuring Recording Settings on page 297, to adjust the recording settings for the supported ONVIF IP cameras you have added to the system. 305 IP Cameras Configuring Supported ONVIF IP Cameras with Web Services When setting up and configuring options for your supported ONVIF IP cameras, be aware of the following points: • • ONVIF Web services should be enabled for your camera before configuring that camera in Rapid Eye (Rapid Eye connects to the camera through the camera’s web services). The ONVIF camera should be authenticated by a web service user. Be aware that web user management can be different from web service user management with ONVIF cameras, so web interface users can be different from users listed in the web services users list. Note • If there is no option to create web service users in the supported ONVIF camera web interface, then web service users should be created using ONVIF tools like SoapUI, ONVIF device manager, and so on. If there is no web service user created for the supported ONVIF camera, Rapid Eye can connect to the camera with or without a user name and password for that camera. Tamper Detection with Supported ONVIF IP Cameras The Tamper Detection alarms (CSD alarms like Blurring, Blinding, and Scenes Changing) for supported ONVIF IP cameras need to be configured on the ONVIF camera’s web page. Note See the documentation included with your supported ONVIF IP camera for more information about logging onto the ONVIF camera’s web page and making configuration changes to the ONVIF camera. 1. Launch the ONVIF IP camera’s web page and log on. 2. Configure the tamper detection (CSD alarms) options for your supported ONVIF IP camera, as needed (see the documentation included with the ONVIF IP camera for more information). 3. Close the ONVIF IP camera web page and open a Maintenance session on the Rapid Eye unit the ONVIF camera is connecting to with the Remote View application. Make sure the same camera configured in step 2 is selected on the Video tab. 4. Select Tamper Detection (see Figure A-9). From here you can enable the Tamper Detection for this camera to Log or to raise an Alarm in the Rapid Eye system. Select the Log and/or Alarm check boxes, as needed. If enabled for Alarm, it will work the same as other alarms in the Rapid Eye system. Motion Detection with Supported ONVIF IP Cameras Motion detection for supported ONVIF IP cameras used in your Rapid Eye system needs to be configured in the corresponding ONVIF camera’s web page. 306 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Note See the documentation included with your supported ONVIF IP camera for more information about logging onto the ONVIF camera’s web page and making configuration changes to the ONVIF camera. 1. Launch the ONVIF IP camera’s web page and log on. 2. Configure the motion detection options for your supported ONVIF IP camera, as needed (see the documentation included with the ONVIF IP camera for more information). 3. Close the ONVIF IP camera web page and open a Maintenance session on the Rapid Eye unit the ONVIF camera is connecting to with the Remote View application. Make sure the same camera configured in step 2 is selected on the Video tab. 4. Make sure Record/Motion/Image is selected (see Figure A-11). From here you can enable Motion Detection for this camera to make a Log entry or to raise an Alarm in the Rapid Eye system. Select the Log and/or Alarm check boxes, as needed. If enabled for Alarm, motion detection for this camera will work the same as other alarms in the Rapid Eye system. Supported ONVIF IP Camera Limitations with Rapid Eye Hybrid Keep these following limitations in mind when using or configuring supported ONVIF IP cameras in your Rapid Eye system: • • • • • • • • Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 See Configuring Supported ONVIF IP Cameras with Web Services on page 306 for information specific to using ONVIF camera web services to configure ONVIF camera options. Configuring the 200 x 135 resolution option for Axis ONVIF P3344 camera will not render video in the Remote View application. The cause is that the wrong resolution is displayed in the camera user interface. The actual resolution is 200 x 136. Choose another resolution if this is an issue for your camera. Changing the recording resolution, FPS, and/or quality settings for supported ONVIF cameras will disconnect and reconnect the video streaming from the camera for those setting changes to take effect. While event recording is occurring for ONVIF cameras, changes in resolution, FPS, and/or quality settings will be updated in the camera when the event ends. This is because video streaming must disconnect for the setting changes to take effect. Frequently changing the resolution, FPS, and/or quality settings for supported ONVIF cameras, or frequently connecting/disconnecting with ONVIF cameras may cause the Rapid Eye DVR to restart. Due to ONVIF camera disconnections and reconnections (described above), alarms on ONVIF cameras may be reported inconsistently. If an ONVIF camera is configured to record at 20 FPS for continuous recording and 30 FPS for event recording, the actual recorded FPS may be less than what is configured. Honeywell recommends using 2–5 FPS setting for continuous recording and 20–30 FPS for event recording with supported ONVIF cameras. 307 IP Cameras Viewing Video and Alarms from IP Cameras Viewing Live and Recorded Video When viewing live or recorded video in Remote View, there is no difference between analog and IP cameras. All cameras will be listed for viewing, regardless of the type of connection used. Note IP cameras require more processing power than analog cameras do. The PC requirements for viewing IP video will be higher than for video from analog cameras. Alarm/Event Monitoring and Alarm Callback Alarms from IP cameras will be displayed in Rapid Eye in the same way as other Rapid Eye alarms. IP camera alarms can also be reported using alarm callback (see Setting Up an Alarm Station for Alarm Callback on page 244 for more information on alarm callback). IP Camera Limitations with Rapid Eye The following limitations currently apply to using IP cameras in a Rapid Eye system: • • • • • • 308 Do not use a dial-up network connection with your Rapid Eye if you have IP cameras in your system. Rapid Eye Hybrid DVRs support Honeywell equIP® V2, equIP® H.264, equIP® 1080p, equIP® Wide Dynamic Range IP, Performance IP, and/or HD3/4 IP cameras on Hybrid V10.1 units. Some ONVIF IP cameras are also supported (see http://www.security.honeywell.com/hota for a complete list of supported IP cameras). Rapid Eye Hybrid HD units support 16 channels of IP video. Rapid Eye Hybrid LT units support 4/8 channels of IP video on Hybrid LT 4/8-channel DVRs. See Supported IP Cameras on page 292 for a list of Honeywell IP cameras supported by Rapid Eye Hybrid V10.1 and V10.0 DVRs. Archival policies are not supported for video from IP cameras. Motion searching is not available for IP camera video feeds. ActivEye analytics are not available for IP cameras. Video from IP cameras will not display on a public display monitor connected to Monitor Output 1 (as a spot monitor). Only analog camera video will display. Use LocalView or the Remote View application to display IP camera video feeds. B End User License Agreement Software Products Texas Instruments Legacy JPEG/MJPEG Encoder Texas Instruments Legacy JPEG/MJPEG Decoder End User Notice The software product loaded into this Honeywell Product is not sold to you, but licensed to you (the Customer), personally, on a non-exclusive and non-transferable basis, to use the software product in object code form for its own use solely in the Honeywell Product in which the software was embedded. This product may contain programs licensed by other suppliers that are integrated into the product, with such licensed programs to be subject to the terms and conditions of this agreement. These confidential and proprietary programs conform to the requirements of Section 401 of title 17 of the United States Code that are protected by Copyright law as unpublished works and by International Treaties. You shall not export licensed software to any country except in accordance with United States Export laws and restrictions. You shall not reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble or display software furnished in object code form. You shall not modify, copy, reproduce, distribute, transcribe, translate or reduce to electronic medium or machine readable form or language, derive source code without the express written consent of the Supplier and Licensors, disseminate or otherwise disclose the software to third parties, except that Customer may make up to two (2) archival copies for use as backup provided all copyright notices are reproduced and included on such copies. All software furnished hereunder (whether or not part of firmware), including all copies thereof, are and shall, as between you and Honeywell, remain the property of Honeywell and its suppliers. All rights reserved. Removal or modification of trademarks, copyright notices, logos, and so on, or the use of software on any equipment other than that for which it is intended, or any other material breach shall automatically terminate this license. Notwithstanding any contrary provision herein, you may transfer this license if transferring the Honeywell product on which the software product is embedded, and if the transferee agrees to comply with the restrictions of this license. Upon such transfer, your license terminates and you shall destroy all copies of the software and related documentation in your possession. The software product is otherwise subject to the standard terms and conditions and documentation that accompany this Honeywell Product. Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 309 End User License Agreement 310 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide Index A access point, see password, access point access, see Rapid Eye central database, Microsoft Access account for a user, see Rapid Eye unit operator, account account rights, based on another user 183 account, Rapid Eye unit, see Rapid Eye unit operator Active Alert localview network settings only 46 unit 26 ActiveX Control Pad 28 ActivEye 186 event and alarm 219 granting rights 186 user account 186 ACUIX dome camera identification 119 configuring 117 discovery 117 firmware upgrade 119 IP 298 ACUIX PTZ driver, see Intellibus PTZ driver ADEMCO PTZ driver 104 Admin application documentation 191 granting access to 208 security options 189 starting 276 use in secure environment 191 Admin software before installation 191 documentation 191 for low security user 190 granting access to 208 in open installation 190 limiting use to System Administrator 191 security options 189 starting 276 use in secure environment 191 used to create database 279 administrator account after password is set 206 changing password 205 Honeywell recommends 178 Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 many users 178 options 182 overview 177 password 178, 206, 279 password and System Administrator 191 password as storage clearing safeguard 153 password, optional but recommended 192 remote 178 security precaution 205 setting password 205 to create Rapid Eye database 279 user based on 205 using localview 178 administrator, used as account name 181 alarm callback connection, see connection to alarm station, and alarm station dial-up customization 237 dial-up through an exchange 239 listing after interruption 244 using RAS 241 alarm log, see event log alarm panel 221 alarm port 161, 228, 242 alarm station customizing dial-up 238, 239 default telephone number 63 dial-up connection 228 dial-up connection, using RAS 241 dial-up to RAS server 242 local call across area codes 238 long distance call in an area code 239 multiple 244 notification speed 222 phone number, customizing 63 phone number, modifying 62 port, see alarm port preparations 227, 228 prioritizing 60 priority for callback 60 removing 247 right to use 228 sequencing 60 site, assigning a 61 specifying not to use 61, 248 311 when first adding 235 alarm, see event area code status, alarm station 237 asterisk password box 192 phone number customized for alarm station 63 search rule 170 audio disabling, for localview 174 Eagle audio 174 localview 174 sound card 172 spot checking 173 auto-focus, PTZ 110 auto-iris, PTZ 110 automatically discovering IP cameras 293 B B&B smart switch, see PIT bad image, for tamper detection 141 bandwidth, throughput option 159 base port 56, 59, 161 blinding a camera, see tamper detection blurring a camera, see tamper detection boost button 122 boosting values for recording video, see event recording Bossware PIT driver 104 breach of trust, see security risk button boost 122 clear storage 151 refresh 71 C callback(s), see alarm callback camera auto-discover IP cameras 293 brightness, as security risk, see security risk, and tamper detection disabling 83 duo of 96 groups, scheduling 125 Honeywell IP 291 naming 82 obstructing, see security risk, and tamper detection ONVIF IP 305 PTZ address 103 renaming 99 scheduling 126 spot checking, live 100 spot checking, recorded video 100 video feed, adjusting 82 camera groups, live video streams 176 camera sabotage detection (CSD), see tamper detection camera-day (unit) 149 categories of events 215 312 central user management, see user management character in regular expression 170 password length 192 clearing storage administrator account password 153 button 151 safeguard 153, 205 security risk 153, 208 tracing 153 client IP 163 clock clearing storage 74 correct time, setting 68 manual setting 72 on a PC 72 Rapid Eye unit 69 refresh button, SNTP server 71 setting automatically 70–71 synchronizing over dial-up 72 synchronizing unit time to PC 72 time zone conflict 70 troubleshooting 73 unit time synchronized to PC 70 comma, delay in dial-up connection 240 common network connection 45 communication settings changing, on Rapid Eye unit 160 default 160 maximum data rate, changing 160 connection alarm station 230 auto naming examples 59 dial-up customization 62 network and dial-up alternative 55 network default 52 primary connection 55 RAS and dial-up 56, 58 connection, to alarm station defining 230 information needed 230 using RAS 241 constant panning 111 continuous recording enabling 85 frame rate, setting 87 no video recording message 218 quality, setting 88 resolution, preview 92 resolution, setting 87 set to OFF, see security risk settings 85 settings, customizing 86 settings, duplicating 89 control output external PTZ controller 103 fault relay 158 customer device adding one 168 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide defined 168 door access sensor 167 event 167 guest registration system 167 messages and data 167 POS 167 recording data 167 regular expression 170 rules 168 to add a rule 169 customer device event, see event, customer device cutting password to clipboard 192 Cyberdome, Kalatel, see Kalatel D darkness, see security risk and dartboard control, PTZ 105 data device, see customer device data rate, changing maximum 160 database administrator 193, 281 date, security risk, see security risk default communication settings 160 logon to Admin 277 user account 178, 205, 279 default user, see administrator account delay dial speed for dial-up connection 239 motion detection 136 deleting folders 41 password 192 site 39 deny access to all sites 187 to localview 187 to users 187 describe rule command 131 destination ports, DVR 49 detecting sabotage, see tamper detection dew and frost, see security risk DHCP site name 46 without DNS 47 dial-up connection area code challenge 53 consistency 54 customization 62 delay dial speed 239, 240 fooling Microsoft 53 forcing local call 54 forcing long distance call 53 multiple lines 54 number needed 54 specifying 52 direct sunlight, see security risk, and tamper detection documentation, limiting distribution 191 door access sensor, see customer device Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 double-quote, in password 192 download file, from Rapid Eye unit 155 duty cycle, event recording 90 E Eagle audio 174 employee timesheet, motion detection 134 environment interfering with video 100 estimated storage capacity 90 event alarm, deferred report 222 alarm, immediate report 222 archiving alarms 273 by category 218 customer device 123, 167, 168, 215, 217, 218, 219 default 216 four categories 215 has no effect 216, 219 IP cameras 303 outside world 123, 189, 215, 218, 219 printing list of alarms 272 Rapid Eye unit 216, 218, 219 recording 216 reporting 216, 217 set to be ignored by operator 219 set to be logged 216 set to trigger alarm 216, 217 system 219 tracing 219 View operator 216, 218, 219 event log deleting items in 274 setting 216 event recording boost button 122 configuration 121 during a site tour 122 duty cycle 90 enabling 85 frame rate, setting 87 POS trigger and other triggers 131 quality, setting 88 resolution, preview 92 resolution, setting 87 response duration 133 rule 129 rule description 131 schedule 133 settings, customizing 86 settings, duplicating 89 explosion, motion detection 134 external controller, PTZ 103 external modem, setting 164 F fault relay 77, 158, 221, 222 313 feedback box, maintenance 78 file downloading from Rapid Eye unit 155 uploading to Rapid Eye unit 156 fire, motion detection 134 firewall ports 56, 59, 66, 161, 228, 242 first preset, PTZ 108, 109, 110 folders assigning sites to 41 creating 41 deleting 41 grouping 41 renaming 41 G gauntlet strategy 96 general purpose output, see control output good image, for tamper detection 141 GPO, see control output groups of cameras, for live video 176 H hardware, controlling public display monitor 166 HCU484 dome, see Honeywell fixed camera PTZ driver holidays adding 128 priority in scheduling 127 Honeywell database engine, support for 275 guideline or recommendation 197 IP cameras, supported 292 license agreement 309 system password 194 unit of compression 146 Honeywell fixed camera PTZ driver 104 Honeywell recommends administrator account 178 administrator password 74 changing the system password 190 clock setting 68 denying access 224 dialing same country setting 235 entering long distance codes 236 guidelines 54 site, securing 74 system password 74 telephone numbers include area codes 54 tips to prevent jeopardizing performance 212 using passwords 192 host IP 163 human resources officer 189 I identification, see security, presence or identification image quality (compression), Rapid Eye unit 146 314 images per second (IPS) 87 individual, identifying, see security, presence or identification input trigger for event recording 130 installing admin software 28 before 191 Rapid Eye database, used for 276 software on Windows 7 28 Intellibus ACUIX dome 116 device, configuring 116 PTZ driver 104 interfering with video, environment 100 internal modem 162 internet router 49 IP address changing 160 common network 45 DHCP 46 IP camera, finding IP address 296 network address translation 51 networked alarm station 227 quick setup wizard 45 Rapid Eye unit 159 setting with localview 45 IP cameras ACUIX IP 298 automatically discovering 293 events 303 fixed 294, 305 Honeywell IP cameras 291 limitations 308 motion detection 301, 306 ONVIF IP cameras 305 ONVIF IP limitations 307 overview 291, 305 recording settings 297 supported 292 tamper detection 300, 306 IP port 232 IPS, see images per second (IPS) J Javelin 308 PTZ driver 104 jeopardized performance, see security risk K Kalatel domes 108 Kalatel PTZ driver/Cyberdome 104 KD6, see Ultrak PTZ driver KD6i dome, see PTZ, Ultrak KD6i key personnel database administrator 193, 281 human resources officer 189 network administrator 56, 59, 66, 159 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide security officer 104, 178, 189, 213 kitchen grease, see security risk and tamper detection KTD 312, see Kalatel L LAN 159 language customization 182, 183 last valid password 202 learning, for tamper detection 142 limiting access to admin documentation 191 lit room at night, see security risk live video camera groups 176 optimization 84 resolution 84 smoothing 84 local database Rapid Eye central database and 279 updating 196 local user management, see user management localview audio 174 breach of trust 215 disabling 159 disabling audio 174 enabling 159 unit IP address 45 log deleting events 274 system 154 system messages 157 viewing and sorting 272 logging an event, see event, set to be logged logon dialog, setting language 182 long distance prefix, changing 240 lost video, triggering event recording 130 low security, see open installations LVP, see last valid password M maintenance port 66, 161 maintenance session for system password 196 messages 78 overview 65 port 66 right to modify configuration 208 scheduling tasks 77 scope 65 security 65 security rights 208 security risk 224 starting 65 system settings rights 208 tasks 209, 213 user account rights 209, 213 Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 maintenance tab monitor out 166 serial devices 162 statistics 148 system configuration 157 system files 154 manufacturer password 194 masking green mask 135 higher area 135 part of video 135 red mask 135 video, area of 135 Microsoft Access, see Rapid Eye central database, Microsoft Access Microsoft SQL-Server, see Rapid Eye central database, Microsoft SQL-Server Microsoft Windows clipboard 192 dual view 99 screen area 98 Windows 7 28 mimic tour RapidDome 112 testing, RapidDome 113 MinAdmin, Rapid Eye database template 285 modem external 164 internal 162 internal, default settings 163 PPP network settings 163 monitor high resolution 98 output, public display 167 refresh rate 99 screen area 98 monitor out tab 166 monitor output, public display monitor 167 monitoring operator error 219 power outage 219 motion detection overview 133 detection reference 136 search comparison 138 trigger for event recording 130 motion detection burglary 134 crane 134 delay 136 explosion 134 fire 134 Honeywell IP cameras 301 masking 135 ONVIF IP cameras 306 optional 133 PTZ 109, 110 reference 136 scenarios 134 315 search, comparison 138 setup 134 Smart VMD 137 timesheet 134 vermin 134 with sensors 134 moving a camera, see tamper detection moving a Rapid Eye unit changing settings 159 clearing storage 151 clearing stream 152 MSDE, see Rapid Eye central database, MSDE N name, changing for a stream 152 NAT (network address translation) IP address 51 IP port 232 LAN IP 232 NAT, see network address translation network administrator 56, 59, 66, 159 network cameras, see IP cameras network connection auto naming examples 59 common 45 default settings 160 default to Rapid Eye site 52 DHCP 46 network address translation (NAT) 51 primary connection 55 Rapid Eye site 159 RAS and dial-up 56, 58 throughput option 159 to alarm station 231 new device, see serial device noise background 173 loud alarm 173 rush hour 173 stadium crowd 173 NTSC incompatible with PAL 208 Rapid Eye 480/400 IPS unit 97 Rapid Eye LT 97 setting 159 O object, identifying, see security, presence or identification ONVIF IP cameras limitations 307 motion detection 306 overview 305 setting up fixed cameras 305 tamper detection 306 web services 306 316 open installations, Admin 190 operator account and PPP 222 account options 182 account password, see user password account rights, customization 185 account, deleting 188 account, denying access to 154, 223 account, limiting access to sites 210 account, restricted names 181 account, updating 183 accounts based on another 183 administrator account 177 alarm 216, 222 alarm station 228, 229 as user 177 clear storage 153 customer device 168 in many dial-up areas 54 localview 177 localview account 184 many users 178 modify configuration right 217 obtaining an account 181 password to user account 192 Rapid Eye unit 177 RAS 58 RAS password and username 56 rogue 154, 223 security 187 sound at PC 172 spotting video 135 time zone conflict 70 unauthorized 154, 223 uploading file to unit 156 Orbiter dome 104 outside world event, see event, outside world P PAL incompatible with NTSC 208 Rapid Eye 480/400 IPS unit 97 Rapid Eye LT 97 setting 159 video archive shorter than NTSC 147 pan, see PTZ panning, PTZ and video archive 111 parameters, system password 197 password access point 191, 222, 227 access point, features 191, 222, 227 administrator, see administrator account, password after administrator assigned 206 box 192 copying or cutting to clipboard 192 deleting 192 entering twice 192 features 192 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide file 192 for group 192 IP camera 294, 296 length 192 optional 192 parameters 192 pasting 192 PPP 222 removing, see deleting and resetting repeated use 192 resetting 192 securing from others 192 security tip 192 setting 192 system, see system password unique 192 user, see user password using text securely in 192 Pelco P/D PTZ driver/dome 104 PIT (Protocol Interface Translator) 171 point-to-point protocol (PPP) connectivity 222 dial-up 54 password precedence 56 temporary network 163 port 6, see fault relay POS device data recording 124 is a customer device 167 PIT 171 trigger for event recording 130, 131 power outage, see security risk PPP, see point-to-point protocol (PPP) presence of object or individual, see security, presence or identification preset 1, PTZ, see first preset, PTZ preset tour RapidDome 113 RapidDome, setting up 113 RapidDome, testing 115 preset, PTZ configuring 108 go to after session 110 testing 109 preventing access, see limiting access primary connection, making 55 priorities, security 190 privacy zones, PTZ (RapidDome) 115 processing load, gauging 91 protocol interface translator, see PIT PTZ ACUIX dome 116 auto-focus 110 auto-iris 110 camera address 103 close a session 110 constant panning 111 control output 103 dartboard control 105 Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 driver 77 end of session behavior 110 external controller 103 mimic tour testing, RapidDome 113 mimic tour, RapidDome 112 motion detection 109, 110 preset position after close 110 preset tour 110 preset tour, RapidDome 113 preset, configuring 108 preset, testing 109 privacy zones, RapidDome 115 rubber band control 106 serial device 102, 164 testing prest tour, RapidDome 115 tours, RapidDome 112 Ultrak KD6i restriction 108, 111 when live closes 104 zonal mode 106, 107 public display monitor hardware control of 166 IP cameras not supported 165, 308 localview 167 monitor output 1 167 overview 165 Q Quick Setup Wizard 45 Quick Start Guide 45 R Rapid Eye Active Alert 46 customer device, see event, customer device outside world event, see event, outside world Rapid Eye unit event, see event, Rapid Eye unit security, see security sockets 161 technical support 36 Rapid Eye 480/400 IPS unit, resolution gauge 97 Rapid Eye Active Alert unit 26 Rapid Eye central database creating at log on 279 creating empty SQL-Server 193, 282 creating MS-Access 280 creating SQL-Server 281 empty 279 local Rapid Eye database and 279 making a copy 284 Microsoft Access engine 277, 280 Microsoft SQL-Server engine 193, 277, 281, 282 MSDE engine 277 providing MinAdmin template 285 refreshing local database 289 reuse of 287 security of 192, 289 317 setting for View 288 switching to another 278 upgrading local without central 286 Rapid Eye database, for installation 276 Rapid Eye LT, resolution gauge 97 Rapid Eye unit adding, when system password in use 201, 202 alarm station, see also alarm station changing communication settings 160 clock, setting 69 downloading file 155 identification 157 moving 151, 152, 159 remove system password from all 198 removing system password 198 serial number 68, 157 serial port 168 system log 154, 155, 157 uploading file to 156 version number 157 Rapid Eye unit operator account and PPP 222 account options 182 account password, see user password account rights, customization 185 account, deleting 188 account, denying access to 154, 223 account, limiting access to sites 210 account, restricted names 181 account, updating 183 accounts based on another 183 administrator account 177 alarm 216, 222 alarm station 228, 229 as user 177 clear storage 153 customer device 168 in many dial-up areas 54 localview 177 localview account 184 many users 178 modify configuration right 217 obtaining an account 181 password to user account 192 PTZ use 104 RAS 58 RAS password and username 56 rights, see user account rights rogue 154, 223 security 187 sound at PC 172 spotting video 135 time zone conflict 70 unauthorized 154, 223 uploading file to unit 156 View-only user 191 RapidDome baud rate 104 feature support 111 318 mimic tour 112 mimic tour, testing 113 preset tour 113 preset tour, testing 115 privacy zones 115 PTZ tours 112 RAS server connection definition 57 need to use 58 to connect to alarm station 241 recording settings continuous recording 85 optimizing for video 90 viewing 85 recording video, see continuous recording and event recording refresh button, SNTP server 71 regular expression 170 resetting, password 192 resolution best 96 gauge 96, 97 ONVIF IP camera issue 307 preview for recording 93 preview recorded video 92 selection tips 93 setting 87 restricted names, user account 181 retrieval, slow rewind 88 rogue session ending, on network 225 router 49 rubber band control, PTZ 106 rules customer device 168 data recording 169 event recording 131 running, for tamper detection 142 rush hour 173 S scene change 141 scheduling assigning 126 camera 126 configuration 123 customizing for a camera 125 disarm alarms 127 groups of cameras 125 screen area, monitor 98 secure site 197 security additional 190 administrator password 205 alarm log 274 alarm notification 222 alarm use 217 basic 205 before adding users 177 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide central database, see security, Rapid Eye central database, protecting denying access 154, 223 event, by type 218 event, see event events, by type 219 false positives 136 high 191 limit use of Admin 190 low 190 maintenance session 65 maintenance tab 153, 248 maximum 190 optional 190, 191, 192, 194, 206, 219, 222, 227 password features 192 password tip 192 password, point-of-access 191, 222, 227 presence or identification 93, 94 priorities 190 PTZ domes 104 Rapid Eye central database 190 Rapid Eye database, protecting 192, 289 RAS server 190, 222 rights 206 rogue user 154 setting an alarm 216 site tour 265 suggestion 189 System Administrator, and 189 system files 154 system status 197 tracing events 219 updating 153, 248 user password 205 with System Administrator 178 your organization’s 189 security officer account rights 213 defining security needs 189 recommended actions 191 unit system log 154 security risk breach of trust 213 burglary 134 camera brightness 213 camera recording set to OFF 213, 214 camera spot check, live 100 camera spot check, recorded video 100 checklist 213 clear storage button 153, 208, 214 countermeasure 214 crane 134 darkness 100 dew and frost 100 direct sunlight 100, 213 environmental interference, video 100 explosion 134 fire 134 jeopardizing performance 212 Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 lit room, at night 100, 213 many Rapid Eye databases 213, 214 obstructing a camera 100, 213 power outage 100, 213 preventative measures 212 scheduled 134 storage clearing 152 system password 224 time/date 214 to alarms 214 UPS 100, 213 vandalism 100, 213 vermin 134 security, optional, alarm stations 60 SensorMatic dome 104 serial device maintenance tab 162 new 102 POS communications 168 PTZ 102, 164 serial number Rapid Eye unit 68 unit registration 157 sessions, maximum simultaneous 175 setting database to recognize a used unit’s password 204 database to recognize a used unit’s system password 204 password 192 user password 204 simultaneous live video, camera groups 176 sessions 175 streams 176 use of units 176 site accidental deletion 40 alarm station, assigning to 61 alarm station, disabling 61 alarm station, not to be used 248 deleting a 39 site name DHCP 46 localview vs. admin 38 maintenance system tab 38 site tour changing duration of 268 changing site order 267 configuration 265 preparations 265 security, and 265 selecting connections for 268 two or more units needed 265, 268 site, Rapid Eye denying access 207 limiting access, using user account 210 not protected 197 prioritizing an alarm station 60 protected 197 319 secure 197 smart switch, B&B, see PIT Smart VMD (video motion detection) 137 SNTP server 69 sockets, Rapid Eye and firewall 161 software admin 28 unit version 68 sound card 172 soundscape 173 spot checking audio 173 video 100 SQL-Server, see Rapid Eye central database, Microsoft SQL-Server stadium crowd 173 star, see asterisk statistics maintenance tab 148 storage, to view 148 status, system password 197 storage camera-day 149 cleared, tracing 153 clearing 151 prevent clearing of 152 statistics, viewing 148 stream 151 storage estimator 143 streams changing names of 152 clearing 152 maximum simultaneous 176 maximum simultaneous live video 176 support for older unit models 66 synchronizing over dial-up 72 unit time to PC 72 system default values 161 fault relay 158 LAN/WAN 159 NTSC/PAL 159 pulse 158 System Administrator account, see administrator account alarm session user, defining 217 alarm station preparations 227, 228 clock, synchronizing 69, 72 defining a customer device event 168 downloading unit system log 154 maintenance, scheduling 77 network administrator and 228 other administrators, limiting number of 191 PPP information needed 190 rights of 219 security deployment 189 sole user of Admin 190 tasks for maintenance 209, 213 320 time zone, setting 69 users, before adding accounts 177 View operators and 217, 228 with security officer 178 system configuration, maintenance tab 157 system files, maintenance tab 154 system monitoring, see fault relay system password after mistakenly deleting a site 204 copying to Rapid Eye unit 196 effect 197 limiting user access 177 LVP (last valid password) 202, 213 many units in a system 200 new Rapid Eye unit 201 old 197 older 200 optional, but recommended 74, 192, 194 overview 191 Rapid Eye technical support 194 removing from all units 198 removing from one unit 198 security risk 224 setting 194 status 197 step, updating users 196 System Administrator’s responsibility 191 updating users 196 used with Rapid Eye unit 202 using other Rapid Eye database 200 T table area code status, alarm station connection 237 connection to alarm station, System Administrator 230 tamper detection alarms 142 bad image 141 calibration 141 darkness 100 good image 141 Honeywell IP cameras 300 learning 142 obstructed view 213 ONVIF IP cameras 306 optional 139 running 142 setup 140 TCP ports alarm 161, 228, 242 base 56, 59, 161 maintenance 66, 161 technical support auto-synch statistics 71 calling 36 Rapid Eye 149, 156, 157, 191, 195, 203, 213, 215 rebooting 74 Rapid Eye Hybrid DVR System Administrator Guide recording 85 test pattern 166 throughput option 159 tilt, see PTZ time zone conflict 70 Rapid Eye unit 69 time, security risk, see security risk timesheet, motion detection 134 toll-free numbers, customizing 238 tour, see site tour, public display monitor, and, PTZ tour tours, PTZ (RapidDome) 112 triggering an alarm, see event, set to trigger alarm troubleshooting, clock 73 U Ultrak PTZ driver 104 unit clock, setting 69 compression, Honeywell 146 serial number 68 unit user, see Rapid Eye unit operator unwanted user 154, 224 uploading file from Rapid Eye unit 156 UPS, security risk 213 user account granting more or less rights 185 name restriction 181 removing 188 user account rights assigning 207 based on other 207 denying 207 denying access to all sites 187 denying site access 207 for accessing sites 210 for using Admin 208 for using maintenance 208 for using View 209 guidelines 206 optional 206 removing 207 storage clearing, preventing 152 viewing 207 user accounts 177 user management Admin software 179 central 180 central and localview 181 local 179 older units 179 user password after assigning to user 204 after setting 204 Document 800-02953V9 Rev A 01/2013 changing 204 optional 192 overview 192 setting 204 user, Rapid Eye unit, see Rapid Eye unit operator V vandalism, see security risk, and tamper detection vermin, motion detection 134 version number 157 video color 84 screen area 85 smoothing 84 video analytics, trigger for event recording 130 video archive 24/7 145 audio 145 frame rate 146 higher recording values 147 length 142 number of cameras 145 prevent clearing of 152 PTZ 146 quality setting 146 recycling 142, 144 resolution 147 scheduling 145 scheduling camera 124 storage estimator 143 too short 143 video capture card for public display monitor 167 video recording, see continuous recording and event recording video recording, set to OFF, see security risk View operator event, see event, View operator View, used in secure environment 191 W WAN 159 WAN IP 232 watch dog, see fault relay web services, for ONVIF IP cameras 306 when live closes, PTZ 104 Win 98 284 Windows, dial-up networking 54 Z zonal mode, PTZ 106, 107 zoom, see PTZ 321 322 Honeywell Systems (Head Office) 2700 Blankenbaker Pkwy, Suite 150 Louisville, KY 40299, USA www.honeywellsystems.com  +1.800.323.4576 Honeywell Security Northern Europe Ampèrestraat 41 1446 TR Purmerend, The Netherlands www.honeywell.com/security/nl  +31.299.410.200 Honeywell Security Europe/South Africa Aston Fields Road, Whitehouse Industrial Estate Runcorn, Cheshire, WA7 3DL, UK www.honeywell.com/security/uk  +44.01928.754028 Honeywell Security Deutschland Johannes-Mauthe-Straße 14 D-72458 Albstadt, Germany www.honeywell.com/security/de  +49 74 31 / 8 01-18 70 Honeywell Systems Caribbean/Latin America 9315 NW 112th Ave. Miami, FL 33178, USA www.honeywellsystems.com  +1.305.805.8188 Honeywell Systems Pacific Level 3, 2 Richardson Place North Ryde, NSW 2113, Australia www.honeywellsecurity.com.au  +61.2.9353.7000 Honeywell Systems Asia 35F Tower A, City Center, 100 Zun Yi Road Shanghai 200051, China www.asia.security.honeywell.com  +86 21.5257.4568 Honeywell Security Middle East/N. Africa Post Office Box 18530 LOB Building 08, Office 199 Jebel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates www.honeywell.com/security/me  +971.04.881.5506 Honeywell Security France Immeuble Lavoisier Parc de Haute Technologie 3-7 rue George Besse 92160, Antony, France www.honeywell.com/security/fr  +33.(0).1.40.96.20.50 Honeywell Security Italia SpA Via della Resistenza 53/59 20090 Buccinasco Milan, Italy www.honeywell.com/security/it  +39.02.4888.051 Honeywell Security España Avenida de Italia, n° 7, 2a planta P.I. - C.T.C. Coslada 28821 Coslada, Madrid, Spain www.honeywell.com/security/es  +34.902.667.800 www.honeywellvideo.com +1.800.323.4576 (North America only) https://www.honeywellsystems.com/ss/techsupp/index.html Document 800-02953V9 – Rev A – 01/2013 © 2013 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced by any means without written permission from Honeywell. The information in this publication is believed to be accurate in all respects. However, Honeywell cannot assume responsibility for any consequences resulting from the use thereof. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. Revisions or new editions to this publication may be issued to incorporate such changes.